652 Service

SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION TOTAL CONTENTS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ..............................................................S-1
IMPORTANT NOTICE ................................................................................................S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION .........................S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS .................................................................................................S-2
WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE ........................................................S-18
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT ....................................................S-21
Composition of the service manual ................................................................................. C-1
Notation of the service manual ....................................................................................... C-2
bizhub 652/552/602/502 Main body

OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION .................................................................................. 17
DF-618
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION .................................................................................... 6
LU-301
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
LU-204
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
ZU-606
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
FS-526
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
SD-508
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
PK-516
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
JS-602
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
PI-505
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
FS-527
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
PK-517
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
SD-509
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
JS-603
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
AU-101/AU-102/AU-201/OT-503
AU-101/AU-102............................................................................................................... 1
AU-201............................................................................................................................ 2
OT-503 ............................................................................................................................ 3
EK-604/605/SC-507
EK-604............................................................................................................................ 1
EK-605............................................................................................................................ 2
SC-507 ........................................................................................................................... 4
SA-502
ii
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the safety and important warning items described below to understand them
before doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
(hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by
KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that
the information contained in this service manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this service manual is intended.
Therefore, this service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the
course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of
the product properly.
Keep this service manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER,

WARNING AND CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions
DANGER,
WARNING, and
CAUTION is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited

meaning.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,
repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury
WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium
trouble, and property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when servicing the

product.
:Prohibition when servicing the
product.
:Direction when servicing the
product.
General
precaution
Electric hazard High temperature
General
prohibition
Do not touch
with wet hand
Do not
disassemble
General
instruction
Unplug
Ground/Earth
S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA
BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is
achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving
at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve
a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore
strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.
Prohibited Actions
DANGER
Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT.

Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and
injury.
Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with
wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between
relay contacts).
Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.).

Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and
injury.
Making any modification to the product unless instructed
by KMBT.
Using parts not specified by KMBT.
S-2
[2] POWER PLUG SELECTION

In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet
used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE)
to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the
supply.
Power Cord Set or Power Plug

WARNING
Use power supply cord set which meets the following
criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration intended for
the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the products rated voltage and current, and
kw
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and

- provided with three-conductor cable having enough current capacity, and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock.
Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:
- having configuration intended for the connection to wall
outlet appropriate for the products rated voltage and
current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
Conductors in the power cable must be connected to terminals of the plug according to the following order:
Black or Brown:L (line)
White or Light Blue:N (neutral)
Green/Yellow:PE (earth)
Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the
product, and results in fire or electric shock.
S-3
[3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all
applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical
equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety
and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
1.
Power Supply
Connection to Power Supply

WARNING
Check that mains voltage is as specified.
Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or
electric shock.
Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same
configuration as the plug.
Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to
inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer
to contact qualified electrician for the installation.
Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a
capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may
result.
If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall
outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall
outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may
result.
Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet
securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance,
overheating, and the risk of fire.
Check whether the product is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you
may suffer electric shock while operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.
S-4
kw
Power Plug and Cord

WARNING
When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with
this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted
in the inlet of the product.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with
the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the product securely, a contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or
pinched by a table and so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check

whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace
with a new power cord (with plug and connector on each
end) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged power cord
may result in fire or electric shock.
Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
Check whether dust is collected around the power plug

and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing
dust may result in fire.
Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet
hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the
cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and
electric shock.
S-5
Wiring
WARNING
Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords
in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.

Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so
using a too long extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken
up. Fire may result.
2.
Installation Requirements
Prohibited Installation Places

WARNING
Do not place the product near flammable materials or volatile materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such
as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
When not Using the Product for a long time

WARNING
When the product is not used over an extended period of
time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power
cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may
cause fire.
S-6
Ventilation
CAUTION
The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it
will not be harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases,
ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the same time
Stability
CAUTION
Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may
slide, leading to a injury.
Inspection before Servicing

CAUTION
Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and
proceed with the inspection following the prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the product may break and a risk of injury or fire exists.
Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect
the power plugs from the product and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some
units are still powered even if the POWER switch is
turned OFF. A risk of electric shock exists.
The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burnt.
S-7
Inspection before Servicing

CAUTION
Do not leave the machine unattended during transportation, installation, and inspection of the machine. If it is to
be unavoidably left unattended, face protrusions toward
the wall or take other necessary risk reducing action.
The user may stumble over a protrusion of the machine
or be caught by a cable, falling to the floor or being
injured.
Work Performed with the Product Powered On

WARNING
Take every care when making adjustments or performing
an operation check with the product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check
with the external cover detached, you may touch live or
high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears
or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
Take every care when servicing with the external cover
detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
If it is absolutely necessary to service the machine with
the door open or external covers removed, always be
attentive to the motion of the internal parts.
A normally protected part may cause unexpected hazards.
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other
damage.
The user or CE may be injured.
Whenever mounting an option on the machine, be attentive to the motion of the fellow worker of the joint work.
The fellow worker may be injured with his or her finger or
hand pinched between the machine and the option.
S-8
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
When mounting an option on the machine, be careful
about the clearance between the machine and the option.
You may be injured with your finger or hand pinched
between the machine and the option.
When removing a part that secures a motor, gear, or other
moving part, disassembling a unit, or reinstalling any of
such parts and units, be careful about moving parts and
use care not to drop any part or unit. During the service
procedure, give sufficient support for any heavy unit.
You may be injured by a falling part or unit.
Check the external covers and frame for possible sharp
edges, burrs, and damage.
They can be a cause of injury during use or servicing.
When accessing a hard-to-view or narrow spot, be careful
about sharp edges and burrs of the frame and parts.
They may injure your hands or fingers.
Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and
screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock
or fire.
Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or
fire.
Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona
unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or
fire.
Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.
fire.
Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for

deterioration and sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
S-9
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit)
incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has
been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of
loss of eyesight.
Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply
power with the write unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of
loss of eyesight.
When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose
of the used lithium battery using the method specified by
local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g.,
optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and
check whether the interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an
electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in
the product (e.g., for clearing paper jam).
Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp
edges, burrs, or other pointed parts.
fire.
Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
S-10
Handling of Consumables
WARNING
Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care
must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the
substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be
stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water
immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a
physician.
Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.
You may be burned due to dust explosion.
Handling of Service Materials

CAUTION
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are highly flammable and must be handled
with care. A risk of fire exists.
Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before
any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully
evaporated.
Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take
care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately
wipe it off.
When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.
Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to
discomfort.
S-11
[4] Used Batteries Precautions

ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.
Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
France
ATTENTION
Il y a danger dexplosion sil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant.
Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering.
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren.
Finland, Sweden
VAROlTUS
Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
S-12
[5] Laser Safety

This is a digital machine certified as a Class 1 laser product. There is no possibility of
danger from a laser, provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this
manual.
5.1
Internal Laser Radiation

semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode
Maximum average radiation power (*)

Wavelength
bizhub 652/602
bizhub 552/502
30 mW
13.8 W
11.8 W
775-800 nm
*at laser aperture of the Print Head Unit

This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam. The
laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit.
The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICEABLE ITEM. Therefore, the print head unit
should not be opened under any circumstances.
Laser Aperture
of the Print Head
Unit
Print Head Unit
A2WUP0C001DA
S-13

U.S.A., Canada
(CDRH Regulation)
This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory
for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for
Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of
the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device
does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
The label shown on page S-16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and
must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
.
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
semiconductor laser
30 mW
Wavelength
775-800 nm
All Areas
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
semiconductor laser
30 mW
Wavelength
775-800 nm
Denmark
ADVARSEL
Usynlig laserstrling ved bning, nr sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion.
Undg udsttelse for strling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825-1
sikkerheds kravene.
halvlederlaser
S-14
Laserdiodens hjeste styrke
30 mW
blgelngden
775-800 nm

Finland, Sweden
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
VAROITUS!
Laitteen kyttminen muulla kuin tss kyttohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa kyttjn turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittvlle nkymttmlle lasersteilylle.
puolijohdelaser
Laserdiodin suurin teho
30 mW
aallonpituus
775-800 nm
VARNING!
Om apparaten anvnds p annat stt n i denna bruksanvisning specificerats,
kan anvndaren utsttas fr osynlig laserstrlning, som verskrider grnsen fr
laserklass 1.
halvledarlaser
Den maximala effekten fr laserdioden
30 mW
vglngden
775-800 nm
VARO!
Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina nkymttomlle lasersteilylle. l katso steeseen.
VARNING!
Osynlig laserstrining nr denna del r ppnad och sprren r urkopplad.
Betrakta ej strien.
Norway
ADVERSEL
Dersom apparatet brukes p annen mte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes fr unsynlig laserstrlning, som overskrider grensen
for laser klass 1.
halvleder laser
Maksimal effekt till laserdiode
30 mW
blgelengde
775-800 nm
S-15
5.2
Laser Safety Label
A laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below.
* Only for the U.S.A.
A2WUP0E007DA
5.3
Laser Caution Label
A laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.
A2WUP0C002DA
S-16
5.4
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT
When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the
above specifications.
When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when
working around the printerhead and PC drum, be sure first to turn the printer OFF.
If the job requires that the printer be left ON, take off your watch and ring and wear laser
protective goggles.
A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path. Use
utmost care when handling tools on the users premises.
S-17
WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should
be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
WARNING
Do not burn used toner cartridges.
Toner expelled from the fire is
dangerous.
CAUTION
The area around the fusing unit is
extremely hot.
Touching any part other than those
indicated may result in burns.
WARNING
Do not burn the used waste toner
box. Toner expelld from the fire is
dangerous.
A2WUP0E004DA
S-18
High voltage
This area generates high voltage.
Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned
ON to avoid getting an electric shock.
High voltage
A0P0P0E509DA
S-19
High voltage
High voltage
A2WUP0E005DA
CAUTION:
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to
touch by any caution label. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has
come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our service
office.
S-20
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN

ACCIDENT
1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately
take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further
damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded
through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations specified by every distributor.
S-21
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
Blank Page
S-22
Composition of the service manual

This service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to
explain the main machine and its corresponding options.
Theory of Operation section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of
the product, a rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationship
between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of
each part.
Field Service section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the customers premise), a rough outline of the service schedule and its details, maintenance
steps, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.
The basic configuration of each section is as follows. However some options may not be
applied to the following configuration.
<Theory of Operation section>
OUTLINE:
Explanation of system configuration,

product specifications, unit configuration, and paper path
CONFIGURATION/
Explanation of configuration of each unit,
OPERATION:
operating system, and control system
<Field Service section>

OUTLINE:
Explanation of system configuration, and product

specifications
MAINTENANCE:
Explanation of service schedule, maintenance steps, service tools, removal/reinstallation methods of major parts,
and firmware version up method etc.
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING:
Explanation of utility mode, service mode, and mechanical
TROUBLESHOOTING:
Explanation of lists of jam codes and error codes, and
APPENDIX:
Parts layout drawings, connector layout drawings, timing
adjustment etc.
their countermeasures etc.
chart, overall layout drawing are attached.
C-1
Notation of the service manual

A. Product name
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
(1) bizhub 652/552/602/502:
Main body
(2) Microsoft Windows XP:
Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista:
Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows 7:
Windows 7
Microsoft Windows Server 2003:
Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows Server 2008:
Windows Server 2008
When the description is made in combination of the OSs mentioned above:

Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/
Server 2003
Windows 7/Vista/XP
Windows Server 2008/Server 2003
NOTE
bizhub 602/502 described in this manual is available only as Taiwan model.
B. Brand name
The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or
the registered trademark of each company.
C. Feeding direction
When the long side of the paper is parallel with the feeding direction, it is called short
edge feeding. The feeding direction which is perpendicular to the short edge feeding is
called the long edge feeding.
Short edge feeding will be identified with [S (abbreviation for Short edge feeding)] on the
paper size. No specific notation is added for the long edge feeding.
When the size has only the short edge feeding with no long edge feeding, [S] will not be
added to the paper size.
<Sample notation>
Paper size
A4
A3
C-2
Feeding direction
Notation
Long edge feeding
A4
Short edge feeding
A4S
Short edge feeding
A3
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
652/552/602/502
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark
Issue of the first edition

Descriptions of revision
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
CONTENTS
bizhub 652/552/602/502 Main body
OUTLINE
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION................................................................................... 1
2.
bizhub 652/552/602/502 ....................................................................................... 1

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ 3
2.1
Type ...................................................................................................................... 3
2.2
Functions .............................................................................................................. 4
2.3
Paper .................................................................................................................... 6
2.4
Materials ............................................................................................................... 7
2.5
Print volume.......................................................................................................... 7
2.6
Machine specifications.......................................................................................... 8
2.7
Operating environment ......................................................................................... 8
2.8
Print functions ....................................................................................................... 9
2.9
Scan functions .................................................................................................... 12
3.
SECTION CONFIGURATION................................................................................ 14
4.
PAPER PATH......................................................................................................... 15
4.1
bizhub 652/552/602/502 ..................................................................................... 15
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
5.
OVERALL CONFIGURATION ............................................................................... 17
5.1
Control block diagram ......................................................................................... 17
5.2
Image creation process ...................................................................................... 18
5.3
Image forming control ......................................................................................... 20
5.4
6.
Process speed .................................................................................................... 20

INTERFACE SECTION ......................................................................................... 21
6.1
Configuration ...................................................................................................... 21
6.1.1
Front side ................................................................................................... 21
6.1.2
Rear side..................................................................................................... 22
6.1.3
Right side .................................................................................................... 24
7.
SCANNER SECTION............................................................................................ 29
7.1
Configuration ...................................................................................................... 29
7.2
Drive ................................................................................................................... 30
7.3
Operation ............................................................................................................ 31
7.3.1
When the power is ON ................................................................................ 31
7.3.2
Control when the Start key is pressed ........................................................ 32
7.3.3
DF original glass cleaning control ............................................................... 35
OUTLINE
1.1
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
1.
bizhub 652/552/602/502

7.3.4
Original scanning area................................................................................ 37
7.3.5
Original size detection control..................................................................... 38
7.3.6
Image processing ....................................................................................... 40
8.
WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION) ........................................................................ 41

Configuration ...................................................................................................... 41
8.2
Operation............................................................................................................ 42
OUTLINE
8.1
8.2.1
Outline ........................................................................................................ 42
8.2.2
Laser exposure process.............................................................................. 44
8.2.3
Laser emission timing ................................................................................. 46
8.2.4
Laser emission stop.................................................................................... 47
8.2.5
Laser emission area ................................................................................... 47
8.2.6
Image processing ....................................................................................... 48
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
9.
TONER SUPPLY SECTION .................................................................................. 49
9.1
Configuration ...................................................................................................... 49
9.2
Drive ................................................................................................................... 50
9.2.1
Toner cartridge drive................................................................................... 50
9.2.2
Toner hopper drive...................................................................................... 50
9.3
10.
Operation............................................................................................................ 51
9.3.1
Replenishing the toner hopper with toner ................................................... 51
9.3.2
Replenishing the developing unit with toner ............................................... 53
9.3.3
Toner cartridge life control .......................................................................... 55
9.3.4
Toner cartridge detection ............................................................................ 57
9.3.5
Toner spill prevention shutter ...................................................................... 58
IMAGING UNIT SECTION .................................................................................... 59
10.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 59

10.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 60
10.2.1
Drum unit drive ........................................................................................... 60
10.2.2
Developing unit drive .................................................................................. 61
10.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 62
11.
10.3.1
Outline ........................................................................................................ 62
10.3.2
Imaging unit detection................................................................................. 62
DRUM UNIT SECTION ......................................................................................... 63
11.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 63

11.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 64
11.2.1
Photo conductor drive................................................................................. 64
11.2.2
Charge corona cleaner drive ...................................................................... 65
11.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 66
11.3.1
ii
Photo conductor drive gear......................................................................... 66
12.
11.3.2
Main erase lamp control.............................................................................. 68
11.3.3
Photo conductor cleaning ........................................................................... 69
11.3.4
Photo conductor charge control .................................................................. 69
11.3.5
Charge corona cleaning control .................................................................. 70
11.3.6
Ozone removal............................................................................................ 72
11.3.7
Detection of drum unit/K ............................................................................. 73
bizhub 652/552/602/502
DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION ............................................................................ 75
12.3 Operation ............................................................................................................ 77
13.
12.3.1
Developer flow............................................................................................. 77
12.3.2
Auto refining developing system ................................................................. 79
12.3.3
Developing bias........................................................................................... 80
12.3.4
Toner density control ................................................................................... 81
12.3.5
Detection of developing unit/K .................................................................... 82
12.3.6
Toner scattering prevention......................................................................... 83
12.3.7
Image stabilization control .......................................................................... 83
1st TRANSFER SECTION .................................................................................... 84
13.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 84

13.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 86
13.2.1
Transfer belt drive........................................................................................ 86
13.2.2
Transfer belt cleaning section drive ............................................................. 87
13.2.3
1st transfer roller drive ................................................................................ 88
13.3 Operation ............................................................................................................ 89
14.
13.3.1
1st transfer roller control ............................................................................. 89
13.3.2
Transfer belt cleaning .................................................................................. 91
13.3.3
Image stabilization control .......................................................................... 92
2nd TRANSFER SECTION ................................................................................... 93
14.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 93

14.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 95
14.2.1
Pressure/retraction drive ............................................................................. 95
14.2.2
2nd transfer roller drive ............................................................................... 95
14.3 Operation ............................................................................................................ 96

14.3.1
2nd transfer roller control ............................................................................ 96
14.3.2
2nd transfer control ..................................................................................... 97
14.3.3
2nd transfer roller cleaning.......................................................................... 98
14.3.4
Paper separation control ............................................................................. 99
14.3.5
Sensor protection ...................................................................................... 100
iii
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
12.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 76
OUTLINE
12.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 75
bizhub 652/552/602/502

15.
TONER COLLECTING SECTION....................................................................... 101
15.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 101

15.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 103
15.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 104
OUTLINE
15.3.1
16.
Waste toner collecting path to the waste toner box .................................. 104
15.3.2
Toner path in the waste toner box............................................................. 108
15.3.3
Waste toner box set detection .................................................................. 111
15.3.4
Waste toner box full detection................................................................... 112
PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)......................................................... 114
16.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 114

16.1.1
Major components .................................................................................... 114
16.1.2
Layout of sensors and rollers.................................................................... 115
16.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 116

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
16.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 117
17.
16.3.1
Up/down control........................................................................................ 117
16.3.2
Paper feed control..................................................................................... 119
16.3.3
Paper size detection control...................................................................... 126
16.3.4
Remaining paper detection control ........................................................... 128
16.3.5
Paper temperature detection control......................................................... 129
PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)......................................................... 130
17.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 130

17.1.1
Major components (tray3) ......................................................................... 130
17.1.2
Major components (tray3 horizontal transport section)............................. 131
17.1.3
Major components (tray4) ......................................................................... 132
17.1.4
Layout of sensors and rollers.................................................................... 133
17.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 134

17.2.1
Tray3 ......................................................................................................... 134
17.2.2
Tray3 horizontal transport ......................................................................... 134
17.2.3
Tray4 ......................................................................................................... 135
17.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 136
18.
iv
17.3.1
Up/down control........................................................................................ 136
17.3.2
Paper Feed control ................................................................................... 139
17.3.3
17.3.4
17.3.5
Dehumidification heater control ................................................................ 149
17.3.6
Detection of tray3/4 slid out/in................................................................... 150
17.3.7
Detection of horizontal transport unit slid out/in........................................ 151
PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY) ......................................................... 152
18.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 153

18.3 Operation .......................................................................................................... 154
19.
18.3.1
Bypass paper lifting motion control ........................................................... 154
18.3.2
paper feed control ..................................................................................... 155
18.3.3
18.3.4
18.3.5
Detection of bypass unit opened/closed ................................................... 161
18.3.6
Detection of bypass sub tray extended/retracted ...................................... 162
VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION................................................................... 163
19.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 163
OUTLINE
18.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 152
bizhub 652/552/602/502
19.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 164
20.
19.3.1
Vertical transport control ........................................................................... 165
19.3.2
Transport motor control ............................................................................. 165
19.3.3
Operation timing........................................................................................ 165
REGISTRATION SECTION................................................................................. 167
20.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 167

20.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 167
20.3 Operation .......................................................................................................... 168
21.
20.3.1
Registration control ................................................................................... 168
20.3.2
OHP detection........................................................................................... 170
20.3.3
Paper transport speed control................................................................... 171
FUSING SECTION.............................................................................................. 172
21.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 172

21.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 174
21.2.1
Heating roller drive .................................................................................... 174
21.2.2
Fusing pressure roller pressure drive........................................................ 174
21.3 Operation .......................................................................................................... 175

21.3.1
Fusing speed correction............................................................................ 175
21.3.2
Fusing pressure/retraction control............................................................. 178
21.3.3
Heating roller heating control .................................................................... 179
21.3.4
Heating control of the fusing pressure roller ............................................. 184
21.3.5
Fusing temperature control ....................................................................... 185
21.3.6
Heating roller temperature sensor............................................................. 190
21.3.7
Heating roller temperature sensor condensation detection....................... 191
21.3.8
Heating roller alternative temperature control ........................................... 192
21.3.9
Heating roller temperature sensor contamination detection control.......... 192
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
19.3 Operation .......................................................................................................... 165
bizhub 652/552/602/502

21.3.10 Protection against abnormal temperature................................................. 193
21.3.11 Sensor disconnection detection control .................................................... 194
21.3.12 Brandnew detection .................................................................................. 195
21.3.13 Fusing cooling control............................................................................... 195
22.
DUPLEX SECTION............................................................................................. 198
22.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 198

22.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 199
OUTLINE
22.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 200
23.
22.3.1
Paper conveyance control......................................................................... 200
22.3.2
Duplex circulation control.......................................................................... 202
PAPER EXIT SECTION ...................................................................................... 208
23.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 208

23.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 209
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
23.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 210

23.3.1
24.
Transport control ....................................................................................... 210
IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL ................................................................... 213
24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 213

24.1.1
Image stabilization control chart ............................................................... 214
24.1.2
Overview of each control .......................................................................... 215
24.2 Image stabilization control operation sequence ............................................... 217

24.3 Image stabilization control operating condition ................................................ 218
24.3.1
In standby state ........................................................................................ 218
24.3.2
Before, during, and after a print cycle....................................................... 219
24.4 Utility/Service Mode.......................................................................................... 220

24.4.1
Expert Adjustment .................................................................................... 220
24.4.2
Service Mode............................................................................................ 220
24.5 Image stabilization control operating time ........................................................ 221

25.
IMAGE PROCESSING........................................................................................ 222
25.1 Scanner section image processing block diagram ........................................... 222

25.2 Write section image processing block diagram ................................................ 223
26.
POWER SUPPLY SECTION............................................................................... 226
26.1 Parts energized when the main power switch is turned ON ............................. 226
26.1.1
Configuration ............................................................................................ 226
26.1.2
Operation .................................................................................................. 226
26.1.3
Auto power OFF system ........................................................................... 227
26.2 Parts energized when the sub power switch is turned ON ............................... 228
26.2.1
Configuration ............................................................................................ 228
26.2.2
Operation .................................................................................................. 228
26.3 Power cables .................................................................................................... 229
vi
Configuration............................................................................................. 229
26.3.2
Operation .................................................................................................. 229
FAN CONTROL................................................................................................... 230
27.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 230

27.2 Operation .......................................................................................................... 231
28.
27.2.1
Function .................................................................................................... 231
27.2.2
Control conditions ..................................................................................... 232
COUNTER CONTROL ........................................................................................ 235
28.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 235
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
28.2 Operation .......................................................................................................... 235
OUTLINE
27.
26.3.1
bizhub 652/552/602/502
vii
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OUTLINE
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Blank Page
viii
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
OUTLINE
1.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.1
bizhub 652/552/602/502
1/2 System front view

[19]
[20]
[22]
[21]
[2]
[3]
[4]
OUTLINE
[1]
[5]
[18]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[17]
[15]
[14]
[11]
[16]
[13]
[12]
A0P0F1E503DC
[1]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[12]
Finisher
[2]
Authentication unit: Biometric type AU-101
[13]
Saddle stitcher
SD-509
[3]
Authentication unit: Biometric type AU-102
[14]
Job separator
JS-603
[4]
Authentication unit: IC card type AU-201
[15]
Punch kit
PK-517
[5]
Working table
[16]
Z folding unit
ZU-606
[6]
Keyboard holder
KH-101
[17]
Saddle stitcher
SD-508
[7]
Local interface kit
EK-604
[18]
Finisher
FS-526
[8]
Local interface kit
EK-605 *1
[19]
Punch kit
PK-516
[9]
Mount kit
MK-715 *2
[20]
Post inserter
PI-505
[10]
Large capacity unit
LU-301
[21]
Job separator
JS-602
[11]
Large capacity unit
LU-204
[22]
Output tray
OT-503
WT-506
FS-527
*1: This option may not be available depending on the sales area.
*2: Except for the North America and Europe area.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2/2 System rear view

[10]
[11]
[2]
[1]
[9]
[8]
OUTLINE
[7]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
A2WUT1E004DA
[1] bizhub 652/552/602/502
[7] Mount kit
MK-720
[2] Stamp unit
SP-501
[8] Key counter kit
KIT-1
[3] Fax kit
FK-502
[9] Key counter kit
KIT-CF *2
[4] Heater
HT-508 *1
[10] i-Option
LK-101 v2/102/103 v2 *3
/105
[5] Scan accelerator kit
SA-502
[11] Upgrade kit
UK-203
[6] Security kit
SC-507
*1: North America and Europe only

*2: Europe only.
*3: The LK-103 v2 is not available for North America area.
NOTE
To install the Scan accelerator kit (SA-502) or the Fax kit (FK-502), installing the
Mount kit (MK-720) is necessary.
As the Scan accelerator kit (SA-502) and the FAX kit (FK-502) line 2 required for the
second fax line need to be installed at the same place, only one of them can be
installed.
2.1
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Type
Type
Combination scanner and printer console type
Copying system
Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper
Printing process
Laser electrostatic printing system
PC drum type
OPC drum: KM-12 (OPC with high mold releasability)
Scanning density
Main scan direction: 600 dpi, Sub scan direction: 600 dpi
Exposure lamp
White rare-gas fluorescent lamp 30 W
Platen
Stationary (mirror scan)
Original scanning
Mirror scanning CCD optical system

* Sheet through system when ADF is used
Registration
Rear left edge
Paper feeding
separation system
Manual bypass : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism

Tray 1
: Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Exposure system
1 polygon 2 beam exposure and polygon mirror scan system
Exposure density
Equivalent to 1800 dpi in main scanning direction

600 dpi in sub scanning direction
Developing system
Dry 2 components developing method, HMT developing system
Charging system
DC comb electrode scorotron system with electrode cleaning function
Neutralizing system
Red LED system
OUTLINE
2.
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Image transfer system Belt image transfer system (1st)/roller image transfer system (2nd)
Paper separating
system
Combination of curvature, separating claws, and bias system
Fusing system
Belt IH fusing system
Heating system
Heating: IH heating, Soaking: Halogen lamp
bizhub 652/552/602/502
2.2
Functions
Types of original
Sheets, books, and three-dimensional objects
Max. original size
A3 or 11 x 17
Max. original weight
2 kg
Multiple copies
Warm-up time
(at ambient temperature of 23 C/73.4 F
and rated source voltage)
OUTLINE
1 to 9999
When the sub power switch is turned ON at any timing while the main power
switch remains ON for a predetermined period of time or more
(room temperature is 23 C/73.4 F)
bizhub 652
30 sec. or less
bizhub 552
30 sec. or less
bizhub 602
(Taiwan only)
90 sec. or less
bizhub 502
(Taiwan only)
60 sec. or less
When the main power switch is turned ON during the sub power switch being
ON (room temperature is 23 C/73.4 F)
bizhub 652
30 sec. or less
bizhub 552
30 sec. or less
bizhub 602
(Taiwan only)
90 sec. or less
bizhub 502
(Taiwan only)
60 sec. or less
Image loss
First copy time
Processing speed
Leading edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch),

Trailing edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch),
Rear edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch),
Front edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch)
(Tray1/2 A4 or 8 1/2 x 11, full size)
bizhub 652
3.8 sec. or less
bizhub 552
4.3 sec. or less
bizhub 602
(Taiwan only)
4.0 sec. or less
bizhub 502
(Taiwan only)
4.3 sec. or less
Plain paper
bizhub 652: 310.00 mm/s

bizhub 552: 264.00 mm/s
bizhub 602: 288.00 mm/s (Taiwan only)
Thick 1, Thick 1+
bizhub 652: 155.00 mm/s

bizhub 552: 132.00 mm/s
Thick 2, Thick 3,
bizhub 652/552/602/502: 120.00 mm/s
Thick 4, OHP, Post
card, Envelope, Label
sheet, glossy mode
Copying speed for

bizhub 652
multi-copy cycle
(A4 or 8 1/2 x 11, plain bizhub 552
paper, tray 1)
bizhub 602
(Taiwan only)
1-sided: 65 copies/min, 2-sided: 65 copies/min

(8 1/2 x 11: 64 copies/min)
bizhub 502
(Taiwan only)
Full size
x1.000
Reduction
Enlargement
Zoom ratios memory

Metric area
x0.500, x0.707, x0.816, x0.866
Inch area
x0.500, x0.647, x0.733, x0.785
Metric area
x1.154, x1.224, x1.414, x2.000
Inch area
x1.214, x1.294, x1.545, x2.000
OUTLINE
Fixed zoom ratios
bizhub 652/552/602/502
3 memories
Variable zoom ratios
x0.250 to x4.000
in 0.001 increments
Paper size
Tray 1/Tray 2
Metric area
A3 Wide, A3 to A5S, A6S, post card
Inch area
11 x 17 to 8 1/2 x 11, 8 x 13 *1, 16K, 8K,

12 1/4 x 18
Tray 3/Tray 4
A4, B5, A5, 8 1/2 x 11, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 16K, postcard
Bypass tray
Copy exit tray capacity Plain paper

(When OT-503 is
Thick paper
mounted)
OHP transparencies
External memory
function
Supported external
memory devices
Metric area
A3 wide, A3 to B6S, A6S, postcard,

long size paper (210 mm to 297 mm x
457.3 mm to 1,200 mm)
Inch area
11 x 17 to 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 8 x 13 *1, 16K, 8K,

12 1/4 x 18, long size paper (8 1/4 to 11
11
/16 x 18 to 47 1/4)
250 sheets
10 sheets
1 sheet
USB flash memory device that supports the USB (2.0)
interface
FAT32-formatted memory device
bizhub 652/552/602/502
2.3
Paper
Type
Plain paper
(60 to 90 g/m2 / 16
to 24 lb)
Translucent paper
OHP film
Long size paper *3 Copy paper dimensions
Paper type
OUTLINE
Paper source (maximum tray capacity)

Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
(500 sheets) (500 sheets) (1500 sheets) (1000 sheets)
(20 sheets)
(400 sheets) (400 sheets) (1150 sheets)
(750 sheets)
Thick paper 1+ *1
(121 to 157 g/m2
/ 32 to 41.75 lb)
(280 sheets) (280 sheets)
(800 sheets)
(500 sheets)
Thick paper 2 *1
(158 to 209 g/m2
/ 42 to 55.5 lb)
(700 sheets)
(450 sheets)
Thick paper 3 *1,2

(210 to 256 g/m2
/ 55.75 to 68 lb)
(600 sheets)
(400 sheets)
Postcards
(150 sheets)
Thick paper 1 *1
(91 to 120 g/m2
/ 24.25 to 32 lb)
Thick paper 4 *1,2

(257 to 300 g/m2
/ 68.25 to 80 lb)
Bypass tray
(100 sheets)
(80 sheets)
(70 sheets)
(60 sheets)
(50 sheets)
(200 sheets)
(200 sheets)
(50 sheets)
Envelopes
(10 sheets)
Labels
(50 sheets)
Long size paper
Width
139.7 to 311.1 mm
5 1/2 to 12 1/2 inch
Length
182.0 to 457.2 mm
7 1/4 to 18 inch
(1 sheet)
90 to 311.1 mm
3 1/2 to 12 1/4 inch
A4, B5, A5, 8 1/2 x 11,

5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 16K, postcard
139.7 to 457.2
mm
5 1/2 to 18 inch
Width
210 to 297 mm
8 1/4 to 11 3/4 inch
Length
457 to 1200 mm
18 to 47 1/4 inch
*1: Excluding damp paper, curled paper, and recycled paper.

*2: Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3/4 is used.
*3: 127 to 210 g/m2 / 33.75 to 55.75 lb
Automatic duplex unit
: Only the plain paper weighing 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) or
thick paper weighing 91 to 256 g/m2 (24.25 to 68 lb) are
reliably fed.
2.4
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Materials
Parts name
Field standard yield *1
Toner cartridge
37,500 prints
Developing unit
Type name
TN618
1,140,000 prints
DV612K
Drum unit
285000 prints
DR612K
Waste toner box
160,000 prints
WX-102
OUTLINE
*1: Field standard yield

This machine has the field standard yield which indicates the available print numbers
estimated by the quantities and usage of the unit in the market standard job mode.
Yields for each preventative maintenance unit will differ depending on actual usage.
The market standard job modes for this unit are as follows.
Market standard job modes
Printing
bizhub 652
bizhub 552
bizhub 602
bizhub 502
7 P/J
6 P/J
6 P/J
5 P/J
Paper size
A4: 93 %, A4S: 7 %
Total print volume/month

No. of
image
stabilization
operations
2.5
US: 19,500
EU: 25,600
US: 13,500
EU: 17,200
No. of times power

turned on
20 times/month
No. of returns from

sleep mode
None
Changes in
surrounding
environment
None
Print volume
bizhub 652
US
EU
Average
19,500 prints/month
Maximum
190,000 prints/month
Average
25,600 prints/month
Maximum
bizhub 552
US
EU
Average
13,500 prints/month
Maximum
Average
17,200 prints/month
Maximum
bizhub 652/552/602/502
2.6
Machine specifications
Power requirements
Voltage:
AC 100 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-240 V
Current:
100 V
15 A
110 V
15 A
120 V
16 A
127 V
16 A
220-240 V
10 A
Frequency:
Max power consumption
OUTLINE
50 to 60 Hz 3 Hz
100 V
1,500 W or less
110 V
1,500 W or less
120 V
2,100 W or less
127 V
2,100 W or less
220-240 V
2,100 W or less
Dimensions
650 *1 (W) x 879 *2 (H) x 1,155 mm (H)

25.5 *1 (W) x 34.5 *2 (D) x 45.5 inch (H)
Space requirements
2,554 (W) x 1,525 mm (D) x 1,650 mm (H)*3

100.5 (W) x 60.0 inch (D) x 65.0 inch (H) *3
Weight
Machine
Approx. 201.0 kg / 443.0 lb (without IU and TC)
IU and TC
Approx. 4.8 kg / 10.5 lb
*1: Width when the bypass tray is closed.

*2: Including the control panel.
*3: Space requirements are the respective values when the finisher tray extension, LCU,
and paper trays are pulled out and the ADF is raised.
2.7
Operating environment
Temperature
10 to 30 C / 50 to 86 F (with a fluctuation of 10 C / 18 F or less per hour)
Humidity
15 to 85% (Relative humidity with a fluctuation of 10%/h)
Levelness
Difference between front and back, right and left should be 1 degree or under.
2.8
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Print functions
Type
Built-in printer controller
RAM
2 GB (shared with the main body)
HDD
250 GB (shared with the main body)
Interface
Standard
Ethernet (1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T)
USB 2.0
Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet II, Ethernet SNAP
Supported protocols
TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6), BOOTP, ARP, ICMP, DHCP, DHCPv6, AutoIP, SLP, SNMP,
FTP, LPR/LPD, RAW Socket, SMB over TCP/IP, IPP, HTTP, POP, SMTP, LDAP,
NTP, SSL, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, Bonjour, NetBEUI, WebDAV, DPWS, S/MIME,
IPsec, DNS, DynamicDNS, LLMNR, LLTD
Print speed
bizhub 652
(A4 or 8 1/2 x 11, plain bizhub 552
paper)
bizhub 602
(Taiwan only)
bizhub 502
(Taiwan only)
1-sided: 65 ppm, 2-sided: 65 ppm (64 ppm for 8 1/2 x 11)

1-sided: 55 ppm, 2-sided: 55 ppm
Printer language
PCL5c/6 Emulation
PCL XL ver. 2.1 Emulation
PostScript 3 Emulation (3016)
XPS ver.1.0
Print resolution
Equivalent to 1,800 dpi in main scanning direction

600 dpi in sub scanning direction
Printer fonts
PCL Latin 80 Fonts Postscript 3 Emulation Latin 137 Fonts
Supported computer
IBM PC/AT compatible machine,

Macintosh
(PowerPC/Intel processor : Only MacOS X 10.4/10.5/10.6 for Intel processor)
OUTLINE
Option (EK-604/605) USB 2.0

Frame type
Printer driver
10
PCL KONICAMINOLTA driver (PCL

driver)
Windows XP Home Edition (SP1 or later)

Windows XP Professional (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Vista Business *
Windows Vista Enterprise *
Windows Vista Home Basic *
Windows Vista Home Premium *
Windows Vista Ultimate *
Windows Server 2008 Standard *
Windows Server 2008 Enterprise *
Windows 7 Home Premium/Professional/Ultimate *
Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard
Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
Windows 7 Home Basic
Windows 7 Home Premium *
Windows 7 Professional *
Windows 7 Enterprise *
Windows 7 Ultimate *
*: 32 bits (x86)/64 bits (x64) environment are supported
PostScript KONICAMINOLTA driver

(PS driver)

OUTLINE
bizhub 652/552/602/502
XPS KONICAMINOLTA driver (XPS

driver)

PostScript PPD
driver (PS-PPD)
Mac OS 9.2 or later
PostScript PPD
driver (Mac OS X)
Mac OS X 10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5/10.6
Fax driver

11
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Printer driver
OUTLINE
bizhub 652/552/602/502
2.9
Scanner
OUTLINE
TWAIN
12
Scan functions
Scannable range
Same as the copier

(Max. 11 x 17: inch area, A3: metric area)
Scan speed
(When the ADF is used)
78 pages/min (A4 or 8 1/2 x 11, 1-sided, 300 dpi)
Functions
Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB, Scan to

BOX, Scan to WebDAV, Scan to Web service
Scanning resolution
200/300/400/600 dpi
Driver
TWAIN Driver, HDD TWAIN Driver
Supported operating
systems

Windows Vista Home Basic (SP2 or later) *1
Windows Vista Home Premium (SP2 or later) *1
Windows Vista Business (SP2 or later) *1
Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 or later) *1
Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 or later) *1
Windows 7 Home Basic *2
Windows 7 Home Premium *2
Windows 7 Professional *2
Windows 7 Enterprise *2
Windows 7 Ultimate *2
*1: 32 bits (x86) environment are supported
*2: 32 bits (x86)/64 bits (x64) environment are supported
PC
Conform to the specification of operating system
Required memory
Conform to the specification of operating system
Network
Computer to which TCP/IP protocol is correctly set
Hard disk
Required 20 MB or more disk space
Supported
operating
systems
Windows
bizhub 652/552/602/502
SMB
Windows NT4.0 each Server/Workstation
Windows 2000 each Server/Professional
Windows XP Home/Professional
Windows Server 2003 each edition
Windows Server 2003 R2 each edition
Windows Vista each edition
Windows 7 each edition
DFS function is supported only in the environment
that structured with the following Windows server
operating systems.
Windows 2000 Server each edition
Direct hosting function apply to the following operating systems.
Windows XP each edition
Windows Vista each edition
Samba *
2.2.x
3.x
Novell
Netware
Netware 6.5 (SP6 or later)
This machine supports Unicode. However, if the operating system used in a destination
computer does not support Unicode (2 and 3 byte characters), SMB transmission may
be unavailable. If SMB transmission is unsuccessful, specify the shared name of the destination folder using ASCII codes (one-byte alphanumeric characters).
NOTE
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
13
OUTLINE
bizhub 652/552/602/502
3. SECTION CONFIGURATION
3.
SECTION CONFIGURATION
Auto document feed section

* Standard
Scanner section
(IR section)
OUTLINE
Paper exit section

Fusing section
Toner supply section
Transfer corona section
Imaging unit section
(IU section)
Duplex section
(standard)
Paper feed section
(Bypass tray)
Write section (PH section)

Paper feed section (Tray1)
Toner collecting section

In front door (dotted line
section)
A2WUT1C002DA
14
4.1
PAPER PATH
bizhub 652/552/602/502
OUTLINE
4.
4. PAPER PATH
bizhub 652/552/602/502
A2WUT1C003DA
15
OUTLINE
bizhub 652/552/602/502
4. PAPER PATH
Blank Page
16
5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
5.1
OVERALL CONFIGURATION
Control block diagram
Scanner
section
Inverter board
Original glass
position control
board
Scanner
relay board
CCD board
R G B
Vendor
Control panel
Key counter
HDD
R G B
USB board
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
5.
Total counter
Fusing unit
Authentic
-ation unit
MFP board
Fax board
Printer control
board
DC power supply
Service EEPROM
PC drum motor
Developing motor
PH relay board
Laser drive
board
High voltage unit
Main
body
Paper feed
section
Polygon motor
Paper feed/
transport
drive board
Index board
Duplex unit
Bypass tray
section
PH section
Finisher
Paper feed unit

A2WUT2E044DA
17
bizhub 652/552/602/502
5.2
Image creation process

[1]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[16]
[10]
[7]
[9]
[8]
[11]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[6]
[5]
[12]
[4]
A2WUT2C008DA
18
[1]
Photoelectric
conversion
The light reflected off the surface of the original is separated into different colors using the color filters (R, G, and B); CCD then converts
it into a corresponding electric signal and outputs the signal to the
printer image processing section (MFP board).
[2]
Printer image
processing
(No illustration is provided)
The electric signal is converted to 8-bit digital image signals. After

going through some corrections, the digital image signals is converted to VIDEO signals (K).
D/A conversion will be performed after the VIDEO signals (K) is corrected. This data will control the emission of the laser diode.
[3]
Photo conductor
The image of the original projected onto the surface of the photo conductor is changed to a corresponding electrostatic latent image.
[4]
Charging
Supply DC ( - ) charge on the photo conductor.
[5]
Exposure
Expose photo conductor to a laser beam to develop electrostatic

latent image.
[6]
Developing
The toner, agitated and negatively charged in the developer mixing

chamber, is attracted onto the electrostatic latent image formed on
the surface of the photo conductor. It is thereby changed to a visible,
developed image.
AC and DC negative bias voltages are applied to the developing
roller, thereby preventing toner from sticking to the background image
portion.
[7]
1st transfer
A DC positive voltage is applied to the backside of the transfer belt,

thereby allowing the visible, developed image on the surface of the
photo conductor (K) to be transferred onto the transfer belt.
[8]
2nd transfer
A DC positive voltage is applied to the backside of the paper, thereby

allowing the visible, developed image on the surface of the transfer
belt to be transferred onto the paper.
[9]
Separation
The paper, which has undergone the 2nd transfer process, is neutralized so that it can be properly separated from the transfer belt by the
paper separator claws.
[10]
Transfer belt cleaning
The residual toner left on the transfer belt is collected by the cleaning
brush to clean the surface of the transfer belt.
[11]
Main erase
The surface of the photo conductor is irradiated with LED light, which
neutralizes any surface potential remaining on the surface of the
photo conductor.
[12]
Photo conductor
cleaning
The residual toner left on the photo conductor is collected by the

cleaning blade to clean the surface of the photo conductor.
[13]
Fusing
The visible toner image transferred onto the surface of the paper is
melted by the heat of the heating roller and fixed to the paper by pressure of the fusing pressure roller.
[14]
Paper exit
The paper, for which the toner image has been properly fixed, is fed
out onto the exit tray.
[15]
Paper exit
(two-sided print)
For two-sided printing, the 1-sided printed paper is turned over and
transported onto the duplex unit.
[16]
Duplex
The 1-sided printed paper, which has been turned over, is fed into the
main body, so that the paper can be subjected to the second print
cycle.
19
bizhub 652/552/602/502
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
5.3
Image forming control

Developing bias DC K
Main erase lamp/K (EL/K)
K PC drum motor (M18)
Charge K
K developing motor (M19)
BCL (+)
BCL (-)
Cleaner motor (M38)
Transfer belt motor (M1)
2nd transfer roller pressure retraction
1st transfer pressure retraction
Image write start signal
Developing bias AC K
1st transfer K
2nd transfer
Neutralization
Registration motor (M2)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Take-up motor (M22)

Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1)
Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5)
Gate switch solenoid (SD1)
Exit motor (M4)
Power supply cooling fan motor (FM9)
Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6)
Paper cooling fan motor (FM13)
Toner suction fan motor (FM7)
Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2)
Suction fan motor (FM1)
Cooling fan motor (FM3)
IU cooling fan motor (FM15)
Rear side cooling fan motor (FM16)
IH cooling fan motor/1 (FM10)
PH cooling fan motor (FM14)
Polygon motor (M34)
LD
Waste toner agitating motor (M20)
Dehumidification heater
Fusing motor (M30)
A2WUT2E097DA
5.4
Process speed
Paper type
Process speed (mm/s)

Plain paper
Thick
paper1
Thick
paper1+
Thick
paper2
Thick
paper3
(postcards)
Thick
paper4
Normal
mode
(matte)
Gloss
mode
bizhub 652
310
120
155
bizhub 552/502
264
120
132
120
bizhub 602
288
120
155
120
Mode
20
120
Envelopes
OHP
6.1
6.1.1
INTERFACE SECTION
Configuration
Front side
Main power switch
(Power switch) (SW1)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
6.
6. INTERFACE SECTION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Total counter
A0P0T5C050DA
Main power switch

Total counter
A2WUT2C084DA
21
6.1.2
Rear side
Upper side
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Lower side
A0P0T5C053DA
A.
Upper side
Toner filter
Optional finishing connection connector
A0P0T5C054DA
22
bizhub 652/552/602/502

B. Lower side
NOTE
For the dehumidification heater, see 17.3.5 Dehumidification heater control.
Not used
A2WUT2C085DA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Not used
Dehumidification heater switch
(SW2)
Power cable 1
23
bizhub 652/552/602/502
6.1.3
Right side
Front side
Rear side (upper)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Rear side (lower)
A0P0T5C057DA
24
A. Front side
NOTE
Use utmost care when unplugging or plugging the cable. If the USB cable
extended from the USB port at the rear (upper) portion is unplugged, the USB port
at the front side is no longer operational.
USB port (optional)
bizhub 652/552/602/502
USB port (standard)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Audio output terminal

(Japan only)
Sub power switch

A0P0T5C059DA
A0P0T5C060DA
25
bizhub 652/552/602/502
B. Rear side (upper)

NOTE
The USB cable is extended up to the USB port at the front side. If the cable is
unplugged from the USB port, therefore, the USB port at the front side is no longer
operational. Use utmost care when unplugging or plugging the cable.
Sliding the service port cover will reveal the port dedicated to firmware upgrading.
The service port cover is provided with a service port sensor that detects that the
cover is opened or closed.
When the service port sensor is blocked, the machine determines that the cover is
closed.
NOTE
For details of firmware upgrading, see Field Service.
Be sure to close the service port cover after the firmware upgrading is completed.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Network port (standard:

dedicated to network print)
USB port (standard:
dedicated to local print)
Serial port (standard:
not used)
Service port (standard:
dedicated to firmware
upgrading)
Service port cover (with

open/close detection
system)
Service port cover fixing
screw
A0P0T5C061DA
USB extension cable (standard:

USB extension cable to the USB
board at the front side)
USB port (standard)

Service port cover
A0P0T5C062DA
USB extension cable
26
Service port (dedicated to firmware upgrading)
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Service port cover
Service port sensor

(PS60)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A0P0T5C063DB
27
bizhub 652/552/602/502
C. Rear side (lower)
Fax kit (optional)
Line extension kit

(optional)
* The second line is on
the outside.
TEL terminal (optional)

TEL terminal (optional)
LINE terminal (optional)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
LINE terminal (optional)
A0P0T5C064DA
Fax kit (optional)
Security kit
(optional)
Control panel connection
connector (standard)
A0P0T5C065DA
Scanner section connection

connector (standard)
Not used
Note: This photo shows a system mounted with a fax kit and a security kit.
28
7.
7. SCANNER SECTION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
SCANNER SECTION
7.1
Configuration
Original glass moving

motor (M202)
Lens
CCD unit
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A0P0T5C058DA
Original glass position

control board (OGPCB)
Inverter board (INVB)
Glass moving unit
Scanner relay board

(REYB/SCAN)
Exposure unit
Optical cooling fan

motor (FM201)
Scanner home
sensor (PS201)
Status display
board (MCMB)
20 degree sensor
(PS202)
Mirror unit
Scanner motor (M201)

Fax speaker (SP)
Original size detection

sensor 2 (PS205)
sensor 1 (PS204)
USB board (UB)
A0P0T5C090DA
Original cover sensor

(RS201)
29
bizhub 652/552/602/502
7. SCANNER SECTION
7.2
Drive
Scanner motor (M201)
Exposure unit
Scanner drive
cable/R
Mirror unit
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Glass moving unit
Original glass moving

motor (M202)
Scanner drive cable/F
Scanner home sensor (PS201)

A00JT2C003DA
30
Operation
7.3.1
When the power is ON
1. The exposure unit moves from the scanner standby position to the home position.
2. Exposure unit moves from the home position to the shading position (under the
shading correction sheet) and stops (in scanning direction).
3. The exposure lamp turns ON and the gain value of the CCD sensor output voltage
to R, G, and B is adjusted.
4. After adjusting the gain value, a shading correction is performed. The exposure
lamp goes out when the correction is completed.
5. The exposure unit moves in the return direction and stops at the home position.
6. The exposure unit moves in the scan direction and stops at the standby position.
Shading position
Home position
Standby position
Scanning direction
Returning direction
A00JT2C004DA
Home position
Shading position
Standby position
Scanner movement
The exposure lamp (FL201) turns ON
and a gain adjustment and shading
correction are made.
A0P0T2C001AA
31
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
7.3
7. SCANNER SECTION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
7. SCANNER SECTION
7.3.2
Control when the Start key is pressed
A. Original scanning mode

Original scanning mode has two types: Original cover mode and DF mode.
(1) Original cover mode
1. Turning the Start key ON will turn the exposure lamp ON (at the standby position)
2. The exposure unit moves in the return direction and stops at the shading position.
At the shading position, the gain adjustment is made.
3. The exposure unit moves in the return direction and stops at the scan start position.
4. To start a scan, the exposure unit moves from the scan start position to the leading
edge of an original while performing shading correction. The exposure unit will start
reading the original image from the leading edge. The unit will finish reading the
image at the back edge of the image.
5. The exposure lamp will be OFF when the reading is complete.
6. The exposure unit moves in the return direction and stops at the home position.
Then the exposure unit moves in the scan direction and stops at the standby position. It scans only once even for the color scan, since R, G, and B data will all be
memorized in one scanning.
Shading position
Home
position
Leading edge of the image

Standby position
Original
Scan start
position
Back edge of the image
Scan
Return
A00JT2C005DA
Home position
Scanner
movement
Scan start position
Exposure lamp
(FL201) ON
Shading position
Back edge of the image
Leading edge of the image
Standby position
A0P0T2C002AA
32
7. SCANNER SECTION
(2) DF mode
The original fed by the document feeder will be read at the original DF glass for. The
Exposure unit will move to the reading position and stops. The document will be read as
the paper is transferred.
bizhub 652/552: DF-618
Reading position
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
DF original glass
bizhub 652/552/602/502
A0P0T5C109DA
33
bizhub 652/552/602/502
7. SCANNER SECTION
B. Original scanning control

The light reflected off the exposed original reaches the CCD sensor via the lens.
The CCD sensor outputs an electric signal (analog) that varies according to the intensity
of the light.
One CCD sensor has a photoreceiver that individually responds to each of the three primary colors of R, G, and B.
The electric signal is converted to digital data for each of R, G, and B by the board
(CCDB), becoming individual digital signals.
Analog-to-digital conversion is made according to an instruction given by the MFP board
(MFPB).
Sub scanning
direction
Scanning direction
CCD sensor
37.3 m
37.3 m
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Main scanning
direction
9.325 m
9.325 m
4036ma2602c0
(1) Calibration
The following adjustment and correction (calibration) are made before the original is
scanned, so that the image of the original can be adequately read. For details, see 25.
IMAGE PROCESSING.
See P.222
Gain adjustment
Shading correction
34
7.3.3
7. SCANNER SECTION
DF original glass cleaning control
A. DF original glass cleaning

The reading lines will occur when DF original glass has stain. Shift mechanism for the DF
original glass is provided to avoid this trouble.
The stand-by position for the DF original glass will be detected by the glass home sensor.
DF original glass will move back and forth by the original glass moving motor.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Original glass moving motor (M202)
A00JT2C007DA
B. Details of DF original glass cleaning

The DF original glass makes three different movements. Each mode has different movement.
The following explains different movements and different modes.
(1) Normal movement performed each time after reading a sheet of original
The DF original glass moves slightly back or forth every time after reading a sheet of
multiple originals. This changes the image reading position on the DF original glass and
prevents the repeated occurrence of lines in the sub scan direction due to the same stain
on the glass.
The first original
The second original
A00JT2C538DA
A00JT2C539DA
DF original glass
Image reading position
NOTE
This cleaning operation is not performed when the setting is made in the service mode as follows. [System 2] - [Split Line Detect. Setting] - [Prior Detection] - [Not Set]
35
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Glass home sensor

(PS203)
bizhub 652/552/602/502
7. SCANNER SECTION
(2) DF original glass cleaning movement performed each time after reading a sheet
of original
While reading multiple originals consecutively, the DF original glass moves widely back
and forth between each original reading.
Due to the effect of the step sheet that makes contact with the DF original glass, stain on
the DF original glass can be removed from the reading position and reduce image
streaks in the sub scan direction.
Step sheet
A00JT2C540DA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
DF original glass
Stain collected on the DF original glass is removed from the reading section by the trailing edge of an original that is passing by.
Original
DF original glass
Stain
A00JT2C544DA
(3) DF original glass cleaning movement performed after completing a job

After the completion of a job, the DF original glass moves widely back and forth to
remove stain remaining on the surface. This reduces the occurrence of lines in the sub
scan direction.
36
7. SCANNER SECTION
C. Step sheet
The step sheet is provided in order to reduce the stain on the DF original glass.
It is installed to the operator side of the DF original glass in order to reduce the area original touches the glass.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Original
Step sheet
7.3.4
9J07T2C007DA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
DF original glass
Original scanning area
Original scanning areas vary depending on a scanning mode.

A. Original cover mode
Main scanning direction: Max. 297.0 mm
Sub scanning direction: Max. 431.8 mm
B. DF mode
Main scanning direction: Max. 297.0 mm
Sub scanning direction: Max. 1,000.0 mm
37
bizhub 652/552/602/502
7. SCANNER SECTION
7.3.5
Original size detection control
A. Detection method
For detection of the original size, the reflective size sensors detect the length of the original while the CCD detects the width of the original.
Automatic document feeder
20 degrees
20 degrees sensor (PS202)
346.1 mm
313.5 mm
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Original read
position
A0P0T5C058DA
Exposure unit
Original size
detection
sensor 1 (PS204)
CCD unit
Original standard
position
Original size
detection
sensor 2 (PS205) *
Exposure unit
Original size detection sensor 1 (PS204)
4037T2E597AA
A0P0T5C074DA
Original size detection sensor 2 (PS205) *
*: Option
For the original of an irregular size, the nearest standard size on the large side is applied
to it.
38
7. SCANNER SECTION
bizhub 652/552/602/502

B. Original size judgement
NOTE
Table 1 or 2 can be selected in the service mode.
Criterion
Metric area & china areas
Table 1
Original
size
detection
sensor 1
Main scanning width (mm)

0~130.0
~153.0
~187.0
~200.0
~215.0
OFF
No original
A5S
B5S
16KS
A4S
ON
A3
~225.0
~261.5
~275.0
275.1~
B5
B5
16K
A4
FLS
B4
8K
A3
Original
size
detection
sensor
1
2*
0~130 ~143.9 ~153 ~187 ~200 ~213 ~220.9 ~225 ~261.5 ~274.7 ~284.4 284.5~
No
OFF OFF original
ON OFF
-
ON
51/2
81/2 S
A5S
B5S
16K
S
A4S
A3
A3
81/2
11 S
B5
16K
81/2
11
A4
FLS
FLS
FLS
81/2
14
B4
8K
11 17
A3
*: Option
Inch areas
Table 1
Original size
detection
sensor 1

0~130.0
~144.7
~220.9
~221.0
OFF
No original
51/2 81/2 S
81/2 11 S
81/2 11
ON
11 17
81/2 14
11 17
Table 2
Original size
detection
sensor
1
2*
0~130
OFF
OFF
No
original
~143.9
~153
~187
~213
~220.9
~225
~262
5 /2 8 /2 S A5S
B5S
A4S
8 /2 11 S
B5
ON
OFF
A3
ON
A3
FLS
FLS
FLS
81/2 14
B4
11 17
A3
~284.4 284.5~
81/2 11
A4
*: Option
39
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Table 2
bizhub 652/552/602/502
7. SCANNER SECTION
C. Detection timing
Validates the original length
Validates the original size
Original size detection sensor 1 (PS204)

20 degree sensor (PS202)
Exposure lamp (FL201)
Original cover sensor (RS201)
A2WUT2E002DA
7.3.6
Image processing
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
The image processing has following items. For details, see 25. IMAGE PROCESSING.
See P.222
Scanner section image processing block diagram
Photoelectric conversion
Analog-to-digital conversion
40
8.1
WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION)

Configuration
[1]
[2]
[4]
[15]
[3]
[5]
[14]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
8.
8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION)

bizhub 652/552/602/502
[13]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
A2WUT2C009DA
[1]
Laser aperture
[2]
[3]
Index lens
[4]
Index mirror
Index board (INDEXB)
[5]
Return mirror/2
[6]
Laser drive board/K (LDDB/K)
[7]
Collimator
[8]
Return mirror/1
[9]
Cylindrical lens
[10]
Polygon mirror
[11]
G1 lens
[12]
G2 lens
[13]
G3 lens
[14]
Return mirror/3
[15]
Laser beam
41
8.2
Operation
8.2.1
Outline
The surface of the photo conductor is irradiated with a laser beam and an electrostatic
latent image is thereby formed.
The PH unit has two semiconductor lasers. A single polygon motor is used to make a
scan. (2 line one scan)
To be compatible with the high speed printing system, a seven sided polygon mirror is
used. The two beam array LD is used to control the growth of the polygon motor rotation
speed.
The two-beam array LD consists of two LD elements arranged vertically. Two lines are
scanned simultaneously with two laser beams emitted from these two LD elements
through a single face of the polygon mirror.
The intensity balance of the two beam array LD can be adjusted in LD 1/2 Balance
Adj. of the Service Mode. If there is a difference in intensity between the two LD elements, grain-like noise occurs in the print image. For details of the adjustment, see the
Field Service of the Service Manual.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[3]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[7]
[9]
[8]
[10]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[11]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
A2WUT2C011DA
42
[1]
Transfer belt
[2]
[3]
Photo conductor rotatory direction
[4]
Beam A
[5]
Beam B
[6]
Polygon mirror
[7]
G1 lens
[8]
G2 lens
[9]
G3 lens
[10]
Return mirror/3
[11]
Laser diode
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Photo conductor
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
43
bizhub 652/552/602/502

8.2.2
Laser exposure process
A. Operation
1. The laser beam (two beams) enters the cylindrical lens via the return mirror/2.
2. The laser beam is condensed at the vicinity of the polygon mirror by the cylindrical
lens.
3. The condensing angle of the laser beam is corrected by the G1, G2 and G3 lenses
and then reaches the return mirror/3.
4. The laser beam is condensed on the photo conductor surface via the return mirror/
3.
(1) Top side view of the PH unit
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[5]
[6]
[14]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
A2WUT2C012DA
44
[1]
Index mirror
[2]
Index lens
[3]
[4]
Return mirror/2
[5]
[6]
Collimator
[7]
Return mirror/1
[8]
Cylindrical lens
[9]
Polygon mirror
[10]
G1 lens
[11]
G2 lens
[12]
G3 lens
[13]
Return mirror/3
[14]
Laser beam

bizhub 652/552/602/502

(2) Front view of the PH unit
[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
Transfer belt
[2]
Polygon mirror
[3]
G1 lens
[4]
G2 lens
[5]
G3 lens
[6]
Return mirror/3
[7]
Photo conductor
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A2WUT2C013DA
45
bizhub 652/552/602/502

8.2.3
Laser emission timing
After a print cycle has been started, when the stable rotation signals of photo conductor
and polygon motor are detected, a laser ON signal is output from the printer control
board.
The laser ON signal causes each laser diode to turn ON and emit a laser beam.
After passing through the return mirror/2, cylindrical lens, polygon mirror, G1 lens, G2
lens, index mirror, and index lens, the laser beam is applied to the index board. This generates an index signal.
This index signal has a function of keeping the same laser beam emission timing per
every two lines in the main scanning direction.
If the index signal is not detected within a predetermined period of time, the machine
determines that it is a laser emission fault, displaying trouble code: C4501 laser malfunction.
The machine continuously monitors the index signal. If the index signal cannot be
detected at regular intervals, the machine determines that it is a laser emission fault, displaying trouble code: C4501 laser malfunction.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[5]
[6]
[14]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
A2WUT2C014DA
46
[1]
Index mirror
[2]
Index lens
[3]
[4]
Return mirror/2
[5]
[6]
Collimator
[7]
Return mirror/1
[8]
Cylindrical lens
[9]
Polygon mirror
[10]
G1 lens
[11]
G2 lens
[12]
G3 lens
[13]
Return mirror/3
[14]
Laser beam
8.2.4
Laser emission stop
Emission of the laser beam is stopped if any of the following conditions is encountered during printing:
End of a print job
The front door or any other door is opened.
A misfeed occurs.
A malfunction occurs.
8.2.5
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Laser emission area
B. Sub scanning direction

The print start position in the sub scanning direction is determined by the image write
start signal (/TOD) that is output from the printer control board and the length of the
paper.
The laser emission area is determined by paper size. However, there are void areas that
are 4.2 mm/0.165 inch from the leading edge and 3 mm/0.118 inch from the trailing edge
of paper.
Void width: 3 mm/0.118
Void width: 3 mm/0.118
Void width: 4.2 mm/

0.165
Void width: 3 mm/

0.118
4138to2595c0
47
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A. Main scanning direction

The print start position in the main scanning direction is determined by the main scanning print start signal (/HSYNC) that is output from the printer control board and the
width of the paper.
The laser emission area is determined by the paper size. The area of 3 mm/0.118 inch
on both edges of the paper is, however, the void image area.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502

8.2.6
Image processing
The image processing has following items. For details, see 25. IMAGE PROCESSING.
See P.222
Image processing block diagram
Shading correction
Line-to-line variation correction/color aberration correction
Detection of security pattern
Free erase
AE processing
Image data editing
Image area discrimination
Monochrome data creation
Miscellaneous processing (improved reproduction of black text, edge emphasis and
smoothing)
BTC compression
Input buffer memory
JBIG compression
File (code) memory
JBIG expansion
Memory access coordinator
Frame memory
Output buffer memory
BTC expansion
Main scanning direction resolution conversion and movement
Sub-scanning direction resolution conversion
Color conversion processing (V to K)
Embedment of security pattern
Area discrimination FEET
Interpolation
Gamma correction
Error diffusion (binary)
Screening
Main scanning position correction
48
9.
9.1
9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION
TONER SUPPLY SECTION

Configuration
The toner supply section is composed of the toner cartridge drive section, toner cartridge
and toner hopper section.
[2]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
[3]
[4]
[9]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
A2WUT2C015DA
[1]
Toner cartridge
[2]
[3]
Toner hopper section
[4]
Toner cartridge drive section

Spiral spring
[5]
Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14)
[6]
Toner replenishing port
[7]
Toner empty sensor/K (PZS/K)
[8]
Toner supply motor/K (M12)
[9]
Toner cartridge set board
49
bizhub 652/552/602/502
9.2
9.2.1
Drive
Toner cartridge drive
[1]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[2]
[4]
A2WUT2C016DA
[1]
Spiral spring
[2]
[3]
Spiral spring rotatory direction
[4]
Toner conveying direction
9.2.2
Toner hopper drive

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[1]
[3]
A2WUT2C017DA
50
[1]
Toner supply screw
[2]
[3]
[4]
Toner agitating blade
9.3.1
Operation
Replenishing the toner hopper with toner
A. Toner
The toner cartridge/K is packed with both toner and carrier (small percent) and the developing unit/K is replenished with fresh carrier at the same time that it is replenished with
toner. Excess developer in the developing unit/K is discharged to the waste toner box,
thereby inhibiting developer left in the developing unit/K from being deteriorated and
maintaining stable image quality for an extended period of time. This method is referred
to as the auto refining developing system.
For details, see 12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION.
Toner and carrier packed in the toner cartridge is simply referred to as Toner instead
of Developer throughout the manual.
Developer, if clearly specified, refers to the developer that is mixed in the developing
unit to offer a specified T/C.
B. Toner replenishing control
The toner is supplied from the toner cartridge to the toner hopper by the toner cartridge
motor C/K.
When the toner cartridge motor C/K rotates, the spiral spring provided in the toner cartridge rotates. Thus toner in the toner cartridge is conveyed to front side of the machine
and toner is supplied to the toner hopper.
The toner empty sensor/K located in the toner hopper detects the remaining toner
amount and controls toner replenishment from the toner cartridge to the toner hopper.
[1]
[2]
A2WUT2C018DA
[1]
Toner cartridge coupling portion
[2]
51
bizhub 652/552/602/502
9.3
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
C. Toner cartridge motor rotation speed selection control

The toner cartridge motor selects a rotation speed of either low or high.
When toner left in the toner cartridge is equal to, or more than, a specified value, the
toner cartridge motor rotates at the low speed to supply a specified amount of toner to
the toner hopper.
When toner left in the toner cartridge decreases, the toner empty sensor/K in the toner
hopper detects a toner cartridge near empty.
When toner left in the toner cartridge decreases, the toner efficiency decreases. (When
the toner cartridge motor rotates at the low speed, a specified amount of toner cannot be
supplied to the toner hopper.)
Speed of the toner cartridge motor is therefore changed from the low speed to the high
speed.
The increased speed of the toner cartridge motor boosts up toner supply efficiency that
has been degraded. As a result, a specified amount of toner can be supplied from the
toner cartridge to the toner hopper.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
52
9.3.2
Replenishing the developing unit with toner
A. Toner replenishing control

Toner, which has been supplied from the toner cartridge to the toner hopper, is replenished to the developing unit by the toner supply motor/K.
T/C is detected by the TCR sensor in the developing unit/K when the K developing motor
is energized.
Based on T/C ratio detected by the TRC sensor and amount of toner consumption calculated by the dot counter, toner replenishing time (amount) is calculated.
When the toner replenishing amount is calculated, the calculation result may at times be
toner replenishing time (amount) that exceeds the maximum volume for one replenishing
sequence (for printing an image with high density).
One replenishing sequence may not be enough to replenish the amount of toner equivalent to the calculation result. In such a case, the shortfall in the toner replenishing time
(amount) during the preceding toner replenishing sequence is added to the required
toner replenishing time (amount) of the next toner replenishing sequence, so that the
sum of these two elements will then be supplied in the next toner replenishing sequence.
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
A2WUT2C020DA
[1]
[2]
Toner hopper (Rear view)
[3]
[4]
Toner conveying screw
[5]
Toner flow
[6]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
53
bizhub 652/552/602/502
B. Toner empty detection mechanism

A piezo sensor is used as the toner empty sensor/K.
[2]
[1]
[5]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[4]
A2WUT2C019DA
54
[1]
Toner hopper (Top side view)
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Toner supply screw
9.3.3
Toner cartridge life control
The amount of toner remaining in the cartridge is displayed as the four states, normal,
toner cartridge near empty, toner cartridge empty, and toner hopper empty.
Remaining toner amount
Description
Normal
Enough toner remains in the toner cartridge and the toner hopper.
(Low speed replenishment)
Toner cartridge near

empty
Low speed replenishment cannot supply the required amount of toner to the
toner hopper within a certain time. (Switch to the high speed replenishment)
Toner cartridge empty
Even high speed replenishment cannot supply the required amount of toner
to the toner hopper within a certain time.
Toner hopper empty
Toner inside the toner hopper is running out, thus toner cannot be supplied
to the developing unit. A printing cannot be continued.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Normal:
The number of pages that can be printed is 7,500 or more.
Toner cartridge near empty:
The number of pages that can be printed is 5,000 to less than 7,500.
Toner cartridge empty:
No toner remains in the toner cartridge.
The number of pages that can be printed is approximately 1,000.
Toner hopper empty:
No toner remains in the toner cartridge and toner hopper.
The machine stops printing.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
A. Toner cartridge near empty detection control

A toner cartridge near empty warning is displayed, if the toner empty sensor/K of the
toner hopper detects no toner while the toner cartridge motor runs at low speed.
B. Toner cartridge empty control
After the toner cartridge near empty condition is detected, if the toner empty sensor/K of
the toner hopper detects toner empty, the toner cartridge empty warning is displayed.
55
C. Toner hopper empty detection

Toner amount more than the given level is supplied to the developing unit after detecting
a toner cartridge empty, toner hopper empty warning is displayed.
Toner cartridge near empty
Toner cartridge empty
Toner hopper empty
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
A2WUT2E091DA
NOTE
The warning screen to be displayed is changed by specifying the person who replaces
the unit in the System 2 Unit Change in the Service Mode. The illustration shows
the message when User is selected.
The default setting is User.
For details, see Field Service of the Service Manual.
56
9.3.4
Toner cartridge detection
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
The toner cartridge detection is controlled by means of accessing the toner cartridge set
board when the upper front door is closed or the sub power switch is turned ON to determine whether the toner cartridge is loaded or not.
After detecting the presence of the cartridge, the machine determines whether the cartridge is new or not.
[1]
A2WUT2C021DA
[1]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Toner cartridge set board
57
9.3.5
Toner spill prevention shutter
To prevent toner from being spilled when the toner cartridge is removed from the
machine, there is a shutter mechanism provided. When the toner cartridge is installed in
the machine, the shutter opens.
Do not open the shutter while the toner replenishing port faces down.
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[2]
58
[1]
[3]
Shutter opened
(When toner cartridge is installed)
[3]
[2]
A2WUT2C022DA
Shutter closed
(Before toner cartridge is installed)
10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION

10.1 Configuration
The imaging unit/K (IU) of this machine can be physically divided into the drum unit and
developing unit. It is further divided into the charging, photo conductor, developing, and
cleaning sections.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
[2]
[3]
A2WUT2C023DA
[1]
Imaging unit/K
[3]
Developing unit/K
[2]
Drum unit/K
59
bizhub 652/552/602/502
10.2 Drive
10.2.1
Drum unit drive

[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[5]
[4]
[6]
A2WUT2C024DA
60
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Photo conductor
Toner collecting port
[5]
Toner collecting screw
[6]
Photo conductor drive gear
10.2.2

bizhub 652/552/602/502

Developing unit drive
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
A2WUT2C025DA
[1]
Developing roller
[2]
[3]
Conveying screw (supply screw/agitating

screw)
[4]
Developer discharge port
[5]
Developing roller rotatory direction
61
bizhub 652/552/602/502
10.3 Operation
10.3.1
Outline
The imaging unit/K (IU) of this machine can be physically divided into the drum unit and
developing unit. It is further divided into the charging, photo conductor, developing, and
cleaning sections.
Life
Model
bizhub 652/552
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
10.3.2
Drum unit
Developing unit
285,000 counts (number of field

standard printed pages)
1,140,000 counts (number of field

standard printed pages)
Imaging unit detection
The developing unit has EEPROM board to perform the developing unit new article
detection, developing unit mounting detection and life management.
The drum unit has the mounting detect board to perform the developing unit new article
detection and developing unit mounting detection.
For details of each unit, see the following chapters.
P-63 DRUM UNIT SECTION
P-75 DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION
62
11. DRUM UNIT SECTION

11.1 Configuration
The drum unit is composed of the photo conductor section, charging section and cleaning section.
[1]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[9]
[2]
[3]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[8]
[4]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[8]
[10]
[9]
[5]
[6]
[12]
[11]
A2WUT2C026DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
Drum unit release lever
[4]

Photo conductor
[5]
Charge corona
[6]
Drum unit set board
[7]
Toner collecting port
[8]
[9]
Cleaning blade
[10]
Charge control plate (Grid mesh)
[11]
Comb electrode
[12]
Charge corona cleaning mechanism
63
bizhub 652/552/602/502
11.2 Drive
11.2.1
Photo conductor drive

[1]
[2]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
A2WUT2C027DA
[1]
[2]
Photo conductor
[3]
[4]
The K PC drum motor provides the drive for the photo conductor which is rotated via the
drive gear.
Drive is transmitted to the photo conductor when the triangular-prism-shaped shaft is
engaged with the mating coupling part.
The K PC drum motor provides the drive for the toner collecting screw which is rotated
via the photo conductor.
64
11.2.2

bizhub 652/552/602/502

Charge corona cleaner drive
[1]
[8]
[7]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[6]
[9]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
[9]
[7]
[7]
[10]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[8]
A2WUT2C028DA
[1]
Cleaner moving direction (From the home

position to the return position)
[2]
Charge cleaning motor/K (M15)
[3]
Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43)
[4]
Cleaner moving direction (From the return

position to the home position)
[5]
Charging cleaner return sensor (PS44)
[6]
[7]
Cleaner drive screw
[8]
Comb electrode
[9]
Charging cleaner
[10]
Cleaner position detection plate
65
bizhub 652/552/602/502
11.3 Operation
11.3.1
The K photo conductor drive gear employs a large diameter gear to enable the highspeed monochrome printing.
The photo conductor employs also a large diameter photo conductor.
[3]
[2]
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[5]
[4]
A2WUT2C029DA
66
[1]
[2]
Photo conductor
[3]
Photo conductor drive gear rotatory direction
[4]
[5]
A. Photo conductor small amount rotation control

Humidity around the IU can produce a difference in sensitivity among different photo conductors. This could lead to drum memory, allowing black bands to occur in the image.
Ozone stagnant in areas near the photo conductor charge corona reduces sensitivity of
the photo conductors, causing white bands to occur in the image.
To prevent these image problems, the photo conductor rotates not to keep facing the
same surface toward to the charge corona for a long time.
The time interval of this control is set different depending on how long the photo conductor has been used and what the humidity and the temperature are inside the machine.
Control operating condition
- Consecutive print:
Rotate the photo conductor consecutively for more than a predetermined period of
time.
- Intermittent printing:
The next job is started with a time interval of less than 10 min. after the completion of
the preceding job, and the cumulative time of rotation of the photo conductor between
the preceding and current jobs exceeds a predetermined period of time.
If the above conditions are detected, the photo conductor is rotated a small amount during the standby after the completion of the job.
[1]
[2]
[3]
A2WUT2C030DA
[1]
Photo conductor
[3]
Charge corona
[2]
67
bizhub 652/552/602/502
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502

11.3.2
Main erase lamp control
The main erase lamp/K radiation onto the surface of the photo conductor removes electric charge remaining on the surface.
To improve cleaning performance, the main erase lamp/K is located upstream of the
cleaning blade in the direction of the photo conductor rotation.
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[5]
[3]
[4]
A2WUT2C031DA
68
[1]
[2]
[3]
Photo conductor
[4]
Charge corona
[5]
Cleaning blade
11.3.3
Photo conductor cleaning
The cleaning blade is pressed up against the surface of the photo conductor, scraping
residual toner off the surface.
The main erase lamp/K located upstream in the direction of the photo conductor rotation
removes electric charge remaining on the surface of the photo conductor. Thus the
cleaning blade located downstream in the direction of the photo conductor rotation
scrapes residual toner off the surface easily.
Toner, which has been scraped off the surface of the photo conductor, is conveyed to the
front side of the machine by the toner collecting screw. It is collected into the waste toner
box.
[3]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[2]
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
[8]
[5]
[6]
[7]
A2WUT2C032DA
[1]
[2]
Collected toner flow
[3]
1st transfer
[4]
[5]
Developing
[6]
Photo conductor
[7]
Charge corona
[8]
Cleaning blade
11.3.4
Photo conductor charge control
A. Comb electrode
The charge corona incorporates a comb electrode, capable of conducting charging operation centrally on the charge control plate (grid mesh), which enables to reduce the
amount of ozone produced.
B. Charge control plate
Discharge occurs via the charge control plate (grid mesh), so that the photo conductor
surface can be uniformly charged.
The grid voltage (Vg) applied to the charge control plate (grid mesh) is controlled through
the image stabilization control.
69
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502

11.3.5
Charge corona cleaning control
If the comb electrode of the charge corona gets dirt, the voltage applied to the surface of
the photo conductor become nonuniform, thus image problems (bands) may occur.
To prevent these problems, the charge corona has a cleaning mechanism that periodically cleans the comb electrode and the charge control plate (grid mesh).
The cleaner is driven by the charge cleaning motor/K.
To clean the charge corona, the charge cleaning motor/K is rotated to bring the cleaner
from the home position to the return position. Then, the charge cleaning motor/K is
rotated backward to bring the cleaner to the home position. (Operating time approximately 20 sec., 50 sec. maximum)
When the power switch is turned ON or the front door is opened/closed, the charge
corona cleaner home position detection control is performed. If the charge corona
cleaner is not at the home position, the charge cleaning motor/K rotates to bring the
charge corona cleaner to its home position.
The charging cleaner home sensor detects the position (rear) of the charge corona
cleaner. The charging cleaner return sensor (this side) detects the return position.
The cleaning operation starts when the count exceeds 2,700 at the end of a print job
since the last electrode cleaning.
If, however, the number of pages yet to be printed for the current job is 50 or more with
the count exceeding 2,700, the job is stopped and the cleaning operation is performed.
The count method is such that a paper length (length in the sub-scanning direction)
equivalent to that of A4 is counted as one.
Paper length in the sub scanning direction
Count
216 mm or less
Over 216 mm and up to 432 mm
Over 1080 mm
NOTE
The manual cleaning and auto cleaning can be set in System 1 Charging CH Cleaning in the Service Mode.
The default setting of K Charge A/C ON/OFF Setting is ON.
70

bizhub 652/552/602/502
[1]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[1]
Cleaner moving direction (From the return

position to the home position)
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A2WUT2C033DA
Charge corona cleaner
[3]
Charge cleaning motor/K (M15)
[4]
Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43)
[5]
Cleaner moving direction (From the home

position to the return position)
[6]
Charging cleaner return sensor (PS44)
[7]
[8]
Cleaner drive screw
[9]
Comb electrode
71
bizhub 652/552/602/502

11.3.6
Ozone removal
Removes ozone produced by the charge corona.

The ozone ventilation fan motor draws air.
The air containing ozone flows through the exhaust duct. The ozone filter located at the
distal end of the exhaust duct decomposes the ozone in the exhaust into oxygen.
The air, which is now harmless, is discharged out of the machine.
[2]
[1]
[7]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
A2WUT2C040DA
72
[1]
Discharged to the outside of the machine
[2]
[3]
Air flow of drawn air
[4]
Exhaust duct
[5]
Ozone produced when discharging
[6]
Charge corona
[7]
Ozone filter
11.3.7
Detection of drum unit/K
[1]
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A. Drum unit detection

The drum unit detection is controlled by means of accessing the drum unit set board
when the lower front door is closed or the sub power switch is turned ON to determine
whether the unit is loaded or not.
After detecting the presence of the unit, the machine determines whether the unit is new
or not.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
A2WUT2C034DA
Drum unit set board
73
bizhub 652/552/602/502
B. When life is reached

The drum unit life counter is used to keep track of the life of the drum unit.
A near-life condition is encountered when the consumption rate reaches about 87%, at
which time the L code screen appears.
A warning screen appears when the drum unit life counter reaches the life value. Initiation of a new print cycle is prohibited when a predetermined number of printed pages are
produced after the life value has been reached, at which time a drum unit replacement
screen will appear.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
When a near-life value is reached
L code key (The L code screen

appears when the L code key is
touched)
When a life value is reached
When a predetermined number of

printed pages are produced after
the life value has been reached.
A2WUT2E092DA
74
12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION

bizhub 652/552/602/502

12.1 Configuration
[1]
[5]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[9]
[3]
A2WUT2C035DA
[1]
Developing unit
[2]
[3]
TCR sensor/K (TCRS/K)
[4]
[5]
[6]
Photo conductor
[7]
Developing roller
[8]
Doctor blade
[9]

screw)
75
bizhub 652/552/602/502
12.2 Drive
[1]
[5]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[4]
A2WUT2C036DA
76
[1]
Developing roller
[2]
[3]

screw)
[4]
[5]
Developing roller rotatory direction
12.3 Operation
A. Toner
The toner cartridge/K is packed with both toner and carrier (small percent) and the developing unit/K is replenished with fresh carrier at the same time that it is replenished with
toner. Excess developer in the developing unit/K is discharged to the waste toner box,
thereby inhibiting developer left in the developing unit/K from being deteriorated and
maintaining stable image quality for an extended period of time. This method is referred
to as the auto refining developing system.
For details, see 12.3.2 Auto refining developing system.
Toner and carrier packed in the toner cartridge is simply referred to as Toner instead
of Developer throughout the manual.
Developer, if clearly specified, refers to the developer that is mixed in the developing
unit to offer a specified T/C.
Developer flow
1. Toner (including carrier) supplied from the front end of the developing unit is fed to
the rear of the unit, while being mixed with developer and electrically charged by
the conveying screw (agitating screw).
2. The TCR sensor installed on the underside of the developing unit detects toner-tocarrier ratio (T/C) during this time.
3. The developer conveyed to the rear of the unit is carried to the conveying screw
(supply screw) on the right.
4. The developer is conveyed onto the developing roller. The doctor blade then controls the height of the developer brush to ensure that the developer on the developing roller levels out.
5. Toner sticks to the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the photo conductor.
The developer that is left on the developing roller is returned to the conveying
screw (supply screw) on the right by the magnetic pole positioning of the developing roller. It is then conveyed to the front of the unit.
6. The developer is returned to the conveying screw (agitating screw) from the conveying screw (supply screw).
7. With operations described above repeatedly performed, the developer is circulated
thought the developing unit.
8. Part of the circulating developer is collected in the waste toner box through the
developer discharge port located at the front side of the conveying screw (supply
screw). The developer discharge port is provided with a shutter mechanism.
Mounting the waste toner box pushes the shutter at the developer discharge port,
opening the developer discharge port. Removing the waste toner box, on the other
hand, closes the shutter and developer is thereby prevented from spilling from the
developer discharge port. (For details, see the paragraphs that describe the auto
refining developing system and toner collecting section.)
77
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
12.3.1
bizhub 652/552/602/502
bizhub 652/552/602/502

[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[7]
[6]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
A2WUT2C037DA
78
[1]
Toner supplied from toner hopper
[2]
Photo conductor
[3]
Developing roller
[4]

screw)
[5]
[6]
Developer collected to waste toner box
[7]
Toner flow inside developing unit
[8]
12.3.2
Auto refining developing system
The toner cartridge/K is packed with both toner and carrier and the developing unit/K is
replenished with fresh carrier at the same time that it is replenished with toner.
Excess developer in the developing unit/K is discharged, thereby inhibiting developer left
in the developing unit/K from being deteriorated and maintaining stable image quality for
an extended period of time.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Toner bottle
Toner
New carrier
Low degree of deterioration of
entire developer
Circulation
and agitation
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Developing unit
Waste toner box
A0P0T2J609AA
79
bizhub 652/552/602/502

12.3.3
Developing bias
The developing bias voltage (Vdc) is applied to the developing roller so that an adequate
amount of toner is attracted onto the surface of the photo conductor can be controlled.
To help toner to be attracted more easily to the surface of the photo conductor, the developing bias voltage (Vdc) of DC+AC is applied during development. AC component is
applied only while development is taking place. At any other timing, only Vdc is applied.
The developing bias voltage (Vdc) is supplied from high voltage unit /1.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[3]
A2WUT2C038DA
80
[1]
Charge corona
[2]
Developing roller
[3]
High voltage unit/1 (HV1)
[4]
Developing unit (Rear view)
[5]
Developing bias voltage application terminal
12.3.4
Toner density control
The magnetic TCR sensor is mounted on the underside of the developing section. This
TCR sensor detects toner-to-carrier ratio (T/C) of the developer. The reading is used for
determining the amount of toner supplied.
The target T/C ratio is 7%.
When a new developing unit/K is mounted in the machine, the sensitivity of the TCR sensor/K is automatically adjusted.
The sensitivity of the TCR sensor/K cannot be adjusted manually from the Service Mode
and so on.
The detection level of the TCR sensor/K can be adjusted from Service Mode Image
Process Adjustment TCR Level Setting. (The setting will be enabled after the TCR
sensor/K automatic adjustment.)
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
A2WUT2C041DA
[1]
Photo conductor
[2]
Developing roller
[3]

screw)
[4]
TCR sensor/K (TCRS/K)
81
bizhub 652/552/602/502

12.3.5
Detection of developing unit/K
A new developing unit for replacement has EEPROM board that detects a new unit and
keeps track of the service life of the unit.
A. New developing unit detection
The developing unit shipped with the main body does not have any EEPROM board. The
life counter is recorded in the main body.
A new developing unit/K is detected when 24 V is turned ON after the main power switch
is turned OFF and ON or the lower front door is opened and closed.
When a new developing unit is detected, the lift counter is automatically reset and a TCR
adjustment is carried out.
An automatic TCR adjustment takes about 140 sec.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
B. When life is reached

The developing unit life counter is used to keep track of the life of the developing unit.
A warning screen appears when the life value is reached. Initiation of a new print cycle is
prohibited when a predetermined number of printed pages are produced after the life
value has been reached, at which time a developing unit replacement screen will appear.
When a life value is reached
When printing is prohibited
A2WUT2E093DA
82
12.3.6
Toner scattering prevention
To prevent the image and machine interior from being dirtied, a toner filter is installed at
the rear of the machine, and the toner suction fan motor that work together sucks toner
particles rising up during development.
The toner filter comes together with the drum unit/K.
[1]
[2]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[7]
[8]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[6]
[4]
[5]
A2WUT2C039DA
[1]
Toner filter
[2]
[3]
Toner suction fan motor (FM7)
[4]
Developing unit/K
[5]
Toner scattered
[6]
Air flow of drawn air
[7]
Frame
[8]
Exhaust duct
12.3.7
Discharged to the outside of the machine
Image stabilization control
An image stabilization control is automatically performed, when the developing unit/K or

drum unit/K is replaced with a new one.
For details, see 24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL.
83
bizhub 652/552/602/502
13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION

13.1 Configuration
A0P0T2C013DA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[10]
[9]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[13]
[11]
[12]
[9]
[10]
[15]
[14]
[16]
A2WUT2C042DA
84
[1]
Transfer belt unit
[2]
[3]
Pressure welding alienation sensor/K

(PS51)
[4]
1st transfer pressure retraction motor

(M21)
[5]
Cleaner motor (M38)
[6]
Transfer belt cleaning section
[7]
Waste toner conveying relay section
[8]
Pressure cam
[9]
Retraction roller
[10]
1st transfer roller/K
[11]
Transfer belt drive roller
[12]
Transfer belt driven roller/1
[13]
Cleaning brush 1
[14]
Cleaning brush 2
[15]
Imaging unit/K
[16]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
85
bizhub 652/552/602/502
13.2 Drive
13.2.1
Transfer belt drive

[2]
[1]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[6]
[5]
[6]
[4]
A2WUT2C043DA
86
[1]
[2]
[3]
Transfer belt
[4]

[5]
[6]
Transfer belt rotatory direction
13.2.2

bizhub 652/552/602/502

Transfer belt cleaning section drive
A. Cleaning brush drive

[3]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[7]
[4]
[5]
A2WUT2C045DA
[1]
Cleaner motor (M38)
[2]
[3]
Toner collecting roller 1
[4]
Cleaning brush 1
Cleaning brush 2
[5]
[6]
Transfer belt
[7]
B. Toner collecting screw drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
A2WUT2C046DA
[1]
Transfer belt driven roller shaft
[3]
Toner agitating paddle
[2]
87
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
bizhub 652/552/602/502

13.2.3
1st transfer roller drive
[5]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[6]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[7]
[4]
[6]
88
[1]
[2]
Retraction roller
[3]

(PS51)
[4]
Sliding plate
[5]

(M21)
[6]
Cam
[7]
Transfer belt
A2WUT2C047DA
13.3 Operation
13.3.1
1st transfer roller control
The machine is provided with a mechanism that presses the 1st transfer roller/K up
against the inside of the transfer belt during the 1st transfer stage. The 1st transfer pressure retraction motor provides the drive for this operation.
The cam causes the 1st transfer roller/K and retraction roller to perform pressure/retraction operation.
The pressure welding alienation sensor/K detects the retraction position of the 1st transfer roller/K.
To detect pressure and retraction positions, the sliding plate position is detected.
In the pressure operation, a predetermined pulse controls the stop position.
In order to reduce the first print time, the machine uses the cam that can turn both forward and backward. With the least rotation of the cam, the 1st transfer roller/K position
can be changed.
The pressure operation starts when a print cycle starts, and the retraction operation
starts when the print cycle completes.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
[3]
[2]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[12]
A2WUT2C048DA
89
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[1]

(PS51)
[2]
Sliding plate
[3]

(M21)
[4]
Cam
[5]
Retraction roller
[6]
Roller pressure/retraction
[7]
[8]
Retraction roller (When pressed)
[9]
1st transfer roller/K (When pressed)
[10]
Transfer belt
[11]
Retraction roller (When retracted)
[12]
1st transfer roller/K (When retracted)
A. Retraction roller control

At the same time that the pressure position of the 1st transfer roller/K is changed, the
machine moves the retraction roller up and down to change the position of the surface of
the transfer belt to suit the corresponding position in the specific print mode or standby
state.
Changing the cam stop position moves the retraction lever, which results in the retraction
roller moving up or down.
The retraction roller is driven by the cam.
90
Transfer belt cleaning
To scrape residual toner off the surface of the transfer belt, the transfer belt is provided
with cleaning brush 1 and 2.
Cleaning brush 1 and 2 are a rotary brush. To enhance its ability to scrape residual toner
off the surface of the transfer belt, the brush is turned in a direction opposite to that of the
transfer belt. The cleaner motor provides the drive for this system.
During a print cycle, an image stabilization operation, the 2nd transfer roller cleaning,
and other states whenever the transfer belt operates.
The waste toner conveyance screw conveys waste toner collected by the cleaning brush
1 and 2 to the front side of the machine.
Waste toner is conveyed to the waste toner conveying relay section from the toner collecting port located in the front side of the waste toner conveyance screw. Then it is collected into the waste toner box. (For details, see 15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION.)
The toner collecting port located in the front side of the waste toner conveyance screw of
the transfer belt unit is provided with a shutter mechanism. Mounting the transfer belt unit
pushes the shutter at the toner collecting port, opening the toner collecting port. Removing the transfer belt unit, on the other hand, closes the shutter and toner is thereby prevented from spilling from the toner collecting port.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[10]
[1]
Transfer belt
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Cleaning brush 2
[7]
[8]
Shutter (Closed)
[9]
Shutter (Opened)
[10]
Toner flow
A2WUT2C049DA
Cleaning brush 1
91
bizhub 652/552/602/502
13.3.2
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
13.3.3
An image stabilization control sequence is automatically performed when a new transfer

belt unit is mounted in the machine and the retraction of new transfer belt unit is carried
out from the service mode.
For details, see 24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
92
14. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION

bizhub 652/552/602/502

14.1 Configuration
A0P0T2C016DA
[3]
[2]
A0P0T2C015DA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Temperature/humidity sensor
(TEM/HUMS)
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[8]
A2WUT2C050DA
93
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
94
[1]
2nd transfer section (Front view)
[2]
Charge neutralizing needle
[3]
2nd transfer roller
[4]
Shutter
[5]
Temperature/humidity sensor (TEM/HUMS)
[6]
IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F)
[7]
2nd transfer section (Rear view)
[8]
2nd transfer pressure retraction motor (M3)
[9]
Pressure welding alienation sensor (PS50)

bizhub 652/552/602/502
14.2 Drive
14.2.1
Pressure/retraction drive
2nd transfer roller

Pressure welding alienation sensor (PS50)
Cam
2nd transfer pressure retraction

motor (M3)
Pressure lever
A2WUT2C051DA
14.2.2
2nd transfer roller drive
[4]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[1]
[5]
[6]
[5]
A2WUT2C052DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
Transfer belt
[4]
2nd transfer roller

Transfer belt drive roller rotatory direction
[5]
[6]
2nd transfer roller rotatory direction
95
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Shutter
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
14.3 Operation
14.3.1
2nd transfer roller control
A. 2nd transfer roller pressure/retraction

The 2nd transfer roller has a pressure/retraction mechanism which presses to and
retracts from the transfer belt so the patterns made on the transfer belt except by printing, such as detection pattern creation during image stabilization operation, will not affect
the 2nd transfer roller.
The pressure operation starts when a print cycle starts, and the retraction operation
starts when the print cycle completes.
Pressure/retraction operation
1. Drive from the 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor is transmitted to the drive
gear.
2. The drive gear rotates to rotate the cam. Pressing down the pressure lever will
press the 2nd transfer roller against the transfer belt.
3. At this time, the pressure welding alienation sensor detects that the 2nd transfer
roller reaches the pressure position. The 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor is
stopped.
4. The cam rotates further when the 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor turns ON
again. Releasing the pressure lever will move the 2nd transfer roller to the retraction position. At this time, the pressure welding alienation sensor detects that the
roller reaches the retraction position. The 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor is
stopped.
Pressure welding alienation

sensor (PS50)
2nd transfer pressure
retraction motor (M3)
2nd transfer
roller
Cam
When retracted
A0P0T2C017DA
When pressed
Drive roller
2nd transfer
roller
Cam
96
4036ma2168c0
4036ma2023c1
14.3.2
2nd transfer control
The toner on the transfer belt is transferred onto the paper when the paper is transported
between the transfer belt and the 2nd transfer roller.
To adjust the 2nd transfer output to the correct voltage, ATVC system is installed.
A constant current is output to the 2nd transfer roller to measure voltage. The measured
voltage is corrected to be used for automatic adjustment of the 2nd transfer output voltage.
The ATVC operation is performed after the power switch is turned ON. (Mainly just before
image stabilization operation)
Or, it is performed before the machine starts a print cycle for the first time after the temperature change inside the machine went over the threshold.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Overview of ATVC operation

Printer control board (PRCB)
Output a constant current to the 2nd

transfer roller.
Determine the 2nd transfer output

voltage.
HV2
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Calculate the resistance value of the

2nd transfer roller.
Measures the voltage
Constant current
2nd transfer roller

Transfer belt
97
bizhub 652/552/602/502

14.3.3
2nd transfer roller cleaning
To remove residual toner off the surface of the 2nd transfer roller, a +/- DC bias is applied
alternately to the roller, thereby moving the residual toner to the surface of the transfer
belt.
The cleaning brush then scrapes off the toner on the surface of the transfer belt.
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[9]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[6]
[1]
[8]
[7]
Residual toner
A2WUT2C053DA
[2]
The residual toner is transferred to the

transfer belt
[3]
The residual toner is transferred
[4]
The residual toner is collected
[5]
Cleaning brush 1
[6]
Cleaning brush 2
[7]
Transfer belt
[8]
2nd transfer roller
A. Cleaning operation timing

The sequence is carried when the power switch are turned ON or each door is opened
and closed when a print cycle has been abnormally terminated due to a misfeed or an
occurrence of the malfunction.
The sequence is carried out at the end of a print cycle, if the cumulative count since the
preceding 2nd transfer roller cleaning sequence exceeds 300 during the print cycle.
If the cumulative count since the preceding 2nd transfer roller cleaning sequence
exceeds 3,000 during a print cycle, the print cycle is interrupted and the cleaning
sequence is carried out. The print cycle is resumed as soon as the cleaning sequence is
completed.
Count
216 mm or less
Over 216 mm
98
14.3.4
Paper separation control
The charge neutralizing needle is provided to prevent the paper from being wound
around the transfer belt.
The charge neutralizing needle is located downstream of the 2nd transfer roller in the
paper feeding direction.
A negative charge, which is the reverse polarity to the positive output from the 2nd transfer roller, to the charge neutralizing needle to remove electric charge remaining on the
paper which has undergone the 2nd transfer stage.
The output of the charge neutralizing needle is switched automatically using the high
voltage unit/2 according to the paper type and the environmental conditions, and whether
the print cycle is for printing the 1st side or 2nd.
In order to separate thin paper or curled paper caused by 2-sided printing from the transfer belt without fail after the 2nd transfer, transfer belt separator claws are mounted at 3
places.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
A2WUT2C054DA
[1]
Paper separator claws
[2]
Transfer belt
[3]
2nd transfer roller
[4]
Charge neutralizing needle
99
bizhub 652/552/602/502

14.3.5
Sensor protection
The IDC sensor can be contaminated with toner since it is located under the transfer belt.
There is a shutter mechanism provided for the sensor to prevent it from being contaminated.
The shutter is closed and opened in time with the 2nd transfer roller being pressed and
retracted. When the 2nd transfer roller is retracted, the pressure pin presses the shutter
holder, causing the shutter at the IDC sensor section to move to the front side.
When the 2nd transfer roller is pressed, on the other hand, the shutter at the IDC sensor
section is moved to the rear by the spring force and closed.
2nd transfer roller
Shutter
Retracted
Open
Pressed
Closed
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
[4]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[6]
[7]
[2]
A2WUT2C055DA
100
[1]
2nd transfer pressure retraction motor (M3)
[2]
[3]
Shutter
[4]
Pressure pin
[5]
Shutter holder
[6]
Shutter (Opened)
[7]
Shutter (Closed)
15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION

15.1 Configuration
The toner collecting section is composed of the waste toner box and waste toner conveying relay section.
[2]
[3]
[1]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[7]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
[10]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[5]
[14]
[2]
[15]
[12]
[11]
[13]
A2WUT2C056DA
101
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Waste toner box (Front view)
[2]
[3]
Transfer belt cleaning section
[4]
Waste toner conveying relay section
[5]
Waste toner agitating motor lock sensor

(PS23)
[6]
Agitating screw/1
[7]
Agitating screw/2
[8]
Paddle
[9]
Waste toner collecting port (Transfer belt

unit)
[10]
Waste toner box (Rear view)
[11]
Waste toner box set sensor (PS53)
[12]
Waste developer discharge port (Developing unit)
[13]
Waste toner full sensor (PS54)
[14]
Waste toner relay screw
[15]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
102
Waste toner collecting port (Drum unit)

bizhub 652/552/602/502
15.2 Drive
[1]
[9]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[7]
[9]
[5]
[6]
[4]
A2WUT2C057DA
[1]
Paddle
[2]
[3]
[4]
Waste toner agitating motor lock sensor

(PS23)
[5]
Actuator
[6]
Agitating screw/2
[7]
Agitating screw/1
[8]
Waste toner flow from developing unit
[9]
Waste toner flow from waste toner conveying relay section
The agitating paddle and waste toner relay screw in the waste toner conveying relay section are driven and rotated by the waste toner agitating motor.
The agitating screw 1/2 in the waste toner box is driven and rotated by the waste toner
agitating motor.
The waste toner agitating motor lock sensor monitors the condition of the waste toner
agitating motor rotation.
103
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
15.3 Operation
15.3.1
Waste toner collecting path to the waste toner box
The waste toner collecting path is consist of the three following path.
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
A2WUT2C058DA
104
[1]
Waste toner collecting path from the drum

unit
[3]
Waste toner collecting path from the transfer belt unit
[2]
Waste developer collecting path from the

developing unit
A. Waste toner collecting path from the drum unit

The toner collecting screw conveys toner collected from the drum unit to the waste toner
box.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[3]
A2WUT2C059DA
[1]
Toner collecting screw (Drum unit)
[3]
Agitating screw/1
[2]
Toner flow
105
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
B. Waste toner collecting path from the transfer belt unit

Waste toner conveyed by the waste toner collecting screw of the transfer belt is conveyed
to the waste toner conveying relay section.
Waste toner conveyed to the waste toner conveying relay section is conveyed to the front
side of the machine by the waste toner relay screw.
Waste toner is collected in the waste toner box through the toner collecting port located
at the front side of the waste toner relay screw.
The toner collecting port is provided with a shutter mechanism. Mounting the waste toner
box pushes the shutter at the toner collecting port, opening the toner collecting port.
Removing the waste toner box, on the other hand, closes the shutter and toner is thereby
prevented from spilling from the toner collecting port.
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[2]
[4]
[1]
[4]
A2WUT2C061DA
106
[1]
Agitating screw/1
[2]
Toner flow
[3]
Paddle
[4]
C. Waste developer collecting path from the developing unit

The conveying screw (supply screw) convey waste developer collected from the developing unit to the waste toner box. (For details, see 12.3.2 Auto refining developing system
of 12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION.
[2]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
Developer flow
[3]
Agitating screw/2
A2WUT2C060DA
[2]
Conveying screw (supply screw) (Developing unit)
107
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[3]
bizhub 652/552/602/502

15.3.2
Toner path in the waste toner box
The waste toner box consists of the waste toner collecting section and the waste developer collecting section.
The waste toner collecting section and the waste developer collecting section are
arranged independently of each other, each storing waste toner and waste developer,
respectively.
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[7]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[5]
108
[6]
A2WUT2C062DA
[1]
[2]
Waste toner flow
[3]
Agitating screw/1
[4]

unit)
[5]
Waste developer flow
[6]
Agitating screw/2
[7]
A. Waste toner collecting section

Waste toner conveyed from the waste toner conveying relay section collecting port
(transfer belt unit) and the drum unit collecting port is stored in the waste toner collecting
section. When the waste toner stored reaches agitating screw/1, it is conveyed by agitating screw/1 to the center in the waste toner box to thereby even out waste toner in the
waste toner collecting section.
The waste toner agitating motor operates when the TCR sensor performs an automatic
adjustment (image stabilization control mode 1), toner is forcefully replenished or
transfer belt is driven, and the agitating screw is rotated.
The amount of waste toner accumulated in the waste toner collecting section is not monitored. (The near-full/full detection inside the toner collecting section is not performed.)
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[5]
[4]
A2WUT2C063DA
[1]
[2]
Agitating screw/1
[3]

unit)
[4]
Waste toner collected
[5]
Waste toner flow
109
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[2]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
B. Waste developer collecting section

Waste developer conveyed from the developing unit collecting port is stored in the waste
developer collecting section. The waste developer is conveyed by agitating screw/2 to the
left in the waste toner box to thereby even out waste developer in the waste developer
collecting section.
There is the waste toner box near-full detection window provided at the left portion of the
waste toner box to monitor the amount of developer accumulated in the developer collecting section. For the waste toner near-full/full detection, see 15.3.4 Waste toner full
detection.
The waste toner agitating motor operates when the TCR sensor performs an automatic
adjustment (image stabilization control mode 1), toner is forcefully replenished or
transfer belt is driven, and the agitating screw is rotated.
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[5]
[6]
[4]
110
A2WUT2C064DA
[1]
[2]
Waste toner near-full detection window
[3]
[4]
Agitating screw/2
[5]
Waste developer flow
[6]
Waste toner collected
15.3.3
Waste toner box set detection
The waste toner box set sensor is provided to detect a waste toner box loaded in position. Timing for this detection is when the power switch is turned ON, and the front door is
closed. If the waste toner box is found to be out of position, the machine inhibits the initiation of a new print cycle.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Waste toner box (Rear view)
[3]
Waste toner box setting direction
A2WUT2C065DA
[2]
Waste toner box set sensor (PS53)
111
15.3.4
Waste toner box full detection
An interrupter-type photosensor is used to detect a waste toner box full condition.

When the waste toner box near-full detection window located in the waste developer collecting section of the waste toner box blocks the waste toner full sensor for a given period
of time or over, the machine determines that the waste toner box is nearly full of waste
toner.
At this time, the waste toner box near-full warning is given on the control panel.
The machine detects a waste toner box full condition after a predetermined number of
printed pages are produced after the detection of the waste toner box near full condition.
At the same time that the waste toner box near full condition is detected, the counter
dedicated to the waste toner box inside the machine starts counting. When the count
reaches 64,000, the machine detects a waste toner box full condition and prohibits the
start of any new print cycle to be run thereafter. (The print job being run is also interrupted.)
The capacity of the waste toner box is equivalent to 160,000 printed pages as converted
at A4 size/image density 6% (1-sided prints). (The number of printed pages varies
depending on the image density of the printed pages.)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Near-full condition warning display
[4]
Full condition warning display
A2WUT2E087DA
112
[1]
[2]
Waste toner near-full detection window
[3]
When the amount of developer is low
[4]
When the amount of developer is near-full

condition
NOTE
The warning screen to be displayed is changed by specifying the person who replaces
the unit in the System 2 Unit Change in the Service Mode. The illustration shows
the message when User is selected.
The default setting is User.
A. Count method
The counter value is incremented according to the image density information of the print
image sent from the MFP control board.
Calculation is based on a solid image of A4 size that serves as 100% reference value
(e.g.: A3 solid image is 200%).
Up to about 3,000 printed pages can be produced, as converted at A4 size/image density 6% (1-sided prints). (The number of printed pages varies depending on the image
density of the printed pages.)
Image density (%)
Count value
0% to less than 3%
11
Over 3% up to 7%
20
Over 7% up to 10%
32
Over 10% up to 20%
64
Over 20% up to 50%
160
Over 50% up to 100%
320
Over 100% up to 200%
640
Over 200%
1,280
B. Reset the waste toner box full display

After the waste toner box has been replaced with a new one and the waste toner full sensor has been unblocked for a given period of time, the machine cancels the printing-disabled condition, while at the same time automatically clearing the counter exclusive for
waste toner.
113
bizhub 652/552/602/502
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)

16.1 Configuration
16.1.1
Major components
Tray1 and 2 have same sensor position.
A00JT2C277AA
Tray1 upper limit sensor (PS6)

Tray1 near empty sensor (PS3)
Tray1 device detection sensor (PS1)
Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)

Tray1 paper feed sensor (PS5)
Tray1 paper empty
sensor (PS2)
A00JT2C286AA
Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1)

Tray1 CD paper size sensor/1 (PS7)
Tray2 sensor identification

Tray2 paper empty sensor (PS11)
Tray2 device detection sensor (PS9)
Tray2 paper empty display board (PEIB/2)
114
16.1.2

bizhub 652/552/602/502

Layout of sensors and rollers
Timing roller
Timing roller sensor (PS38)
Tray1 vertical transport

sensor (PS4)
Tray1 vertical transport roller
Tray1 paper feed roller
First sheet of paper

Second sheet of paper

A00JT2C213AA
115
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray2 vertical transport sensor

(PS12)
bizhub 652/552/602/502
16.2 Drive
Drive parts are arranged in the same way in tray1 and 2.
Take-up motor drives the tray1 and 2 paper feed rollers.
Each paper feed roller has a clutch that is turned ON when it needs to be driven.
Tray1
Take-up motor (M22)
Tray1 lift-up motor (M6)
Tray1 paper feed clutch (CL1)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A00JT2C286AA
Tray 2
Take-up motor (M22)

A0P0T5C031DA
116
16.3 Operation
16.3.1
Up/down control
A. Up operation
Paper lifting plate B is located under paper lifting plate A.
The lifting plate drive shaft of the tray1(2) lift-up motor is connected to paper lifting plate
2.
When the drive shaft of the tray1(2) lift-up motor rotates, paper lifting plate B raises paper
lifting plate A.
Paper lifting plate B
bizhub 652/552/602/502

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper lifting plate A
A00JT2C315AA
Lifting plate drive shaft

A00JT2C314AA
B. Down operation
When the tray is slid out of the machine, the coupling and the lifting plate drive shaft of
the tray1(2) lift-up motor are disconnected from each other.
When the driving force of the tray1(2) lift-up motor is released from the lifting plate drive
shaft, the paper lifting plate starts lowering by its own weight.
117
C. Operation timing
(1) When the tray is slid in
When the tray is slid into the machine, the tray1(2) device detection sensor is blocked.
The machine then determines that the tray is slid into position.
The paper lifting plate is lowering when the tray is slid out, so that the tray1(2) upper limit
sensor is unblocked.
Determining that the tray1(2) upper limit sensor is unblocked, the machine lets the
tray1(2) lift-up motor rotate to start the up operation of the paper lifting plate.
When the paper stack is raised to a predetermined height after the up operation of the
paper lifting plate has been started, the actuator blocks the tray1(2) upper limit sensor.
Determining that the tray1(2) upper limit sensor is blocked, the machine stops the lift-up
motor to complete the up operation of the paper lifting plate.
Control is provided to make sure that only one tray performs the up operation at one
time.
If the tray is slid out during the up operation of the paper lifting plate and accordingly the
tray1(2) device detection sensor is unblocked, the up operation of the paper lifting plate is
terminated.
Lifting completed
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Tray set
Paper consumption
Tray1 (Tray2) Set detection sensor

Tray1 (Tray2) Upper limit sensor
Tray1 (Tray2) Lift-up motor
A0P0T5E108DA
(2) During a print cycle

When the amount of paper decreases as the unit keeps printing, the pick-up roller will
gradually come down to unblock the upper limit sensor. The lift-up motor will rotate again
to lift up the paper lifting plate.
When the upper limit sensor is blocked, the lift-up motor will stop to stop lifting the paper
lifting plate.
The sequence of these operations is repeated to keep constant the pressure between
the pick-up roller and paper stack (paper take-up pressure) regardless of the amount of
paper still available for use.
118
Paper feed control
Tray1 and Tray2 are controlled in the same control procedure.

A. Pick-up control
The take-up motor is energized by the print start signal.
The tray1(2) paper feed clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of
time after the print start signal.
As the tray1(2) paper feed clutch is energized, the driving force of the take-up motor is
transmitted to the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller. As a result, the pick-up roller
picks up a sheet of paper and transports it onto the paper feed roller.
The paper feed roller transports the paper onto the tray1(2) vertical transport roller.
The take-up motor and the tray1(2) paper feed clutch are deenergized when the tray1(2)
vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray1(2) vertical transport roller
along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper fed off from the tray1(2) vertical transport roller.
The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller are driven by the moving paper, continuing to
rotate.
The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller stop rotating as the paper moves past them.
Take-up motor (M22)
Pick-up roller
Paper feed roller
Paper separator roller
tray1 paper feed

clutch (CL1)
Torque limiter
A0P0T5C032DA
119
bizhub 652/552/602/502
16.3.2
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
B. Separation control
The paper separator roller is driven via a torque limiter in the direction opposite the paper
transport direction.
The paper separator roller is pressed against the paper feed roller by the operating pressure generated by pressure of the spring and torque of the torque limiter.
The operating pressure of the paper feed roller, paper separator roller, and the torque
limiter serves as the limit torque for double feed prevention.
If there is no sheet of paper or only one sheet of paper between the paper separator
roller and paper feed roller, the limit torque is exceeded, so that the paper separator roller
follows the rotation of the paper feed roller.
If there are two or more sheets of paper between the paper separator roller and paper
feed roller, the limit torque is greater than the friction force of the paper, so that the paper
separator roller rotates backward.
The backward rotation of the paper separator roller allows the lower sheet of paper in
contact with the paper separator roller to be returned back into the tray. This properly
separates the sheets of paper.
Paper feed roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Pick-up roller
Paper
A0P0T5C033DA
120
C. Paper transport control

The tray1(2) vertical transport motor is energized after the lapse of a predetermined
period of time after the print start signal.
The driving force of the tray1(2) vertical transport motor is transmitted to the tray1(2) vertical transport roller. Rotation of the tray1(2) vertical transport roller transports the paper
onto the timing roller (registration roller).
The tray1(2) vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray1(2) vertical transport roller along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper fed off from the
tray1(2) vertical transport roller.
If the tray1(2) vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper
even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a
paper misfeed occurs at the vertical transport section.
If the paper reaches earlier than the predetermined time, the tray1(2) vertical transport
motor is decelerated to correct the timing at which the paper reaches the timing roller
(registration roller).
bizhub 652/552/602/502
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
(1) Operation timing

Tray1 and Tray2 are controlled in the same operation timing.
*Tray1 paper feed control timing
Vertical transport sensor ON
Start key ON
Timing roller drive
Take-up motor (M22)

Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1)
A0P0T5E114DA
121
bizhub 652/552/602/502
D. Paper feed speed reduction control

When paper reaches the tray1(2) paper feed sensor, if the interval between the paper
and the preceding paper is short, the take-up motor speed is reduced temporarily to
adjust the paper interval to the proper one.
When paper reaches the tray1(2) vertical transport sensor, if the interval between the
paper and the preceding paper is short, the tray1(2) vertical transport motor reduces its
speed or stops in order to adjust the paper interval to the proper one.
Paper from the tray1 and tray2 is transported at the same speed with the system speed.
If the second sheet of paper reaches the paper feed sensor during the paper take-up
sequence for the first sheet of paper, the system determines that there is a double feed
occurring and the speed of the paper feed roller (take-up motor) is reduced during the
take-up of the second sheet of paper to ensure that there is a good distance between the
two sheets of paper.
Preceding paper
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper interval
Sensor
Paper to be controlled
A00JT2C317AA
122
E. Downstream exit control during multi-print cycle

The following terms are used for convenience sake throughout this chapter.
Upstream: Refers to the source side of paper supply relative to the paper feeding direction
Downstream: Refers to the destination side of paper transport relative to the paper feeding direction
If a paper misfeed occurs at the paper feed section which is upstream in paper transport,
the print cycle is not brought to an immediate stop; rather, the machine allows a sheet of
paper, for which the print cycle is to be completed at a downstream side, to continue
undergoing the current print cycle and feeds the printed page out after completion of the
current print cycle.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
(1) Types of paper misfeed governed by downstream exit control

Misfeed at tray1
Misfeed at bypass paper feed section
Misfeed at tray2
Misfeed at LCT paper feed section
Misfeed at tray3
Misfeed at vertical transport section
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Misfeed at tray4
(2) Paper pass

Paper exit section
ADU transport roller 1

Switchback roller
ADU transport sensor/1 (PS47)
Fusing section
Transfer section
Registration
section
Duplex section
Timing roller
Transport sensor/2 (PS48)

Paper feed section
A00JT2C245AA
123
bizhub 652/552/602/502
(3) 1-sided printing

Operation 1
In consecutive 1-sided printing, 4th sheet causes a jamming at the paper feed tray section.
1st sheet after an image transfer is remained at the fusing
section and the paper exit section.
2nd sheet before an image transfer is remained at the vertical conveyance section and the registration section.
3rd sheet before an image transfer is remained at the
paper feed section and the vertical conveyance section.
Sheet before a 1-sided

image transfer
Sheet after a 1-sided
image transfer
Jamming
A0P0T5E110DA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Operation 2
Feed and convey 4th sheet is stopped.
Exit 1st sheet.
Transfer/fuse images on 2nd sheet.
Convey 3rd sheet to transfer images.
A0P0T5C078DA
Operation 2
Exit 2nd sheet.
Fuse 3rd sheet to exit paper.
A0P0T5C079DA
124
bizhub 652/552/602/502
(4) 2-sided printing

Operation 1
In consecutive 2-sided printing, 5th sheet causes a jamming at the paper feed tray section.
1st sheet after a 2-sided image transfer is remained at the
paper exit section.
2nd sheet before a 1-sided image fusing is remained at the
duplex section.
3rd sheet before a 1-sided image fusing is remained at the
paper exit section.
4th sheet before an image transfer is remained at the vertical conveyance section and the registration section.
Sheet before a 1-sided

image transfer
image transfer
image transfer
Jamming
A0P0T5E111DA
Operation 2
Feed and convey 5th sheet is stopped.
Exit 1st sheet.
Transfer/fuse 2-sided images on 2nd sheet.
Convey 3rd sheet to the duplex section.
Transfer/fuse 1-sided images on 4th sheet to convey to the
paper exit section.
A0P0T5C081DA
Operation 3
Exit 2nd sheet.
Convey 3rd sheet to the duplex section to stop.
Stop 4th sheet at the duplex section.
A0P0T5C082DA
Operation 4
Open a cover over the duplex section to remove 3rd and 4th sheet remained in the
duplex section.
NOTE
3rd and 4th sheets are conveyed to the duplex section which allowed removing a
jamming easily. 2-sided images are not printed on a sheet conveyed to the duplex
section.
125
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502

16.3.3
Paper size detection control

The size in the main scanning direction is detected based on the combination of tray1(2)
CD paper size sensor/1 and tray1(2) CD paper size sensor/2 being unblocked or
blocked.
Tray1(2) CD paper size sensor/1 and tray1(2) CD paper size sensor/2 are unblocked or
blocked by the paper width detection plate provided in the paper width guide plate.
The size in the sub scanning direction is detected based on the combination of ON or
OFF position of switches 1 to 4 mounted on paper size detect board/1,/2.
Each of switches 1 to 4 is turned ON or OFF by the paper length detection plate connected to the paper length guide plate.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

Guide
A0P0T5C007DA
126
C. Sheet size determination

Combination of the width of the main scanning and the length of the sub scanning will
decide a sheet size.
Paper size
Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1) Tray1 CD paper size Tray1 CD paper size
sensor/1 (PS7)
sensor/2 (PS8)
Tray2 CD paper size Tray2 CD paper size
Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4
sensor/1 (PS15)
sensor/2 (PS16)
A3
H/L
B4
A4S
H/L
A4
B5S
B5
L
L
A5S
12 18
11 17
81/2 14
81/2 11S
81/2 11
FLS *1
8K (8 Open) S
(270 mm 390
mm)
16K (16 Open)

(270 mm 195
mm)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Detection switch/
Detection sensor
*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for FLS.
220 x 330 mm, 8 13, 81/8 131/4, 81/4 13, 81/2 13
Switch/sensor states
Switch/sensor
Paper size detect board/1, 2 : Switches 1 to 4
Tray1 CD paper size sensor/1, 2
Tray1 CD paper size sensor/1, 2
Physical state
HIGH signal
LOW signal
ON
OFF
Blocked
Unblocked
bizhub 652/552/602/502
127
bizhub 652/552/602/502

16.3.4
Remaining paper detection control
A. Paper near-empty detection

The tray1(2) near empty sensor detects a paper near-empty condition of the tray.
As paper is consumed, the position of the near empty detection actuator provided at the
lifting plate drive shaft of the lift-up motor is raised.
When the near empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which the tray1(2) near
empty sensor is blocked, the machine detects a near-empty condition.
A near-empty condition is detected when the amount of paper still available for use
becomes about 50 30 sheets (about 50 sheets in terms of paper weighing 80 g/m2).
A near-empty condition
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION


A00JT2C311AA
B. Paper empty detection

The tray1(2) empty sensor detects a paper empty condition of the tray.
As paper is consumed, the position of the empty detection actuator provided beside the
paper feed roller is raised.
When the empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which the tray1(2) empty
sensor is blocked, the machine detects a paper empty condition.
An empty condition
A00JT2C312AA
128
C. Remaining paper level display

The amount of remaining paper is indicated by the LED on the right side of each tray and
by the screen of the control panel.
The following shows how the level is displayed.
Tray condition
Empty
Near empty
Other statuses
(Including during lift-up and no tray conditions)
LED
ON
Blinking *1
OFF
bizhub 652/552/602/502
*1: LED turns OFF when Paper Remainder is set to Type 2: Service Mode System 1
Machine State LED Setting Paper Remainder.
Tray1 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/1)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A00JT2C269AA
16.3.5
Paper temperature detection control
Paper temperature is detected as the machine interior temperature detected at the paper
feed section by the paper temperature thermistor located in the paper feed section.
The machine interior temperature at the paper feed section is used as data for controlling
the fusing temperature during printing. For temperature control during printing, see the
fusing section.
Paper temperature thermistor (TH8)
A0P0T5C009DA
129

17.1 Configuration
17.1.1
Major components (tray3)

Horizontal transport section (upper section)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
A0P0T5C073DA
Tray3 paper feed section

A00JT2C300AA
130
17.1.2

bizhub 652/552/602/502
Major components (tray3 horizontal transport section)
A0P0T5C072DA
Horizontal transport
clutch (CL3)
Tray3 horizontal transport section
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Vertical transport motor (M26)
Horizontal
transport
roller 2
Transport motor (M25)

A0P0T5C011DA
Horizontal transport roller 1

Intermediate roller
131
bizhub 652/552/602/502

17.1.3
Major components (tray4)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A00JT2C276AA


A00JT2C294AA
132
17.1.4

bizhub 652/552/602/502

Timing roller
Timing roller sensor
(PS38)
OHP detect sensor
(PS40)
Tray1 vertical
transport roller
Tray2 vertical
transport roller
Horizontal transport sensor (PS29)

Tray3 transport roller
Intermediate roller
Intermediate roller sensor
(PS28)

A00JT2C227AA
133
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
17.2 Drive
17.2.1
Tray3
Tray3 transport clutch (CL6)


Tray3 take-up axis
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Coupling
A00JT2C301AA
17.2.2
Tray3
Tray3 horizontal transport
Horizontal transport clutch (CL3)

A0P0T5C091DA
134
Intermediate roller
17.2.3

bizhub 652/552/602/502

Tray4

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Coupling

A00JT2C295AA
Tray4
Tray4 take-up axis
135
bizhub 652/552/602/502
17.3 Operation
17.3.1
Up/down control
The same control procedure applies to tray3 and tray4.

A. Up operation
A lifting cable is connected to the paper lifting plate and the paper plate is held in the horizontal position by the take-up axis.
When the tray3(4) lift-up motor is energized, the take-up axis takes up the cable to
thereby raise the paper plate.
B. Down operation
When the tray is slid out of the machine, the coupling of the tray3(4) lift-up motor and the
take-up axis are disconnected from each other.
When the driving force of the tray3(4) lift-up motor is released from the hoisting axis, the
paper lifting plate starts lowering by its own weight.
Coupling
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Take-up axis
Paper lifting plate
A00JT2C305AA
136
C. Operation timing
(1) When the tray is slid in
When the tray is slid in, the drawer connector of tray3(4) is connected. The machine then
determines that the tray is slid in position.
The paper plate is lowering when the tray is slid out, so that the tray3(4) upper limit sensor is unblocked.
tray3(4) lift-up motor rotate to start the up operation of the paper lifting plate.
Control is provided to make sure that only one tray performs the up operation at one
time.
If the tray is slid out during the up operation of the paper lifting plate and accordingly the
tray3(4) drawer connector is disconnected, the machine determines that the tray has
been slid out and terminates the up operation of the paper lifting plate.
Actuator
Actuator
A0P0T5C012DA
Drawer connector
A0P0T5C013DA
Lifting completed
Tray set
Paper consumption
Tray3, Tray4 Drawer connector

Tray3, Tray4 upper limit sensor
Tray3, Tray4 Lift-up motor
4038T2C141AA
137
bizhub 652/552/602/502
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
(2) During printing

As paper is consumed, the pick-up roller gradually lowers and the tray3(4) upper limit
sensor is unblocked.
tray3(4) lift-up motor rotate to start the up operation of the paper plate.
The above operations are repeated, so that the pressure (paper feed pressure) of the
pick-up roller and paper are kept at a constant value at all times without being affected by
the amount of paper still available for use.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Actuator
Actuator
A00JT2C296AA
138
Paper Feed control
A. Pick-up control (tray3)

The transport motor is energized by the print start signal.
The tray3 paper feed clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of
As the tray3 paper feed clutch is energized, the driving force of the transport motor is
The paper feed roller transports the paper onto the tray3 transport roller.
The tray3 transport clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of time
after sending out the print start signal.
As the tray3 transport clutch is energized, the driving force of the transport motor is
transmitted to the tray3 transport roller. As a result, the tray3 transport roller transports a
sheet of paper onto the horizontal transport roller.
In consecutive printing, if the horizontal transport sensor has not detected the arrival of a
preceded paper, the tray3 transport roller will be stopped temporarily and the interval
between a preceded paper and a succeeding paper will be corrected.
The tray3 paper feed clutch and tray3 transport clutch is deenergized after the lapse of a
predetermined period of time after the tray3 paper feed sensor detects the leading edge
of the paper.
rotate.
139
bizhub 652/552/602/502
17.3.2
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
B. Pick-up control (tray4)

The transport motor is energized by the print start signal.
The tray4 paper feed clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of
As the tray4 paper feed clutch is energized, the driving force of the transport motor is
The paper feed roller transports the paper onto the tray4 vertical transport roller.
The tray4 paper feed clutch is deenergized after the lapse of a predetermined period of
time after the tray4 paper feed sensor detects the leading edge of the paper.
rotate.
Vertical transport
motor (M26)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Horizontal transport clutch (CL3)

Transport motor
(M25)
Intermediate roller
Intermediate transport roller
sensor (PS28)
Tray3 paper feed

clutch (CL5)
sensor (PS29)
roller 2
Tray3
transport
clutch (CL6)
Paper feed roller (tray4)
Pick-up roller
(tay3)
Paper separator
roller (tray4)

(tray3)
Pick-up roller (tray4)

Tray3 Paper feed sensor (PS21)
Paper feed roller (tray3)
Horizontal transport roller1

A0P0T5C034DA
140
C. Separation control
Paper feed roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Drive connecting gear
Pick-up roller
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Paper
A0P0T5C033DA
141
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
D. Horizontal transport control (tray3)

The transport motor is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after
the print start signal.
The horizontal transport clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of
time after the transport motor has been energized.
When the horizontal transport clutch is energized, the driving force of the transport motor
is transmitted to horizontal transport roller 1 and horizontal transport roller 2. The horizontal transport rollers 1 and 2 rotate to transport the paper onto the intermediate roller.
The horizontal transport sensor located downstream of the horizontal transport roller
along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper fed off from the tray3 transport roller.
The intermediate roller sensor located downstream of the intermediate roller along the
paper path detects the leading edge of the paper fed off from horizontal transport roller 2.
The horizontal transport clutch is deenergized after the lapse of a predetermined period
of time after the intermediate roller sensor has detected the leading edge of the paper.
If the horizontal transport sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper even
after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a paper
misfeed occurs at the horizontal transport section.
If the intermediate roller sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper even
misfeed occurs at the vertical transport section.
E. Paper feed deceleration control
If the spacing between the current and preceding sheets of paper taken up from tray3 is
narrow, the tray3 transport clutch is temporarily deenergized, thereby achieving an adequate spacing between the two sheets of paper.
If there is only a narrow spacing from the preceding sheet of paper when the current one
reaches the intermediate roller, the vertical transport motor is temporarily deenergized to
achieve an adequate spacing between the two sheets of paper.
142
F. Operation timing
(1) The tray3
Plain paper: OHP detection sensor ON
Thick paper: Timing roller sensor ON
* When there is no preceding paper
Start key ON
Timing motor ON
bizhub 652/552/602/502

Tray3 transport clutch (CL6)
Horizontal Transport clutch (CL3)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Horizontal transport sensor (PS29)

Intermediate roller sensor (PS28)
vertical transport motor (M26)
A2WUT2E003DA
143
bizhub 652/552/602/502
(2) The tray4

* When there is no preceding paper
Start key ON
Plain paper: OHP detection sensor ON

Thick paper: Timing roller sensor ON
Timing motor
ON

Intermediate roller sensor (PS28)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

A00JT2E527DA
G. Paper feed deceleration control

If a paper fed from the tray 3 has a narrow spacing with a preceded paper, the tray3
paper feed clutch is stopped temporarily to control to have a proper spacing between
papers.
If a paper has a narrow spacing with a preceded paper when the paper reached to the
intermediate roller, the vertical transport motor is stopped temporarily to control to have a
proper spacing between papers.
144
Tray3 and 4 dont have paper size detection function.

To set a different paper size, press keys as follows.
[Service mode] [System setting 2] [LCC size setting]
In accordance with the set paper size, change positions of the guide plates (end guide
plate, paper guide plate/front, and paper guide plate/rear).
A00JT2E533DA
Paper guide plate/ rear

End guide plate
Paper guide plate/ front
A00JT2C318AA
145
bizhub 652/552/602/502
17.3.3
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502

17.3.4
A. Paper near-empty detection

The tray3(4) near empty sensor detects a paper near-empty condition of the tray.
As the amount of paper becomes small during printing, the paper lifting plate is raised.
(See A. Up operation of 17.3.1 Up/down control.)
As the paper lifting plate is raised, the position of the near empty detection actuator provided at the paper lifting plate is raised.
When the near empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which it blocks the
tray3(4) near empty sensor, the machine detects a near-empty condition.
A near-empty condition is detected when the amount of paper still available for use
becomes about 50 30 sheets (about 50 sheets in terms of paper weighing 80 g/m2).
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A00JT2C306AA
B. Paper empty detection (tray3)

The tray3 paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition of the tray.
When the empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which it unblocks the tray3
paper empty sensor, the machine detects a paper empty condition.
Actuator
Tray3 paper empty sensor

(PS19)
A0P0T5C017DA
146
C. Paper empty detection (tray4)

The tray4 paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition of the tray.
When the empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which it blocks the tray4
paper empty sensor, the machine detects a paper empty condition.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
A0P0T5C018DA
D. Remaining paper detection

Paper supply level is detected by calculation of the paper remaining level based on the
time when the tray is lifted.
Plain paper is used as the reference of the calculation for the paper supply level.
When the thick paper is set, off set value is used to calculate the paper supply level.
Ex: When thick paper 2 is set, paper supply level is calculated as a half of the plain paper
level.
Lifting time is measured when the power is turned ON, save mode is released and a tray
is inserted.
Tray condition
Paper full
Paper near full
Paper remained
Paper supply level
100 to 66%
65 to 33%
33% to 51 sheets
Tray3 paper supply level
1500 to 1000 sheets
999 to 501 sheets
500 to 51 sheets
Tray4 paper supply level
1000 to 666 sheets
665 to 334 sheets
333 to 51 sheets
147
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Actuator
bizhub 652/552/602/502
E. Display of paper supply level

The amount of remaining paper is indicated by the LED on the right side of each tray and
by the screen of the control panel.
The following shows how the level is displayed.
Tray condition
Empty
Near empty
Other statuses
(Including during lift-up and no tray conditions)
LED
ON
Blinking *1
OFF
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

A00JT2C269AA
148
Dehumidification heater control
The machine has two dehumidification heaters mounted on its frame (except for the
North America and Europe area).
When energized, the dehumidification heater generates heat to prevent the paper stack
loaded in the tray from becoming damp.
The dehumidification heater is energized when the dehumidification heater switch
located on the lower part at the back of the main body is turned ON.
When the dehumidification heater switch is ON, the dehumidification heater is energized
as long as the K PC drum motor remains deenergized (in the standby state; for details,
see the table below).
While the K PC drum motor remains energized (during printing), the dehumidification
heater is deenergized to inhibit power consumption. (Photo conductor small amount rotation control is worked in standby. If the K PC drum motor are rotated in short time, the
dehumidification heater has no OFF/ON operation but hold ON status.)
K PC drum motor
For the photo conductor small

amount rotation*
ON
Halt
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Halt
OFF
OFF
Running
OFF
OFF
Running
OFF
*: For details, see Photo conductor section/Photo conductor small amount rotation control
Tray4 dehumidifier heater (DH2)
Tray3 dehumidifier heater (DH1)
A0P0T5C019DA
Dehumidifier heater transformer (T1)
Dehumidification heater switch

(SW2)
A00JT2C279AA
149
bizhub 652/552/602/502
17.3.5
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
17.3.6
Detection of tray3/4 slid out/in
The connection state of the drawer connection located in the rear of the tray determines
whether the tray3(4) is slid out or in.
When the tray3(4) is slid in, the tray3(4) drawer connector is connected and the machine
determines that the tray3(4) is slid in position.
When the tray3(4) is slid out, the tray3(4) drawer connector is disconnected and the
machine determines that the tray3(4) is slid out.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
A0P0T5C013DA
Tray4 drawer connector
150
Tray3 drawer connector
17.3.7
Detection of horizontal transport unit slid out/in
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
The horizontal transport sensor detects the horizontal transport unit that is being slid out
or in.
By sliding out the horizontal transport unit, the horizontal transport guide for clearing
paper misfeed from the horizontal transport unit can be opened.
There is no open/close mechanism provided for the horizontal transport guide. The horizontal transport unit cannot, however, be slid into the machine with the horizontal transport guide left opened.
Slide out tray4 and, holding onto the lever of the horizontal transport unit, withdraw the
horizontal transport unit. This moves the light blocking plate for unit position detection
provided for the horizontal transport unit to the front.
When the light blocking plate for unit position detection is moved to a position at which it
unblocks the horizontal transport sensor, the machine detects that the horizontal transport unit has been slid out.
When the horizontal transport unit is slid in, the light blocking plate for unit position detection blocks the horizontal transport sensor. The machine then detects that the horizontal
transport unit has been slid in.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Horizontal transport set sensor (PS58)
Light blocking plate for

unit position detection
A0P0T5C020DA
151
18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY)

18.1 Configuration
Paper side guide plate
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
A00JT2C274AA
Bypass sub tray
Bypass paper empty

sensor (PS34)
Bypass paper width

detection resistor (VR)
Bypass sub tray set
sensor (PS37)
Bypass paper
feed roller
Bypass set sensor

(PS30)
Paper lifting plate
A00JT2C282AA
Multi FD size sensor/2 (PS32)

152

bizhub 652/552/602/502
18.2 Drive
Bypass tray up down motor (M28)
Bypass paper lower sensor (PS36)
Bypass paper limit sensor (PS35)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper lifting plate
Bypass paper feed motor

(M27)
Bypass paper feed roller
Bypass tray separator roller

A00JT2C283AA
153
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
18.3 Operation
18.3.1
Bypass paper lifting motion control
A. Up operation
The bypass tray up down motor rotates forward to drive the lifting gear, which raises the
paper lifting plate to the paper feed position.
B. Down operation
The bypass tray up down motor rotates backward to drive the lifting gear, which lowers
the paper lifting plate to the standby position.
C. Operation timing
(1) Move to paper feed position (up)
When the bypass paper feeding starts, the bypass tray up and down motor makes a normal rotation to move the paper lifting plate up to the paper feeding position. When the
paper lifting plate is moved up, the bypass paper limit sensor turns ON to stops the
bypass tray up and down motor at the feeding position.
When the paper supply level goes down during paper feeding and the bypass paper limit
sensor turns OFF, the bypass tray motor rotates positively to move it up to the paper
feeding position.
(2) Move to standby position (down)
When there is no print request from the bypass tray and the paper fed from the bypass
tray turns OFF the exit sensor, the paper lifting plate is lowered.
Though other jobs are being processed, if the above conditions are met, the paper lifting
plate is lowered.
When the sensor detects the bypass paper empty at the feeding position, the paper lifting plate is moved to the standby position.
When paper jam occurs, the paper lifting plate stops at the paper feeding position. After
paper jam is resolved, the paper lifting plate moves to the standby position.
Bypass tray up down motor (M28)
Bypass paper lower limit sensor (PS36)

Bypass paper upper limit sensor (PS35)
Paper lifting plate
Bypass paper empty detection
154
A00JT2C285AA
Occurrence of the event that

moves to standby position
Standby
Paper feeding position
position
Start key ON
Normal rotation
Bypass tray up
down motor (M28)
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Inverse rotation

Bypass paper lower limit sensor (PS36)
A0P0T5E115DA
paper feed control
A. Pick-up control
The bypass tray up down motor is energized by the print start signal to raise the paper to
the paper feed position.
The bypass paper feed motor is energized after the paper has been raised to the paper
feed position.
As the bypass paper feed motor is energized, the driving force of the bypass paper feed
motor is transmitted to the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller. As a result, the pick-up
roller picks up a sheet of paper and transports it onto the paper feed roller.
The paper feed roller transports the paper onto the registration roller (timing roller).
The bypass paper feed motor is deenergized when the paper fed from the bypass tray is
fed out.
The bypass tray up down motor is energized to lower the paper down to the standby
position.
155
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
18.3.2
B. Separation control
Bypass paper feed motor
(M27)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Paper feed roller
Pick-up roller
Paper

Pick-up roller
Paper feed roller

A0P0T5C021DA
Start key ON
Paper feeding position
Bypass tray up
down motor (M28)
Finish the paper feeding
Normal rotation
Inverse rotation

Bypass paper feed motor (M27)
A0P0T5C035DA
156
18.3.3

The paper size in the main scanning direction is detected with 10-bit digital data detected
by the bypass paper width detection resistor.
Rotation of the gear provided for the paper side plate and the detection gear mounted on
the rotation shaft of the bypass paper width detection resistor results in the voltage
obtained from the bypass paper width detection resistor being varied.
bizhub 652/552/602/502

The size in the sub scanning direction is detected based on the combination of multi FD
size sensors 1 to 3 being unblocked and blocked.
The specific position of the paper length detection actuator determines whether each of
multi FD size sensors 1 to 3 is unblocked or blocked.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

A00JT2C264AA
Bypass paper width detection resistor (VR)
157
bizhub 652/552/602/502
C. Sheet size determination

Combination of the width of the main scanning and the length of the sub scanning will
decide a sheet size.
Metric area
Multi FD size
sensor/1
OFF
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
ON
ON
ON
Multi FD size
sensor/2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Multi FD size
sensor/3
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Bypass paper width detection

resistor
Paper detection size
Width (mm)
80 to less than 115
A6S
115 to 144 inclusive
B6S
A5
B5
A5S
169 to less than 196
B5S
A4S
11 81/2
A4
FLS*
81/2 14
B4
11 17
A3
12 18
*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for FLS.
220 x 330 mm, 8 13, 81/8 131/4, 81/4 13, 81/2 13
158
Inch area
Multi FD size
sensor/2
Multi FD size
sensor/3
Bypass paper width detection

resistor
Paper detection size
Width (mm)
80 to less than 115
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
A6S
B6S
51/2 81/2
71/4 101/2
51/2 81/2 S
71/4 101/2 S
81/2 11 S
81/2 11
A4
Foolscap*
81/2 14
B4
11 17
A3
12 18
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Multi FD size
sensor/1
bizhub 652/552/602/502
*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for Foolscap.
8 13, 81/8 131/4, 81/4 13, 81/2 13, 81/2 13
159
bizhub 652/552/602/502

18.3.4
A. Paper near-empty control

The bypass tray is not mounted with any near-empty detection mechanism.
B. Paper empty control
The bypass paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition in the bypass tray.
As the amount of paper in the bypass tray becomes small, the paper empty detection
actuator is raised.
When the paper empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which it unblocks the
bypass paper empty sensor, the machine detects a paper empty condition in the bypass
tray.
Paper empty is detected both at the standby and the paper feed positions.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
When there is no paper
When there is paper

Bypass paper empty sensor (PS34)
160
A00JT2C217AA
18.3.5
Detection of bypass unit opened/closed
The bypass unit is equipped with an open/close mechanism that facilitates misfeed clearing procedure and access to the tray1 paper feed part.
The bypass tray set sensor detects whether or not the bypass unit is opened or closed.
Pull the bypass unit release lever and open the bypass unit. This actuates the open/close
detection actuator provided at the bypass unit.
When the bypass unit is opened, the open/close detection actuator provided at the
bypass unit is actuated.
When the open/close detection actuator is moved to a position at which it unblocks the
bypass tray set sensor, the machine determines that the bypass unit has been opened.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Bypass unit
A00JT2C265AA
Bypass set sensor (PS30)
Lock tab
Lock tab
Release lever
Open/close detection actuator
Bypass set sensor (PS30)
Open/close detection actuator

A0P0T5C086DA
161
bizhub 652/552/602/502

18.3.6
Detection of bypass sub tray extended/retracted
The bypass sub tray set sensor prevents erroneous detection by multi FD size sensors 2
and 3 when the bypass sub tray is retracted.
The bypass tray set sensor detects whether or not the bypass sub tray is extended.
When the bypass sub tray is extended until the light blocking plate mounted on the
bypass sub tray unblocks the bypass tray set sensor, the machine determines that the
bypass sub tray has been extended.
When the bypass sub tray is in the fully retracted position, detection made by multi FD
size sensors 2 and 3 is not reflected.
Bypass sub tray set sensor
(PS37)
Bypass sub tray
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Multi FD size sensor/3

(PS33)
Multi FD size sensor/2
(PS32)
A00JT2C264AA
162
19. VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION

bizhub 652/552/602/502

19.1 Configuration
Timing roller
Registration motor
(M2)

Actuator
OHP detection sensor (PS40)
OHP detection sensor
(reflection unit) (PS40)
Tray1 vertical transport motor

(M5)
Tray1 paper
feed clutch
Paper feed motor
(CL1)
(M22)
Tray1 vertical
transport sensor
(PS4)
Tray2 paper
feed clutch
(CL2)
Tray2 vertical
transport motor
(M7)
Vertical transport
motor (M26)
Tray1 paper
feed roller
Tray1 paper
feed sensor
(PS5)
Tray2 vertical
transport
sensor (PS12)
Tray2 paper
feed sensor
(PS13)
Intermediate
roller
Intermediate
transport roller
sensor (PS28)
Horizontal
transport roller 2
clutch (CL3)
Transport motor
(M25)
Tray4 paper feed clutch

(CL7)
A0P0T5C022DA
Tray4 paper feed

sensor (PS26)
Horizontal transport sensor

(PS29)
Tray4 vertical
transport roller
163
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray1 vertical
transport roller
bizhub 652/552/602/502
19.2 Drive
Timing roller
Timing roller sensor

(PS38)
Tray1 paper feed

section

sensor (PS4)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray1 paper feed sensor

(PS5)
Paper feed motor (M22)

Tray2 paper feed
section
Tray1 vertical transport motor

(M5)
sensor (PS12)
(PS13)
Vertical transport motor

(M26)

motor (M7)
Intermediate roller
Horizontal transport sensor

(M29)
Tray3 horizontal
transport section
Intermediate transport
roller sensor (M28)
roller
(PS26)
Tray4 paper feed

section
A0P0T5C023DA
164
19.3 Operation
Vertical transport control
The vertical transport section transports paper fed from tray1, 2, 3, or 4 onto the registration section.
The paper fed from tray1 is transported onto the registration section by the tray 1 vertical
transport roller.
The paper fed from the bypass tray is transported onto the registration section by the tray
1 vertical transport roller.
The paper fed from tray2 is transported onto the registration section by the tray2 vertical
transport roller and the tray 1 vertical transport roller.
The paper fed from tray3 is transported onto the registration section by horizontal transport roller 1, horizontal transport roller 2, the intermediate roller, the tray2 vertical transport roller, and the tray 1 vertical transport roller.
The paper fed from tray4 is transported onto the registration section by the intermediate
roller, tray2 vertical transport roller, and the tray 1 vertical transport roller.
19.3.2
Transport motor control
A. Tray1 vertical transport motor

The tray1 vertical transport motor is connected to the tray1 vertical transport roller. When
the tray1 vertical transport motor is energized, the tray1 vertical transport roller is rotated.
B. Tray2 vertical transport motor
The tray2 vertical transport motor is connected to the tray2 vertical transport roller. When
the tray2 vertical transport motor is energized, the tray2 vertical transport roller is rotated.
C. Vertical transport motor
The vertical transport motor is connected to the intermediate roller and tray4 vertical
transport roller. When the vertical transport motor is energized, the intermediate roller
and tray4 vertical transport roller are rotated.
19.3.3
Operation timing
A. Tray1 vertical transport roller

The tray1 vertical transport roller starts rotating after the lapse of a predetermined period
of time after the print start signal.
The tray1 vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray1 vertical transport
roller along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper that has moved past the
tray1 vertical transport roller.
If the tray1 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper
even after the lapse of the predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a
If the tray1 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper
If the tray1 vertical transport sensor detects paper earlier than the predetermined time,
the vertical transport motor is decelerated to correct timing at which the paper reaches
the timing roller.
If the OHP detect sensor located upstream of the timing roller detects paper earlier than
the predetermined time, the vertical transport motor is decelerated to correct timing at
which the paper reaches the timing roller.
165
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
19.3.1
bizhub 652/552/602/502
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
B. Tray2 vertical transport roller

The tray2 vertical transport roller starts rotating after the lapse of a predetermined period
of time after the print start signal.
The tray2 vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray2 vertical transport
roller along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper that has moved past the
tray2 vertical transport roller.
If the tray2 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper
even after the lapse of the predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a
If the tray2 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper
If the tray2 vertical transport sensor detects paper earlier than the predetermined time,
the tray2 vertical transport motor is decelerated to correct timing at which the paper
reaches the timing roller.
If the OHP detect sensor located upstream of the timing roller detects paper earlier than
the predetermined time, the vertical transport motor is decelerated to correct timing at
which the paper reaches the timing roller.
C. Intermediate roller and tray4 vertical transport roller
The intermediate roller and the tray4 vertical transport roller start rotating after the lapse
of a predetermined period of time after the print start signal.
The tray4 paper feed sensor located upstream of the tray4 vertical transport roller along
the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper fed by the tray4 paper feed roller.
The intermediate roller sensor located upstream of the intermediate roller along the
paper path detects the leading edge of the paper that is about to advance onto the intermediate roller.
If the intermediate roller sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper fed off
from tray3 even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a paper misfeed occurs at the tray3/4 horizontal transport section.
If the intermediate roller sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper fed off
from tray4 even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a paper misfeed occurs at the tray3/4 intermediate roller section.
If the intermediate roller sensor is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper even
misfeed occurs at the tray3/4 intermediate roller section.
If the intermediate roller sensor detects paper earlier than the predetermined time, the
vertical transport motor is deenergized to halt paper transport temporarily and thereby
correct timing at which the paper reaches the timing roller.
166
20. REGISTRATION SECTION

bizhub 652/552/602/502

20.1 Configuration
2nd transfer roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Timing roller
A0P0T5C094DA
20.2 Drive
Timing roller

(PS40) (Reflection unit)
IDC registration sensor/F
(IDCS/F)

motor (M5)
Take-up motor (M22)

OHP detection
sensor (PS40)
(TEM/HUMS)
A2WUT2C067DA
167
bizhub 652/552/602/502
20.3 Operation
20.3.1
Registration control
The registration motor is connected to the timing roller. When the registration motor is
energized, therefore, the timing roller is rotated.
The paper will create a loop between the tray 1 vertical transport roller (or ADU transport
roller 4) and the timing roller when the paper is being conveyed in order to correct the
skew.
Timing roller is controlled in order to synchronize the timing the unit starts writing the
image and conveying paper.
The amount of the loop of the paper can be adjusted in the Service Mode - Machine Printer Reg. Loop Adj.. Changing the adjustment value will change the amount of loop in
the paper.
A. Operation
1. The paper is transported while the timing roller is stationary.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
A2WUT2C068DA
[1]
Timing roller (stopped)
[2]
[3]
Actuator
[4]
Paper
2. A paper loop is formed thus skew in the paper is corrected.
[1]
A2WUT2C069DA
[1]
168
Loop

bizhub 652/552/602/502

3. The timing roller rotates to transport the paper.
[1]
A2WUT2C070DA
Timing roller (rotated)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
Timing roller
(PS40)

(reflection unit)
Loop creating
Paper
A00JT2C222AA
169
bizhub 652/552/602/502

20.3.2
OHP detection
OHP detection sensor checks to prevent printing on the paper other than OHP.
OHP detection will be performed after paper made the loop at the timing roller. When the
OHP detection shows the different result from the setting on the control panel, printing
will stop to display Error.
Paper type set from
control panel
Results of OHP detection

sensor detection
OHP
Other than OHP
Other than OHP
OHP
Operation
Stops printing promptly based on the detection of paper type inconsistency.
[2]
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
A2WUT2C071DA
170
[1]
[2]
Reflection unit
[3]
LED remote
[4]
Sensor output
20.3.3
Paper transport speed control
It controls the timing the paper reaches to the timing roller sensor.
A. Operation
The tray1 vertical transport roller, the tray2 vertical transport roller and the intermediate
roller may speed up, slow down or stop temporarily during paper transportation in order
to adjust the paper interval.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Timing roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray1 vertical transport roller (Speed increase, speed

reduction, halt)
Tray2 vertical transport roller (Speed increase, speed

reduction, halt)
Intermediate roller (Speed increase, halt)
A00JT2C228AA
171
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION
21. FUSING SECTION

21.1 Configuration
IH coil unit
Heating roller
temperature
sensor/1 (TEMS/1)
A00JT2C271AA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Fusing unit
Heating roller
temperature
sensor/3 (TEMS/3)
Fusing unit (Periodically

replaced parts)
IH coil unit
(Fixed at the main body side)
Separator claw
Heating roller
temperature
sensor/2 (TEMS/2)
A0P0T5C075DA
Loop amount detection

sensor 1 (PS41),
sensor 2 (PS42)
Soaking roller thermistor/1 (TH2)

Soaking roller thermostat (TS2)
Soaking roller heater

lamp (FH2)
Soaking roller
Brush roller
IH coil (FH1)
Heating roller
Fusing pressure roller

A0P0T5C087DA
Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS/1)

(Fixed to the main body)
172
Heating roller thermistor/1 (TH1)

Heating roller thermostat (TS1)
21. FUSING SECTION
(1) Configuration of the temperature detector element of fusing unit

Heating roller temperature sensor/1
(TEMS/1)
Heating roller
rotation sensor/1
(PS57)
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Soaking roller thermostat (TS2)

sensor/2 (PS42)
sensor/1 (PS41)
Heating roller temperature

sensor/2 (TEMS/2)
Heating roller thermistor/1

(TH1)
IH coil/Main coil
(FH1)
Heating roller thermostat

(TS1)
IH coil/2nd demagnetization coil
(FH1): bizhub 652/602 only
A0P0T5C025DA
Pressure home sensor

(PS55)
Heating roller
temperature
sensor/3 (TEMS/3)
173
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
IH coil/1st
demagnetization
coil (FH1)
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION
21.2 Drive
21.2.1
Heating roller drive
[3]
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[2]
A2WUT2C005DA
[1]
Fusing motor (M30)
[3]
21.2.2
[2]
Heating roller
Fusing pressure roller pressure drive

[2]
[1]
[3]
[5]
[4]
A2WUT2C006DA
174
[1]
Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29)
[2]
Fusing retraction position sensor (PS59)
[3]
[4]
Pressure home sensor (PS55)
[5]
Heating roller
21. FUSING SECTION
21.3 Operation
21.3.1
Fusing speed correction
A. Roller speed control

In order to avoid fusing error, the rotation speed of heating roller/fusing pressure roller is
exchanged according to the paper type or the print mode.
Fusing speed is set to 80 mm/s during standby mode.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
(1) bizhub 652 fusing speed

Paper type
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2)
g/m2
to 90
Thick paper 1/1+ (91
g/m2
Plain paper (60
Fusing speed (mm/second)

310
g/m2)
+ Gloss mode
120
to 157
g/m2)
155
Thick paper 2/3/4 (158 g/m2 to 300 g/m2)

Postcard, Envelopes, Label sheet
120
(2) bizhub 552/502 fusing speed

Paper type
2
264
Plain paper (60 g/m to 90 g/m )

g/m2
to 90
Thick paper 1/1+ (91
g/m2
Plain paper (60
g/m2)
+ Gloss mode
120
to 157
g/m2)
132
g/m2
to 300
Thick paper 2/3/4 (158
g/m2)
120
OHP
(3) bizhub 602 fusing speed

Paper type
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2)
2

288
Plain paper (60 g/m to 90 g/m ) + Gloss mode
120
Thick paper 1/1+ (91 g/m2 to 157 g/m2)
155
g/m2
to 300
Thick paper 2/3/4 (158
g/m2)
120
OHP
175
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OHP
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION
B. Adjustment of paper loop amount

By creating a paper loop, the speed difference between the fusing and paper conveyance at 2nd transfer section will be adjusted. It prevents the double transferred image or
brush effect.
The fussing speed is controlled (speed up/speed down) according to the amount of
paper loop.
The loop amount detection sensor/1, /2 turns ON in different timing according to the loop
amount so that the loop amount can be detected in three stages.
sensor/1 (Front side)

sensor/2 (Rear side)
Unblocking
Unblocking
Blocking
Loop amount
Fusing speed
Unblocking
large
Speed-up (High speed)
Blocking
average
Speed-up (Low speed)
Blocking
small
Slowdown
[2]
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[9]
[8]
[4]
[10]
[5]
[7]
[7]
[6]
A2WUT2C072DA
176
[1]
[2]
Paper
[3]
Heating roller
[4]
Loop amount: small
[5]
Transfer belt
[6]
2nd transfer roller
[7]
Actuator
[8]
Loop amount: large
[9]
Loop amount detection sensor/1 (PS41)
[10]
Loop amount detection sensor/2 (PS42)

It starts controlling when the front-edge of the paper reaches to the predetermined position before the fusing pressure roller.
If the loop amount is large or average, the fusing speed is increased to reduce the
paper loop amount to an appropriate value.
If the loop amount is small, the fusing speed is decreased to increase the paper loop
amount to an appropriate value.
After the back-edge of the paper passes the 2nd transfer roller and a given period of time
has passed, the control will finish.
C. PPM control
PPM control, which allows for given paper transport intervals to reduce the number of
printed pages produced per minute, is performed to prevent fusing failure, faulty image,
or other related malfunctions from occurring due to decreased temperature at the center
of the heating roller and fusing pressure roller or increased temperature at edges of
these rollers.
The PPM control can reduce productivity to about 40 to 90% against the ordinary 100%.
Productivity of PPM control is determined according to the temperature of each sensor
and thermistor and the width of main scanning direction.
177
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION

21.3.2
Fusing pressure/retraction control
To ensure prolonged durability of the heating roller, the fusing pressure roller is retracted*
from the heating roller during any time other than printing. (The roller is, however,
retracted* during printing using envelopes.)
*: The fusing pressure roller does not completely retract but is slightly pressed to the
heating roller.
The fusing pressure retraction motor is turned forward or backward to press the fusing
pressure roller up against, and retract it from, the heating roller. When the motor rotates,
the sector gear will rotate to change the pressure condition of the fusing pressure roller.
(Firmly pressed Slightly pressed)
The pressure condition of the fusing pressure roller is detected by the pressure home
sensor. The retraction position is detected with pulse number of the fusing retraction
position sensor.
When there is no change in output of the fusing retraction position sensor even if the
given time has passed after the fusing pressure retraction motor started its rotation, it is
judged as abnormal spacing and Trouble code C3101: fusing roller separation failure
message appears.
Pressure operation (Firmly pressed)
Retraction operation (Slightly pressed)
Pressed by the
heating roller
A2WUT2C098DA
Sector gear
Heating roller
Fusing pressure
roller
A2WUT2C099DA
A. Pressure/retraction timing
Conditions
Warm-up
Retraction (Slightly pressed)
The fusing pressure roller is pressed against

the heating roller when the heating roller
reaches the predetermined temperature.
Pressure (Firmly pressed)
Standby
Printing
Pressure/retraction operation
The fusing pressure roller is slightly pressed

until the heating roller reaches the predetermined temperature.

For envelopes
For paper types other than envelopes

Pressure (Firmly pressed)
Power save mode ON
Heater OFF
178
Heating roller heating control
A. Heating control
The inside surface of the heating roller is formed with Ni layer.
The IH coil located beside the heating roller radiates magnetic flux to the heating roller
when energized.
The IH coil consists of two different types of coil: main coil and demagnetization coil.
The heating roller is heated by the main coil. The demagnetization coil controls the heating zone.
Ni layer of the heating roller is the magnetic conducting layer in which eddy current is
generated with magnetic flux.
The eddy current generated in the conducting layer produces joule heat to heat the heating roller.
The main coil is provided only on one side of the heating roller, so that the heating roller
generates heat from a local surface of the heating roller close to the main coil. The heating roller is therefore rotated to ensure that the entire periphery of the roller is heated to
an adequate temperature.
The heating roller temperature sensor/1, heating roller temperature sensor/2, and the
heating roller temperature sensor/3 measure the temperature of the heating roller.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[5]
[1]
A2WUT2C073DA
179
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21.3.3
21. FUSING SECTION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION
[1]
Heating roller
[2]
Ni layer
[3]
Surface section
[4]
IH coil (FH1)
[5]
Magnetic flux
B. Whole area heating control

During a print cycle, the heating roller is rotated and, at the same time, heated by the main
coil, so that the entire area of the heating roller can be heated to, and maintained at, a predetermined temperature.
C. Center heating switch control
The temperature on ends of the heating roller is measured with the heating roller sensor/
3.
When the temperature of ends of the heating roller exceeds a predetermined value during printing using paper of a small size or in the standby state, the demagnetization coil
comes into play in inhibiting heating of roller ends and only the center portion in the main
scan direction of the roller is heated.
When the demagnetization coil is energized, the demagnetization coil radiates magnetic
flux so as to cancel the magnetic flux radiated from the main coil. Canceling the magnetic
flux on the ends of the roller results in generation of heat on the roller ends being inhibited.
The heating roller of bizhub 652/602 is provided with two first demagnetization coils and
two second demagnetization coils, each provided on either side of the heating roller to
achieve even greater demagnetization effect.
The heating roller of bizhub 552/502 are provided with two first demagnetization coils,
one on either side of the heating roller.
Control is performed to turn ON or OFF each of these demagnetization coils according to
the paper width (CD: main scanning length) and the heating roller end temperature.
180
21. FUSING SECTION

bizhub 652/552/602/502
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
[3]
A2WUT2C074DA
[1]
Main coil
[2]
1st demagnetization coil
[3]
2nd demagnetization coil
[4]
bizhub 652/602
[5]
bizhub 552/502
181
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION
D. Detection of rotation of the heating roller

The heating roller is rotated while it is being heated to ensure that the entire periphery of
the roller reaches an adequate temperature.
The heating roller is driven by the fusing pressure roller that is pressed up against the
heating roller (the heating roller follows the rotation of the fusing pressure roller even
while it is slightly pressed).
If the heating roller does not rotate while the IH coil (main coil) is energized, the temperature of the entire periphery of the roller cannot be measured and thus proper temperature control cannot be provided. At this time, only the half surface of the heating roller is
heated. If the main coil is energized with the heating roller remaining stationary, the roller
can be damaged.
Rotation of the heating roller results in the cam gear being rotated. The rotation of the
cam gear, in turn, actuates the actuator of the heating roller rotation sensor/1 periodically.
As the heating roller rotation sensor/1 alternates between unblocked and blocked states
at regular intervals, the machine determines that the heating roller is rotating.
If the heating roller rotation sensor/1 remains unblocked or blocked for a predetermined
period of time during printing, the machine determines that a paper misfeed occurs at the
exit, displaying a corresponding message on the control panel.
If the heating roller rotation sensor/1 remains unblocked or blocked for a predetermined
period of time during a warm-up cycle, standby state, or any other timing than a print
cycle, the machine displays the trouble code C3102 fusing roller failure to turn on the
control panel.
182
21. FUSING SECTION

bizhub 652/552/602/502
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
A2WUT2C075DA
[1]
Cam gear
[2]
Heating roller rotation sensor/1 (PS57)
[3]
Heating roller
[4]
Actuator
183
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION

21.3.4
Heating control of the fusing pressure roller
A heater for heating is not provided inside the fusing pressure roller.
The fusing pressure roller has the soaking roller for heating the fusing pressure roller.
The soaking roller is pressed constantly to the fusing pressure roller.
The soaking roller is driven by the fusing pressure roller that is pressed up against the
soaking roller.
The soaking roller has hollow structure. Inside of the roller has the soaking roller heater
lamp.
The soaking roller heater lamp generates a heat after turning on electricity to heat the
soaking roller.
Heated soaking roller heats the fusing pressure roller.
Temperature of the soaking roller is measured by the soaking roller thermistor/1 and 2.
Soaking roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

Soaking roller heater lamp

(FH2)
Heating roller
A0P0T5C028DA
184
21.3.5
21. FUSING SECTION
Fusing temperature control
Fusing temperature control is performed to fuse toner image properly in the paper. The
surface temperatures of the heating roller and the soaking roller are detected. The power
of the IH coil is then varied and the soaking roller heater lamp in the soaking roller controlled to thereby maintain the surface temperatures of the rollers at appropriate levels.
A.
Temperature control chart

Sub-power
switch ON
Temperature
Warm-up completed
[1]
Enters sleep mode
Start key ON
[2]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Enters low power mode
[4]
[3]
[5]
[6]
Heating roller
Soaking roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Fusing pressure
roller
Time
[1]
Warm-up
[2]
[3]
Printing (plain)
[4]
Standby (normal operation)
[5]
Low power mode*
[6]
Sleep mode
A2WUT2E101DA
Controlled temperature at stand by

(normal operation)
*: The heating roller does not control a temperature because IH heater is OFF.
185
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION
B. IH coil temperature control

The IH coil is controlled to allow the heating roller temperature to fall within a predetermined range during warm-up, printing, and in the standby state.
Temperature of the heating roller is periodically measured with the temperature sensor,
and the temperature change (up/down) is monitored by comparing the current temperature with the previous value.
When the temperature in the heating roller goes up beyond the upper limit, IH coil is
deenergized.
When the temperature in the heating roller goes down under the upper limit, IH coil is reenergized.
Temperature change of heating roller
Temperature
check cycle
Temperature checked
Temperature
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Upper limit
Target
temperature
Lower limit
IH coil
(FH1)
ON
OFF
Time
A0P0T5C112DA
186
C. Temperature control during warm-up

The warm-up control is started as soon as the main power switch and the sub power
switch are turned ON.
If the fusing pressure roller presses the heating roller, the fusing pressure retraction
motor is energized to let the fusing pressure roller retract from the heating roller. (Slightly
pressed)
The fusing motor is energized and, using the driving force of the fusing motor, the fusing
pressure roller, soaking roller and heating roller are rotated.
The main coil is energized to heat the heating roller to the specified temperature value*1.
The soaking roller heater lamp is energized to heat the soaking roller. Heat of the soaking roller heater lamp is transferred onto the fusing pressure roller and heat it.
The soaking roller is heated to the specified temperature value*1.
When the temperature of the heating roller reaches the predetermined value, the fusing
pressure retraction motor is energized to let the fusing pressure roller press the heating
roller. (Firmly pressed)
When the temperatures of all rollers exceed the predetermined value, the print cycle can
now be started.
A print cycle is started if so requested. If there is no print request, the machine enters the
temperature control under standby.
(1) Warm-up time
Model
bizhub 652
bizhub 552
Warm-up time
30 sec. or less*4
bizhub 602
90 sec. or less*3
bizhub 502
60 sec. or less*4
*1:
Conditions
At room temperature 23C and rated voltage
For the period from a stable condition of the main
power switch turned ON and sub power switch
turned OFF to a condition of being ready to print following turning ON of the sub power switch
The temperature control is provided by varying the target temperature for each mode
according to the combination of the temperature of the soaking roller and the machine
interior absolute humidity*2 at the start of the warm-up cycle.
Mode
Condition at the start of warm-up

Soaking roller temperature
Machine interior absolute humidity
Low temperature
mode
Specified value or less
Dont care
High humidity
mode
Specified value or more
Normal mode
Less than specified value
*2
: Absolute humidity: water content contained as moisture in the air (1 m3) regardless of
the temperature
*3: 110 sec. or less when the optional finisher is installed
*4
: 70 sec. or less when the image stabilization is executed
Image stabilization operating condition:
The sub-power switch is turned ON after the lapse of 16 hours or more after the subpower switch has been turned OFF.
The sub-power switch is turned ON after the lapse of 8 hours or more after the subpower switch has been turned OFF and in an ambience of the machine interior relative humidity of 17% or less, or 69% or more.
187
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION
D. Temperature control in standby state

The machine enters the standby temperature control if no print requests are received
after the warm-up.
The standby temperature control ensures that the temperature of each roller in the
standby state is not decreased.
For a predetermined period of time after the machine has started to enter the standby
temperature control, control is provided with the target temperature of each of low temperature, normal, and high humidity modes.
The temperature is controlled by normal mode, after predetermined time from standby
control start.
E. Temperature control during printing
Temperature control is provided in order to keep optimum fusing performance with various factors, such as the type of paper, print mode, paper temperature*, use of paper of
small size, decreased temperature during paper passage, and warm-up carried out with
a cool fusing unit.
*: For paper temperature, the machine interior temperature at the paper feed section
detected by the paper temperature thermistor located in the paper feed section is used
as a data for controlling a fusing temperature.
[1]
A2WUT2C076DA
[1]
188
Paper temperature thermistor (TH8)
F. Temperature control under low power mode

Temperature control is provided, in which the main coil and demagnetization coil are
deenergized to suspend heating of the heating roller in order to reduce power consumption during the low power mode.
The soaking roller heater is controlled by lowering the target temperature of the soaking
roller from the temperature under printing or standby.
The fusing motor is deenergized to keep all rollers stationary.
In the low power mode, the soaking roller remains stationary while the temperature control of the soaking roller heater lamp is being provided. If the soaking roller is left to stand
under the abovementioned condition for a long time, the brush roller in contact with the
soaking roller is deformed and noise may occur when the roller is restarted. After the
machine has entered the low power mode, therefore, the soaking roller and the fusing
pressure roller are rotated at predetermined intervals to change the position of contact of
the brush roller with the soaking roller. The brush roller is thereby prevented from being
deformed.
The temperature control under the low power mode is performed so that the temperature
reaches the printable level within 30 sec. at most.
G. Temperature control in sleep mode
The main coil, demagnetization coil, and the soaking roller heater lamp are deenergized
to stop heating the heating roller and the fusing pressure roller, thereby reducing power
consumption in the sleep mode.
The fusing motor is also deenergized to keep all rollers stationary.
The rollers are not heated in the sleep mode and, as a result, the roller temperature may
be reduced down to room temperature. The machine may therefore require the period of
time equivalent to the warm-up time until the rollers reach the printable temperatures.
189
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION

21.3.6
Heating roller temperature sensor
A non-contact type thermopile is used for heating roller temperature sensor/1 (hereinafter referred to as temperature sensor). The temperature sensor detects the temperature of the heating roller through infrared rays and controls the roller temperature.
The temperature sensor is provided with a lens. For its structural reason, therefore, the
temperature sensor can be dirtied by dew condensation formed or foreign matter deposited on the lens.
The temperature sensor, if contaminated with dew drops or dirt on the lens, becomes
unable to detect the temperature accurately, since the contaminants blocks the infrared
rays that are otherwise detected by the sensor.
If temperature control is provided under such conditions, the temperature sensor detects
a temperature that is lower than the actual temperature of the heating roller. Then, the
heating roller temperature is controlled based on a temperature higher than the target
one.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[1]
[2]
190
[3]
[4]
A2WUT2C077DA
[1]
Heating roller temperature sensor
[2]

(TEMS/3)
[3]

(TEMS/1)
[4]

(TEMS/2)
21.3.7
21. FUSING SECTION
Heating roller temperature sensor condensation detection
A. Detection of condensation on the heating roller temperature sensor

The control of detection of condensation on the heating roller temperature sensor is to
determine degradation of detection accuracy of the temperature sensor caused by condensation or dirt.
When condensation on the temperature sensor is detected and the control is switched to
alternative temperature control, the machine displays the corresponding P code P-32
Heating roller temperature sensor/1 temperature detection failure on the control panel.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
(1) During warm-up

The difference in temperature between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and
that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 is equal to, or more than, a specified
value and that condition lasts for 1 sec. or more.
(2) In standby state
Within 30 sec. after the completion of the warm-up, the difference in temperature
between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and that detected by heating roller
temperature sensor/1 is equal to, or more than, a specified value and that condition lasts
for 1 sec. or more.
(3) During printing
During printing, the difference in temperature between that detected by heating roller
thermistor/1 and that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 is equal to, or more
than, a specified value and that condition lasts for 1 sec. or more.
191
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
B. Condensation detection conditions

When any of the following conditions is detected, the machine determines that the heating
roller temperature sensor/1 lens has condensation on it and starts the heating roller alternative temperature control. (For details, see 21.3.8 Heating roller alternative temperature
control.)
See P.192
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION

21.3.8
Heating roller alternative temperature control
A. Control start conditions

Temperature control for the heating roller is provided based on the temperature detected
by the heating roller temperature sensor/1.
If condensation on the heating roller temperature sensor is detected, the heating roller
temperature control is provided based on the temperature detected by the heating roller
thermistor/1, instead of that detected by the heating roller temperature sensor/1. This
control is referred to as the heating roller alternative temperature control.
When the control is switched to the alternative temperature control, the machine displays
the corresponding P code P-32 Heating roller temperature sensor/1 temperature detection failure on the control panel.
B. Control termination conditions
If the difference in temperature between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and
that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 becomes less than a specified value
during the alternative temperature control, the machine determines that condensation on
the heating roller temperature sensor/1 has been eliminated and resumes the temperature control based on the temperature detected by the heating roller temperature sensor/
1.
If the difference in temperature between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and
that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 is not improved even after the lapse
of 10 min. after the alternative temperature control has been initiated, the machine determines that the cause is not condensation, but contamination, on the lens and terminates
the heating roller alternative temperature control.
C. Print job during the alternative temperature control
If a print job is received during the heating roller alternative temperature control, control
is performed according to the settings made in Enhunced Security of Service Mode.
Reference: Service Mode Enhunced Security Engine FW DipSW Switch No. 4
Fusing unit alternative temperature control
If OFF is selected, the machine disables any print job during the alternative temperature control.
If ON is selected, the machine enables a print job during the alternative temperature
control.
The print job during the alternative temperature control is processed at 50% productivity.
The default setting is OFF.
21.3.9
Heating roller temperature sensor contamination detection control
A. Detection of contamination on the heating roller temperature sensor

The control of detection of contamination on the heating roller temperature sensor (here
in after referred to as contamination detection control) is to determine degradation of
detection accuracy of the heating roller temperature sensor/1 caused by contamination.
The contamination detection control is performed only in the standby state. No control is
provided during the alternative temperature control initiated by condensation of the temperature sensor.
If contamination of the lens of the heating roller temperature sensor/1 is detected, the
machine displays the corresponding trouble code C-392A Fusing sensor contamination
(NC sensor) on the control panel. It then shuts down the circuit to the main coil and
soaking roller heater lamp and terminates fusing unit temperature control.
192
B. Contamination detection conditions

(1) Control start conditions
The contamination detection control is started if, at any timing 30 sec. or more after the
completion of the warm-up, the difference in temperature between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 is equal
to, or more than, a specified value and that condition lasts for 1 sec. or more.
(2) Control termination conditions
The contamination detection control is terminated if, at any timing within 10 min. after the
contamination detection control has been started, the difference in temperature between
that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 is equal to, or less than, a specified value.
The contamination detection control is terminated if the machine enters any mode other
than the current one, including the warm-up as initiated by the start of a print cycle or
restart, or the low power mode.
(3) Criteria for contamination
If, after the start of the contamination detection control, the difference in temperature
between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and that detected by heating roller
temperature sensor/1 is equal to, or more than, a specified value and that condition lasts
for 10 min. or more, the machine determines that the heating roller temperature sensor/1
lens is contaminated and displays the corresponding trouble code.
21.3.10
Protection against abnormal temperature
The machine provides protection against abnormally high temperature of the fusing unit
in the following three steps.
A. Soft protection
When the temperature higher than the control range at each roller is detected more than
1 second, the temperature is judged to be abnormally high, and the trouble code
appears.
When the trouble code is displayed, printing will be prohibited.
Roller name
Heating roller
Soaking roller
Sensor name: code
Detected
temperature
(Degrees
centigrade)
Trouble code

sensor/1: TEMS/1
225
C3725
Fusing abnormally high

temperature detection_
NC sensor

sensor/2: TEMS/2
225
C3721

Center of the heating roller

sensor/3: TEMS/3
225
C3722

Edge of the heating roller
Soaking roller thermistor/1:

TH2
185
C3724

Soaking side
193
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION
B. Hard protection
Next level is provided when the first level (soft protection) cannot detect due to CPU overrun.
The heater relay, through the printer control board, is turned OFF in the second level
(hard protection) operation to block the power supply to the IH coil and soaking roller
heater lamp.
When the controlled temperature of each roller is detected higher than the predetermined value, the temperature is judged to be abnormally high, and the trouble code
appears.
Through these control procedures, the power supply to the IH coil and soaking roller
heater lamp can be shut down before the thermostat is activated in the third level (overheat protection). It thereby suppresses damage to the fusing unit itself.
Roller name
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Sensor name: code
Detected
temperature
(Degrees
centigrade)
Heating roller thermistor/1:

TH1
195

Heating roller sensor/2: TEMS/2
260

sensor/3: TEMS/3
Soaking roller thermistor/2:
TH3
Soaking roller
Trouble code
C3721

260
C3722

185
C3724

Soaking side
C. Overheat protection
If the abnormal high temperature of soft protection/hard protection cannot be detected
due to a faulty temperature sensor or thermistor, thermostat blocks the power supply to
each heater lamp.
The thermostat rating is 210 degrees centigrade for both the heating roller thermostat
and the soaking roller thermostat. The ratings do not, represent the actual surface temperature of the corresponding rollers, since the thermostats are installed in a non-contact
with respect to each of the rollers.
21.3.11
Sensor disconnection detection control
If the temperature sensor/thermistor fails to reach the specified temperature in the given
period after the warm-up started, the sensor is judged to have disconnection, and the
trouble code will appear.
Roller name
Heating roller
Sensor name: code

C3925
Fusing sensor wire breaks detection_

NC sensor
Heating roller temperature sensor/2:

TEMS/2
C3921


TEMS/3
C3922

C3924

Soaking side
Soaking roller Soaking roller thermistor/1: TH2
194
Trouble code

TEMS/1
21.3.12
21. FUSING SECTION
Brandnew detection
The fusing unit is not provided with a new unit detection function.
When the fusing unit is replaced with a new one, the counter must be reset to zero using
the function of New Release of the Service Mode.
Reference: Service Mode Counter Life New Release
21.3.13
Fusing cooling control

[1]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[2]
[3]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
A2WUT2C078DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
195
bizhub 652/552/602/502
21. FUSING SECTION
A. Cooling of the IH coil unit

The machine is provided with the cooling fan motor for cooling the IH coil that heats the
heating roller and heat accumulated in and around the toner cartridge/K.
Outside air is drawn into the inside of the machine through its backside and is blown
through a ventilation duct against the IH coil unit to let it cool down. The areas around the
toner cartridge/K is also cooled as the air flows through the ventilation duct.
Heated air flowing through the IH coil unit is discharged through the slit in the upper surface of the unit. It is then discharged to the outside of the machine by way of the exit section.
[1]
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[3]
[4]
A2WUT2C079DA
196
[1]
Outside air
[2]
[3]
Ventilation duct
[4]
IH coil (FH1)
21. FUSING SECTION
B. Cooling of the fusing unit

The machine is provided with the fusing cooling fan motor/1, paper cooling fan motor and
fusing cooling fan motor/3 for cooling the fusing unit and the paper after the fusing process and drawing smell of the fusing section.
Outside air is drawn into the inside the machine and heated air in and around the fusing
unit is drawn and discharged to the outside of the machine through the ventilation duct.
Outside air is drawn into the inside of the machine through the upper surface of the exit
section and is blown against the paper being transported through the exit section to let it
cool down. It also cools the machine interior near the fusing section. The heated air is
discharged to the outside of the machine through the exit section.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[2]
[3]
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[5]
[4]
A2WUT2C080DA
[1]
Discharge air
[2]
[3]
Outside air
[4]
[5]
197
bizhub 652/552/602/502
22. DUPLEX SECTION
22. DUPLEX SECTION

22.1 Configuration
A0P0T5C076DA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A00JT2C275AA
ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47)
ADU door sensor (PS49)
ADU paper passage sensor/2

(PS48)
A00JT2C291AA
198
22. DUPLEX SECTION

bizhub 652/552/602/502
22.2 Drive
ADU transport motor/1

(M31)
ADU transport motor/2

(M32)
A00JT2C291AA
199
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
22. DUPLEX SECTION
22.3 Operation
22.3.1
Paper conveyance control
Paper transported from the paper exit section is conveyed to the internal duplex section
by the ADU transport roller 1 and 2.
Paper is conveyed to the vertical conveyance section by the ADU transport roller 3 and 4
to re-transport the paper.
Paper exit section
Stop position 1
Switchback roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
ADU paper passage sensor/1

(PS47)
Fusing section
Stop position 2
Registration
section
Duplex section
Timing roller
Stop position 3
A00JT2C245AA
A. Transport roller control

ADU transport roller 1 and ADU transport roller 2 are connected to ADU transport motor/
1. When ADU transport motor/1 is energized, these rollers start rotating to transport
paper.
ADU transport roller 3 and ADU transport roller 4 are connected to ADU transport motor/
2. When ADU transport motor/2 is energized, these rollers start rotating to transport
paper.
200
B. Paper entrance control

The switchback motor at the paper exit section is deenergized to stop transport of the
paper temporarily (stop position 1). The switchback motor thereafter rotates backward to
transport the paper into the duplex section.
When the switchback motor is deenergized, ADU transport motor/1 is energized and
ADU transport roller 1 and ADU transport roller 2 start rotating.
ADU transport roller 1 transports the paper transported from the paper exit section onto
ADU transport roller 2.
ADU paper passage sensor/1 located downstream of ADU transport roller 2 along the
paper path detects the leading edge of the paper transported from ADU transport roller
1.
If there is, before the current sheet of paper, another sheet of paper being transported
through the duplex part and if that particular sheet of paper is yet to reach the specified
position before the timing roller, ADU transport motor/1 is deenergized to stop the sheet
of paper temporarily (stop position 2).
When the advanced sheet of paper moves past the specified position, ADU transport
motor/1 is energized to resume the transport of paper.
The paper is transported from ADU transport roller 2 to ADU transport roller 3.
If ADU paper passage sensor/1 is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper even
after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after it has detected the leading edge of
the paper, the machine determines that a paper misfeed occurs at the duplex transport
part.
If ADU paper passage sensor/2 is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper even
after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after ADU paper passage sensor/1 has
detected the leading edge of the paper, the machine determines that a paper misfeed
occurs at the duplex transport part.
C. Duplex paper feed control
When the leading edge of the paper reaches the specified position, ADU transport
motor/2 is energized and ADU transport roller 3 and ADU transport roller 4 start rotating.
ADU transport roller 3 transports paper transported from ADU transport roller 2 onto
ADU transport roller 4.
ADU paper passage sensor/2 located downstream of ADU transport roller 4 along the
paper path detects the leading edge of the paper transported from ADU transport roller
3.
When the paper moves past ADU transport roller 4 and reaches the specified position,
ADU transport motor/2 is deenergized to stop the transport of the paper temporarily (stop
position 3). If, in this case, the paper has a length of 217 mm or more in the sub scanning
direction, ADU transport motor/1 is also deenergized.
At predetermined paper feed timing, ADU transport motor/2 is energized to resume the
transport of the paper. ADU transport motor/1 is also energized if it has been deenergized.
The paper is fed from ADU transport roller 4 onto the timing roller at the vertical transport
part.
If ADU paper passage sensor/2 is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper even
after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after ADU paper passage sensor/1 has
detected the leading edge of the paper, the machine determines that a paper misfeed
occurs at the duplex transport part.
201
bizhub 652/552/602/502
22. DUPLEX SECTION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
22. DUPLEX SECTION

22.3.2
Duplex circulation control
The duplex circulation control is performed differently according to the sub scanning
direction length of the paper.
Sub scanning direction paper length
Lower limit
Duplex circulation control
Upper limit
433 mm or more
Less than 459 mm
217 mm or more
Less than 433 mm
One-sheet circulation operation

Two-sheet circulation operation
Less than 217 mm
Three-sheet circulation operation
A. One-sheet circulation operation

Operation 1
One sheet of paper is supplied and the image of the second page is printed.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A00JT2C236AA
Operation 2
After the paper transported to the paper exit part stops at
the stop position 1, the switchback roller turns around to
send the sheet to the duplex part (paper reversed).
Stop position 1
A00JT2C237AA
Operation 3
The paper transported to the duplex part is transported to
the stop position 3 (ADU transport roller 4) faster than the
system speed.
It stops at the stop position 3 (ADU transport roller 4).
Stop position 3
A00JT2C238AA
202
22. DUPLEX SECTION

bizhub 652/552/602/502

Operation 4
The image of the first page is printed on the paper re-supplied from the duplex section.
A00JT2C239AA
2
1
A00JT2C240AA
Steps 2 through 5 are repeated.

One A4-size original for 2-sided
printing
Instruction form the

optimal paper position
Stop before re-supply

of paper

Exhaust sensor (PS39)
Gate switch solenoid (SD)
Exit motor (M4)
Normal rotation
Switchback motor (M33)
Inverse rotation
ADU transport motor/1 (M31)
A0P0T5E116DA
203
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Operation 5
The first sheet of the paper is fed out.
The image of fourth page is printed on the second sheet.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
22. DUPLEX SECTION
B. Two-sheet circulation operation

Operation 1
The first sheet of paper is supplied and the image of the
second page is printed.
2
A00JT2C236AA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Operation 2
The first sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit section and transported onto the duplex section.
The second sheet of paper is supplied.
A00JT2C242AA
Operation 3
The first sheet of the paper is sent trough the duplex section and stops at the stop position 3 (ADU transport roller
4).
The image of the fourth page is printed on the second
sheet of paper.
4
2
A00JT2C243AA
Operation 4
The first sheet of the paper is re-supplied and an image of
the first page is printed on.
The second sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit
part and transported onto the duplex section.
The third sheet of paper is supplied.
2
4
6
A00JT2C244AA
204
22. DUPLEX SECTION
Operation 5
The first sheet of paper is fed out.
The second sheet of paper waits at stop position3 (ADU
transport roller 4).
The image of the sixth page is printed on the third sheet of
paper.
2
1
bizhub 652/552/602/502
A00JT2C246AA
Operation 6
The second sheet of the paper is re-supplied.
The third sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit section and transported onto the duplex part.
6
2
4
A00JT2C247AA
Operation 7
The image of the third page is printed on the second sheet
of paper.
The third sheet of paper is transported in the duplex section.
The fourth sheet of paper is supplied.
1
6
A00JT2C248AA
Operation 8
The second sheet of the paper is fed out.
The third sheet of the paper waits at stop position 3 (ADU
transport roller 4).
The image of eighth page is printed on the fourth sheet of
the paper.
4
3 2
1
8
A00JT2C249AA
205
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
22. DUPLEX SECTION
C. Three-sheet circulation operation

Operation 1
The first sheet of paper is supplied and the image of the
second page is printed.
2
A0P0T5C040DA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Operation 2
The first sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit section
and transported onto the duplex section.
The second sheet of paper is supplied and the image of the
fourth page is printed.
The third sheet of paper is supplied.
A0P0T5C041DA
Operation 3
The first sheet of the paper is transported onto, and stopped
at, stop position 3 (ADU transport roller part).
The second sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit section and transported onto the duplex part.
The image of the sixth page is printed on the third sheet of
paper.
A0P0T5C042DA
Operation 4
The first sheet of paper is transported onto the vertical
transport section.
The second sheet of paper is transported into the duplex
section.
The third sheet of paper is transported onto the paper exit
section.
A0P0T5C043DA
Operation 5
The first sheet of paper is re-supplied and the image of the
first page is printed on it.
The second sheet of the paper is transported onto, and
stopped at stop position 3 (ADU transport roller 4).
The third sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit part
and transported onto the duplex section.
The fourth sheet of paper is supplied.
6
1
A0P0T5C044DA
206
22. DUPLEX SECTION
Operation 6
The first sheet of paper is fed out.
The second sheet of paper waits at stop position 3.
The third sheet of the paper is transported onto, and
stopped at, stop position 2 (ADU transport roller 2).
The image of the eighth page is printed on the fourth sheet
of paper.
1
4
bizhub 652/552/602/502
A00JT2C253AA
8
4
A0P0T5C045DA
Operation 8
The image of the third page is printed on the second sheet
of paper.
The third sheet of the paper is transported onto, and
stopped at, stop position 3 (ADU transport roller 4).
The fourth sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit section and transported onto the duplex section.
The fifth sheet of paper is supplied.
8
2
1
3
A2WUT2C102DA
Operation 9
The second sheet of paper is fed out.
The third sheet of paper waits at stop position 3 (ADU transport roller 4).
The fourth sheet of the paper is transported onto, and
stopped at stop position 2 (ADU transport roller 2).
The image of the tenth page is printed on the fifth sheet of
paper.
4
3 2
10
1
6
A0P0T5C047DA
Operation 10
The third sheet of paper is transported onto the vertical
transport section.
The fourth sheet of paper is transported onto the duplex
section.
The fifth sheet of paper is transported onto the paper exit
section.
4
3 2
10
1
6
A0P0T5C048DA
207
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Operation 7
The second sheet of paper is transported onto the vertical
transport section.
The third sheet of paper is transported into the duplex section.
The fourth sheet of paper is transported onto the paper exit
section.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
23. PAPER EXIT SECTION

23.1 Configuration
Switchback paper exit section
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A00JT2C280AA
Paper exit section
Switchback roller
Paper exit sensor

(PS39)
Paper exit roller 2

A00JT2C309AA
Paper exit switch gate
208
Paper exit roller 1

bizhub 652/552/602/502
23.2 Drive
The paper exit and switchback roller are driven by the exclusive motor.
Switchback Motor (M33)

Paper exit motor (M4)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Switchback roller
A00JT2C310AA
Paper exit roller 2
209
bizhub 652/552/602/502
23.3 Operation
23.3.1
Transport control
The paper exit section feeds the paper transported from the fusing section out onto the
exit tray using paper exit roller 1 and paper exit roller 2.
In the 2-sided print mode, the paper that has undergone the first print cycle is transported onto the switchback roller by changing the paper path after it has moved past
paper exit roller 1. The paper is transported onto the duplex section. The second print
cycle is thereafter completed and the paper is fed from the fusing section and out onto
the exit tray by paper exit roller 1 and paper exit roller 2.
If the machine is equipped with a finisher or other optional unit, the paper fed from the
fusing section is transported onto the optional unit by paper exit roller 1 and paper exit
roller 2.
A. Paper transport path
Switchback roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper exit section
Paper exit switch gate
Switchback position
When the exit part are

transported
2-sided transport
Paper exit
Duplex section
Paper exit roller 2
Fusing
section
When the switchback

are transported
Paper exit sensor (PS39)
Paper exit roller 1
A00JT2C235AA
210
B. Paper exit control

The paper exit roller 1 is connected to the fusing motor. When the fusing motor is energized, the paper exit roller 1 is synchronized with the fusing roller and the roller 1 starts
rolling.
The paper exit roller 2 is connected to the paper exit motor. When the paper exit motor is
energized, the paper exit roller 2 starts rolling.
When the paper transported from the fusing section reaches a specified position, the exit
motor is energized and the paper exit roller 2 starts rotating.
Paper exit roller 1 transports the paper onto the paper exit switch gate.
The paper exit sensor located downstream of paper exit roller 1 along the paper path
detects the leading edge of the paper that has moved past paper exit roller 1.
The paper is guided onto paper exit roller 2 by the paper exit switch gate in its upper
position (the paper exit switch gate is in its upper position in the initial state).
Paper exit roller 2 feeds the paper out onto the exit tray outside the machine.
detects the trailing edge of the paper that has moved past paper exit roller 1.
If the paper exit sensor is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper even after the
lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a paper misfeed
occurs at the fusing section.
C. Switchback control
The switchback roller 1 is connected to the switchback motor. When the switchback
motor rotates forward, the switchback rollers rotate forward; when the switchback motor
rotates backward, the switchback rollers rotate backward.
The paper exit switch gate is connected to the gate switch solenoid. When the gate
switch solenoid is energized, the paper exit switch gate is swung down to its lower position (at which paper is transported toward the paper feed section).
When the paper transported from the fusing section reaches a specified position, the
paper exit motor is energized and the paper exit roller 2 start rotating.
When the paper reaches the specified position, the switchback motor rotates forward and
the paper exit rollers start rotating forward.
Paper exit roller 1 transports the paper toward the paper exit switch gate.
detects the leading edge of the paper that has moved past paper exit roller 1.
When the paper reaches a specified position, the gate switch solenoid is energized to
swing down the paper exit switch gate to the lower position (at which paper is transported
toward the paper feed section).
The paper exit switch gate swung into its lower position guides the paper toward the
switchback roller.
detects the trailing edge of the paper that has moved past paper exit roller 1.
If the exhaust sensor is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper even after the
lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a paper misfeed
occurs at the fusing section.
When the paper reaches a specified position, the switchback motor is deenergized and
then the switchback rollers start rotating backward.
The switchback rollers rotate backward to transport the paper into the duplex section.
211
bizhub 652/552/602/502
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502

Instruction form the
optimal paper position
Switchback motor
turns around
Fusing motor (M30)

Exhaust sensor (PS39)
Gate switch solenoid (SD)
Nomal rotation
Switchback motor (M33)
Inverse rotation
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A00JT2E531DA
212
24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL

24.1 Overview
The following controls are performed to ensure stabilized print image. We call this control
method image stabilization control.
Control
Purpose
IDC sensor adjustment control

Dmax density adjustment control To stabilize image density
LD intensity adjustment control
To stabilize gradation
Gamma correction control
Sensor
bizhub 652/552/602/502
IDC sensor
To stabilize toner density
TCR sensor
1st transfer output control

2nd transfer output control
(ATVC)
To stabilize image transfer
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
TCR sensor/K automatic adjustment control

Toner replenishing control
213
24.1.1
Image stabilization control chart
Toner supply motor
2nd transfer roller
PC
drum/
K
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
TCR sensor
Developing bias Vdc
Grid voltage Vg
Toner replenishing
control
Image density
Gradation control
Gamma correction data
Gradation correction table
IDC sensor
Transfer ATVC control

OUT/IN
To be set on control panel
D MAX density
Background voltage margin
ATDC toner supply
Temperature/
humidity sensor
IN
OUT
A2WUT2E094DA
214
24.1.2
Overview of each control
A. IDC sensor adjustment control

Inhibits changes in characteristics of the signal detected by the IDC sensor that occur
due to changes in different functions achieved by the IDC sensor and transfer belt
(part-to-part variations, change in interior temperature/humidity, wear of parts used over
time, and deterioration resulting from use over time).
The intensity of the LED light-emitting section is corrected such that the output value of
the IDC sensor photo receiver is constant on the surface of the transfer belt, on which no
toner sticks.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
C. LD (laser diode) intensity adjustment control

Inhibits changes in reproducibility of fine lines and void areas that occur due to changes
in different functions achieved by the photo conductor electrostatic characteristics,
developing characteristics, and image transfer characteristics (part-to-part variations,
change in interior temperature/humidity, wear of parts used over time, and deterioration
resulting from use over time).
A detection pattern of a toner image is produced on the surface of the transfer belt with a
laser beam (LD1/LD2) at a predetermined LD intensity emitted from the PH unit and the
output value of the IDC sensor photo receiver is detected.
LD intensity (LD1/LD2) is corrected from the detected IDC sensor output data.
D. Gamma correction control
Inhibits changes in gradation characteristics that occur due to changes in different functions achieved by the photo conductor electrostatic characteristics and developing
characteristics (part-to-part variations, change in interior temperature/humidity, wear of
parts used over time, and deterioration resulting from use over time).
A gradation pattern of a toner image is produced on the surface of the transfer belt and
gradation characteristics of the pattern are detected by the IDC sensor. From the data
detected by the sensor, gamma correction data is calculated for printing linear gradations
and the LD intensity of the laser beam emitted from the PH unit is corrected to an optimum value.
E. TCR control
Part-to-part variations are corrected using the TCR sensor of the new developing unit.
A new developing unit is loaded with fresh developer. Toner and carrier in the developer
are mixed together at a predetermined ratio (mixing ratio of toner and carrier: T/C ratio).
The TCR sensor is automatically adjusted so as to detect a predetermined value for its
output with the fresh developer.
The TCR control is performed only when the developing unit is replaced with a new one.
215
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
B. Dmax density adjustment control

Inhibits changes in the print image density that occur due to changes in different functions achieved by the developing characteristics and photo conductor electrostatic
characteristics (part-to-part variations, change in interior temperature/humidity, wear of
parts used over time, and deterioration resulting from use over time).
Patterns are produced on the surface of the transfer belt and the IDC sensor detects the
amount of toner sticking to them. The developing bias (Vdc) and grid voltage (Vg) are
corrected.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
F. Toner replenishing control

The toner replenishing amount is determined and supplied based on data detected by
the TCR sensor and print information to thereby inhibit the T/C ratio from fluctuating due
to toner being consumed during the print cycle.
Toner replenishing control is performed at regular intervals while the K developing motor
is being energized.
G. 1st transfer output control
Sets the 1st transfer current that is optimum for transferring toner image on the photo
conductor onto the transfer belt when the toner image is to be formed on the transfer belt.
The 1st transfer current is determined according to the process speed and machine
interior temperature/humidity.
The 1st transfer output control is performed each time a toner image is to be formed on
the surface of the transfer belt.
H. 2nd transfer output control (ATVC control)
Inhibits changes in 2nd transfer characteristics that occur due to changes in different
functions achieved by the transfer belt unit and 2nd transfer roller (part-to-part variations, change in interior temperature/humidity, wear of parts used over time, and deterioration caused by use over time).
A constant current is passed through the 2nd transfer roller and the resultant voltage is
measured. The measured voltage is corrected to calculate the 2nd transfer output voltage.
The ATVC control is performed under any of the following conditions:
- Sub-power switch is turned ON.
- A predetermined range of change is detected in temperature/humidity from the temperature/humidity detected during performance of the preceding ATVC control.
- The preceding ATVC control has not been normally terminated.
216
24.2 Image stabilization control operation sequence

The following four types of modes are available for the image stabilization control.
Each mode is executed in the specified sequence.
Image stabilization control mode
Sequence
Mode 1
(New/Unit replacement/Initialize +
image stabilization
control)
Mode 2
(Initialize + image
stabilization control)
IDC sensor adjustment
Mode 3
Mode 4
(Normal image stabi- (Simplified image stalization control)
bilization control)
Dmax density adjust- Dmax density adjust- Dmax density adjust- Dmax density adjustment
ment
ment
ment
LD light intensity
adjustment
Dmax density adjust- Dmax density adjustGamma correction*

ment
ment
Not executed
LD light intensity
adjustment
LD light intensity
adjustment
Not executed
Not executed
Gamma correction
Gamma correction
Not executed
Not executed
LD light intensity
adjustment
LD light intensity
adjustment
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Not executed
*: If data after the gamma correction exceeds a predetermined value when gamma correction of mode 3 is executed, mode 3 is selected and the gamma correction is executed in
the next image stabilization control mode even if conditions specify execution of mode 4.
If conditions specify execution of modes 1/2, modes 1/2 are executed.
217
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
24.3 Image stabilization control operating condition

When the operating condition for each image stabilization control is met, the image stabilization control is performed in the mode that complies with the operating condition.
24.3.1
In standby state

mode
Mode 1
(New/Unit replacement/Initialize + image stabilization
control)
Operating condition
Transfer belt is replaced with a new one

Imaging unit/K is removed and reinstalled
Imaging unit/K is replaced with a new one
Drum unit/K is replaced with a new one
Developing unit/K is replaced with a new one
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Mode 2
(Initialize + image stabiliza- Initialize + Image Stabilization is selected in the Service Mode
tion control)
A change in temperature/humidity of a predetermined value is
detected since the performance of the preceding image stabilization
control sequence
A period of 24 hours or more elapses since the performance of the
preceding image stabilization control sequence
The sub-power switch is turned ON after the lapse of 16 hours or more
Mode 3
after the sub-power switch has been turned OFF
(Normal image stabilization
The sub-power switch is turned ON after the lapse of 8 hours or more
control)
after the sub-power switch has been turned OFF and in an ambience
of the machine interior relative humidity of 17% or less, or 69% or
more
P code P-5 (IDC sensor failure) or P-9 (Drum/Development unit (K)
failure) is detected
Stabilization Only is selected in the Service Mode
Mode 4
(Simplified image stabilization control)
218
Simplified image stabilization control is not executed in standby state
24.3.2

bizhub 652/552/602/502

Before, during, and after a print cycle
Operating condition
Image
Temperature/humidity
stabilization inside the machine after last
control mode image stabilization operation
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Number of print count after

last image stabilization
operation*
Execution timing
Image stabilization controls of mode 1 and 2 are not performed before, during, and after
a print cycle.
There is a change exceeding a predetermined value.
Less than 2,000
The control is executed at

the end of a current job
2,000 or more
The control is started even

during an execution of a job
Less than 2,000

There is not a change
exceeding a predetermined
2,000 or more
value.
The control is not executed

The control is started even
during an execution of a job
Count
216 mm or less
Over 216 mm and up to 432 mm or less
Over 1080 mm
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
*: The number of printed pages is counted such that a paper length (length in the subscanning direction) equivalent to that of A4 is counted as one.
219
bizhub 652/552/602/502
24.4 Utility/Service Mode

24.4.1
Expert Adjustment
Setting items as they relate to image stabilization control within the expert adjustment.
Utility
Adminis- System
trator
Settings
Settings
24.4.2
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Expert
Adjustment
Remarks
Image
Initialize + Image
Stabiliza- stabilization
tion
Image stabilization only
Image stabilization control mode 2 is

executed
Gradation
Adjustment

executed
Image stabilization only

executed
Print
Copy
Service Mode
Setting items as they relate to image stabilization control within the service mode.
Service Mode
Machine
LD adjustment
Image Process
Adjustment
Max Image Den- Copy

sity Adj.
Printer
Remarks
LD Timing Adj.
LD 1/2 Balance Adj.
Image Background Adj.

Stabilizer
Initialize + Image stabili- Image stabilization control mode 2 is

zation
executed
Image stabilization only Image stabilization control mode 3 is
executed
220

bizhub 652/552/602/502
24.5 Image stabilization control operating time

bizhub 652/602
States
Time
Mode 1 (New/Unit replacement/Initialize + image stabilization control)
11.9 sec
Mode 2 (Initialize + image stabilization control)
11.9 sec
Mode 3 (Normal image stabilization control)
8.9 sec
Mode 4 (Simplified image stabilization control)
5.1 sec
bizhub 552/502
Time
13.5 sec
Mode 2 (Initialize + image stabilization control)
13.5 sec
Mode 3 (Normal image stabilization control)
10.0 sec
Mode 4 (Simplified image stabilization control)
5.6 sec
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
States
Mode 1 (New/Unit replacement/Initialize + image stabilization control)
221
bizhub 652/552/602/502
25. IMAGE PROCESSING

25.1 Scanner section image processing block diagram
1. Photoelectric conversion
CCD board
2. Analog-to-digital conversion
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
To the MFP board
The following detail the image processing operations performed by the scanner section.
1. A reduction type CCD sensor is used to read the light reflected off the original and
convert the optical data to a corresponding electric signal. To make data processing faster, data transfer and output are done through two channels, one for evennumbered pixels and the other for odd-numbered pixels.
2. The odd and even analog signals output from the CCD sensor chips are synthesized to form a single string of signal data which is in turn converted to 10-bit digital
signals (1024 gradation levels).
The image data is transmitted to MFP board on the write section through the interface
cable.
222

bizhub 652/552/602/502
25.2 Write section image processing block diagram

From scanner section
MFP board
1. Shading correction
2. Line-to-line variation
correction/color
aberration correction
3. Detection of security pattern
17. Output buffer memory
4. Free erase
18. BTC expansion
5. AE processing
6. Image data editing
7. Image area discrimination
20. Resolution conversion

processing in the sub
scanning direction
8. Monochrome data creation

9. Miscellaneous processing
(improved reproduction of
black text, edge emphasis,
and smoothing)
21. Color conversion

processing
V to K
Mode other than
photo
10. BTC compression
22. Embedment of security

pattern
11. Input buffer memory
23. Area discrimination FEET
12. JBIG compression
24. Interpolation
13. File (code) memory

RAM:2GB (standard)
HDD:250GB (standard)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
19. Resolution conversion

processing in the main
scanning direction/move
ment processing
Gamma correction
25. Gamma correction
26. Error diffusion

(binary)
14. JBIG expansion

27. Screening
15. Memory access coordinator
16. Frame memory
28. Main scanning position

correction
Speed conversion
Modulation
To PH unit
A2WUT2E095DA
223
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
The following describe details of image processing.

1. Correct variations in reading caused by pixel-to-pixel variations in sensitivity of the
CCD sensor and uneven light distribution by the exposure lamp. A peak-hold-type
shading correction is performed, in which the maximum value of two or more readings of two or more lines is taken to prevent effect due to dust or dirt on the shading
sheet.
2. To correct differences in the position of each chip of CCD sensors R, G, and B,
FIFO memory is adopted to match the output timing. Also correct color aberration
of the lens.
3. The security pattern created during printing on this machine is detected and copying is enabled or disabled through a password (when the security kit SC-507 is
mounted).
4. If outer document elimination is selected from the control panel, document area
determination processing is performed for each line within the document area data
acquired during prescan. Then, the START and END positions of the document
area in the main scanning direction are detected and the area outside the START
and END positions is erased as the outside-the-document area.
5. A histogram of lightness for AE processing is generated. The AE level of the document is determined based on this histogram and AE processing is performed.
6. R, G, and B data are then converted to value and color component data for adjustments of saturation, lightness, and hue.
7. Each image area, whether it is a color edge area, black edge area, dot area, or a
continuous gradation area, is discriminated.
8. Monochrome data is created.
9. Other types of processing performed are the improved reproduction of black text,
edge emphasis and smoothing.
10. Each Image data of R, G, and B is compressed to reduce the consumption of data
capacity.
11. Temporarily stores the BTC-compressed image data.
12. The stored image data is compressed in the JBIG (Joint bi-level image experts
group) format.
13. Each Image data of R, G, and B in the copy, print, scan, and fax mode is stored. In
PS printing, multi-valued data of Y, M, C, and K is stored.
14. The image data read from the file memory is uncompressed through a method of
JBIG compression. At this time, image rotating or sorting processing is conducted.
15. JBIG image data are expanded in the frame memory.
16. Each Image data of R, G, and B is stored in frame memory.
17. Temporarily stores the image data output from the frame memory.
18. The image data is uncompressed through a method of BTC compression.
19. FIFO memory is used to enlarge or reduce images in the main scanning direction.
The image is enlarged by increasing the number of data readings and reduced by
decreasing the number of data readings.
20. Reduction processing is conducted in sub scanning direction. No processing is
done at same size or zoom, but at reduction, the lines are thinned out.
21. When copying in a photo mode or making PC print, the V data is converted to the K
density data. Also, the masking processing, which compensates for the deviation in
the spectral reflection characteristics of the toner, and UCR/BP processing are performed on the image data.
22. The security pattern is embedded in the image data. Either enabling copying
through a password or unconditionally prohibiting copying can be selected from the
control panel for the security pattern to be embedded (when the security kit SC-507
is mounted).
224
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
23. Edge of letter and lineal drawing gets area discrimination and FEET processing is
conducted according to the discrimination result.
24. When FEET processing is conducted, interpolation is done so that no influence is
given to continuous gradation portion.
25. Makes the necessary corrections so that the printed gradations have linear characteristics, since the image density of the input image data is not directly proportional
to that of the printed image because of the changing developing and photo conductor characteristics.
26. In photo mode during copying and PC print, the image is processed as multi-valued
data (8-bit data). In any mode other than photo, the error diffusion method is
employed to process the image as binary (1-bit) data.
27. Creates the density distribution of a predetermined pattern to enable outstanding
gradation reproduction.
28. Adjust the processing speed in the board (main scanning) to conform to the input
processing speed. The laser is emitted according to the laser intensity information.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
225
bizhub 652/552/602/502
26. POWER SUPPLY SECTION

26.1 Parts energized when the main power switch is turned ON
26.1.1
Configuration
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Main power switch

A2WUT2C082DA
26.1.2
Operation
When the main power switch is turned ON, power is supplied from the DC power supply
unit to the following components.
Voltage
12V
5V
3.3V
226
Power supplied to
Fax board, control panel
MFP board, HDD, Fax board, Scanner section
Control panel
26.1.3
Auto power OFF system
The main power switch is mounted with a function that automatically turns it OFF.
Using Utility - Administrator Settings - System Settings - Power Save Settings, the time of
day can be set at which to turn OFF the power (default setting: not turning OFF).
For details, see Field Service of the service manual.
[1]
[2]
bizhub 652/552/602/502
[1]
Main power switch (Power switch)

(Front view)
[2]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A2WUT2C083DA
Main power switch (Power switch)

(Rear view)
227
bizhub 652/552/602/502
26.2 Parts energized when the sub power switch is turned ON

26.2.1
Configuration
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Sub power switch
A0P0T2E614AA
26.2.2
Operation
When the sub power switch is turned ON, MFP board detects it and sends a control signal to the DC power supply through the printer control board.
The DC power supply then supplies 3.3 VDC, 5VDC, 12VDC, 15VDC, and 24VDC to all
PWBs and options. It also turns ON the relays in the PWBs and power can be supplied to
the IH heater and the heater lamp.
NOTE
To turn OFF and ON the main power switch, first turn OFF the main power switch
and wait for 10 sec. or more before turning it ON again. If a setting value or values
in the tech. rep. mode are changed, it takes 10 sec. or more to incorporate the setting changes properly in the machine.
228

bizhub 652/552/602/502
26.3 Power cables

26.3.1
Configuration
Power supply:
100V 15A
110V 15A
120V 16A
127V 16A
220-240V 10A
26.3.2
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
A00HT2C304AA
Operation
bizhub 652/552/602/502:
The main body uses a single outlet.
229
bizhub 652/552/602/502
27. FAN CONTROL
27. FAN CONTROL

27.1 Configuration
Optical cooling fan motor (FM201)
Rear side cooling fan motor (FM16)
Toner suction fan
motor (FM7)

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
IH cooling fan motor/2

(FM12)
MFP control
board cooling
fan motor
(FM17)
(FM10)
Power supply cooling
fan motor (FM9)

IU cooling fan motor
(FM15)
Intake air

Writing cooling fan motor (M14)
Discharge air
A2WUT2C001DA
230
27. FAN CONTROL
27.2 Operation
27.2.1
Function
Motor name
Control conditions
Paper will be sucked between transfer part and fusing part, so it will have
a stable behavior and go smoothly into the fusing roller.
The air inside will be exhausted outside the unit.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Odor accumulated in the fusing part is absorbed by the odor filter to be

Fusing cooling fan motor/
removed.
1 (FM2)
Heat accumulated inside the unit will be discharged outside in order to
avoid temperature increase at the fusing part.
Cooling fan motor/1 (FM3)

avoid temperature increase at the transfer part or the fusing part.
Ozone ventilation fan

motor (FM6)
A white belt may occur on the image because of the lower sensitivity of
the photo conductor due to ozone accumulated around the photo conductor charge corona. In order to avoid this trouble, ozone filter removes
the ozone inside the photo conductor charge corona to keep the sensitivity of the photo conductor.
Ozone accumulated around photo conductor charge corona will be
absorbed by ozone filter and be removed.
Toner suction fan motor

(FM7)
Toner easily scattered around a developing roller is sucked. Sucked air

will be filtered and toner will be discharged outside.
Power supply cooling fan

motor (FM9)

avoid temperature increase at the power part.

(FM10)

avoid temperature increase at the IH power used for fusing part.

(FM12)
In order to avoid the temperature increase around IH power used for the
fusing part, the outside air is sucked into the unit to cool it.
Paper cooling fan motor

(FM13)
In order to avoid toner adhesion to other things, outside air is sent to

ejected paper to cool it down.
PH cooling fan motor

(FM14)
In order to avoid the temperature increase around PH, the outside air is
sucked into the unit to cool it.

(FM15)
In order to avoid the temperature increase around TC part, IU part, transfer unit, etc., the outside air is sucked into the unit to cool it.
Rear side cooling fan

motor (FM16)

avoid temperature increase at rear side of the unit, such as the board
box.
MFP control board cooling Heat accumulated inside the unit will be discharged in order to avoid temfan motor (FM17)
perature increase at the MFP board.
Optical cooling fan motor
(FM201)
Heat accumulated inside the IR part will be discharged in order to avoid

temperature increase at the scanner motor.
Exit cooling fan motor/1, / In order to avoid toner attachment while the exit plate kit is used, outside
2, /3 (FM101, FM102,
air is applied to the paper to cool it.
FM103)
Fan motor for the exit plate kit (0T-503)
231
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Fusing cooling fan motor/ Toner with paper heated at the fusing part may adhere to another paper
3 (FM5)
on the paper exit tray when it will exit on the tray with remaining heat. In
order to avoid toner adhesion to other things, outside air is sent to
ejected paper and toner to cool it down.
bizhub 652/552/602/502
27. FAN CONTROL

27.2.2
Control conditions
Motor name
Control
Stop

fan motor/1 (FM2)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Full speed
Full speed
During print cycle

Function for putting through papers is diagnosed as adjustment.
Stop
During warm-up cycle (in case that warm-up cycle is within

60 sec.)
For 60 sec. after the start of warm-up cycle (in case that
warm-up cycle is within 60 sec. or more)
232
Other than stop and full speed
Full speed
During print cycle

Stop
During predrive
During fusing warm-up
Half speed
*1
In standby state
During image stabilization performed during print cycle
Full speed
During print cycle

During transfer belt cleaning performed during print cycle
Full speed rotation for 30 sec. after the above operations
Stop
Any timing other than below
Half speed
Half speed rotation for a predetermined period of time following full speed rotation for 30 sec. after stop of the photo conductor
Full speed

fan motor (FM9)
During print cycle

Ozone ventilation fan

motor (FM6)
Color toner suction fan

motor (FM7)
Stop
Cooling fan motor (FM3) Half speed

*1
Fusing cooling fan

motor/3 (FM5)
Control conditions (outline)

During print cycle

During image stabilization
During TCR automatic adjustment
During auxiliary toner supply
Full speed rotation for 30 sec. after the completion of above
operations and stop of the photo conductor
Stop
When the K developing motor is deenergized
Full speed
While the K developing motor remains energized at such timing as during print cycle or stabilization
Stop
In power OFF state
Half speed
*1
Full speed
During print cycle

Control
Half speed
Half speed rotation for 30 sec. after the end of following conditions
Full speed
During print cycle

Stop
Full speed
During print cycle

Stop
Half speed
Half speed rotation for 110 sec. after the end of following
conditions
Full speed
During print cycle

Full speed rotation for 10 sec. after the end of above operation
Stop
Half speed
*1
In standby
Full speed
During print cycle

Full speed rotation for 10 sec. after print cycle or image stabilization
Stop
Full speed
While the K PC motor remains energized at such timing as

during print cycle or stabilization
Stop
Full speed

(FM10)

(FM12)
Paper cooling fan motor

(FM13)
Writing cooling fan

motor (FM14)

(FM15)
Rear side cooling fan

motor (FM16)
MFP control board cooling fan motor (FM17)
Optical cooling fan

motor (FM201)
Stop
During print cycle

Full speed rotation for 10 sec. after the end of above operation
Stop
When sub power switch is turned OFF

In sleep state
In low power state
Half speed
In standby state
Full speed
Any timing other than above
Full speed
While the exposure lamp (FL201) is ON
Stop
Exit cooling fan motor/1
(FM101)
Full speed

Full speed rotation for 30 sec. after paper exit following the
end of print cycle
233
bizhub 652/552/602/502
Motor name
27. FAN CONTROL
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Motor name
Exit cooling fan motor2/

3 (FM102,FM103)

Control
Stop
For printing a paper which size is B5 or less. Or other than

following.
Full speed
Full speed rotation for 30 sec. after paper exit following the
end of print cycle. (For printing a paper which size is larger
that B5.
*1: Half speed control: When switching from stop to half speed control, the fan will rotate at
full speed and then will rotate at half speed.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
27. FAN CONTROL
234
28. COUNTER CONTROL

bizhub 652/552/602/502
28. COUNTER CONTROL

28.1 Configuration
Printer control board

(PRCB)
Total counter
Key counter (option)
MFP board (MFPB)
Electronic counter
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A0P0T2C612AA
28.2 Operation
Name
Total counter
Function/system
Displays the cumulative number of copies and prints of all jobs.
A mechanical counter driven by an electric signal
Counts one when an exit signal is applied to it
Electronic counter
Number of total in copy/printer/fax/scan mode will be displayed on

the screen as described below.
Black
Total counter, large size counter, total (copy + printer), scan counter,
fax TX counter, fax RX counter, No. of originals counter, No. of prints
counter, total duplex counter
Counts one when an exit signal is applied to it
Key counter (option)
When charging prints by using the key counter, copies cannot be

made with out the key counter. However PC prints and fax TX/RX
service are available without the key counter.
Displays the cumulative number of copies while the key counter is
being mounted.
A mechanical counter driven by an electric signal
Counts one when a paper take-up start signal or image forming start
signal, whichever occurs earlier, is applied to it
NOTE
The counting modes can be selected at [billing setting] of service mode.
For details, see [Field service/adjustment/setting/billing setting].
235
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
bizhub 652/552/602/502
28. COUNTER CONTROL
Blank Page
236
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

DF-618
CONTENTS
DF-618
2.
SECTION CONFIGURATION.................................................................................. 5
3.
PAPER PATH........................................................................................................... 5
4.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 6
5.
DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 7
6.
OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 8
6.1
Paper feed section ................................................................................................ 8
6.1.1
Document feed tray ascent/descent mechanism .......................................... 8
6.1.2
Feeding the original....................................................................................... 9
6.1.3
Document set detection ................................................................................ 9
6.1.4
Original size detection................................................................................. 10
6.2
Transport section ................................................................................................ 11
6.2.1
Transfer mechanism.................................................................................... 11
6.2.2
Reading roller pressure/retraction control ................................................... 11
6.3
Turnover/paper exit section................................................................................. 12
6.3.1
Transferring the original............................................................................... 12
6.3.2
Switching mechanism for turnover/paper exit ............................................. 12
6.3.3
Switch back roller pressure/retraction control ............................................. 14
6.4
Paper path .......................................................................................................... 15
6.4.1
1-sided mode .............................................................................................. 15
6.4.2
2-sided mode .............................................................................................. 16
6.4.3
Mixed original/AMS mode (2-sided) ............................................................ 17
6.5
Open/close detecting section.............................................................................. 19
6.5.1
DF 20 degree open/close detection ............................................................ 19
6.5.2
DF open/close detection ............................................................................. 19
6.6
Cooling inside the unit ........................................................................................ 20
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
1.
OUTLINE
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OUTLINE
DF-618
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
DF-618
1.
A. Type
Type
Installation
Reverse automatic document feeder

Paper feed section
Paper feed from top of stack
Image reading section
Sheet-through system
Turnover section
Switchback system
Exit section
Straight exit system
OUTLINE
Name
Screw cramp to the main body
Document alignment
Center
Document loading
Face up
B. Functions
Modes
Standard mode / Mixed original detection mode / FAX mode
C. Paper type
Standard mode
Type of document
Mixed original detection mode
FAX mode
1-sided mode
35 to 210 g/m2 (9.25 to 55.75 lb)
2-sided mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)
1-sided / 2-sided mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)
1-sided mode
35 to 210 g/m2 (9.25 to 55.75 lb)
2-Sided Mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)
Metric area: B6S to A3
Inch area: 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 to 11 x 17
Detectable document
size*1
Standard mode/FAX mode
Capacity
100 sheets (80 g/m2) or stack of 14 mm and below
*1: For the combined original detection mode, refer to the mixed original feed chart.
DF-618
D. Paper feed prohibited originals

If fed, trouble occurrence will be highly possible.
OUTLINE
Type of original
Possible trouble
Sheets stapled or clipped together
Paper feed failure, damaged sheet, defective drive

mechanism due to jammed staples or clips
Sheets glued together
Paper feed failure, damaged sheet
Book original
Paper feed failure, damaged sheet
Original weighing less than 35 g/m2 (9.25 lb) or

210 g/m2 (55.75 lb) or more
Paper feed failure, transport failure
Sheets folded, torn or wrinkled
Paper feed failure, damaged sheet,

transport failure
Sheets severely curled
Sheets misfed due to being dog-eared or fed in

askew
OHP film (Transparency film)
Label paper
Offset master paper
Glossy photographic paper or glossy enamel

paper
Transport failure, damaged sheet
Sheets clipped or notched
Damaged sheet, transport failure
Sheets patched
Patched part folded or torn sheet
E. Paper feed not guaranteed originals

If fed, paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible.
Type of Original
Sheets lightly curled (Curled amount: 10 to 15 mm)
Possible Trouble
Dog-eared, exit failure, transport failure
Heat sensitive paper
Edge folded, exit failure, transport failure
Ink jet paper
Sheets with smooth surface (Coated paper)
Intermediate paper
Paper immediately after paper exit from the main unit
Paper with many punched holes (e.g., loose leaf) limited

Multi-page feed due to flashes from holes
to vertical feeding
Sheets with 2 to 4 holes
Transport failure
Sheets two-folded or Z-folded
Transport failure, image deformation
Sheets with rough surface (e.g., letterhead)
Paper feed failure
Mixed original size

297 mm
257 mm
297 mm
257 mm
210 mm
182 mm 148 mm 128 mm
A3
A4
B4
B5
A4S
A5
B5S
A5S
B6S
A3
OK
OK
A4
OK
OK
B4
OK
OK
OK
OK
B5
OK
OK
OK
OK
A4S
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
A5
NG
NG
OK
OK
OK
OK
182 mm
B5S
NG
NG
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
148 mm
A5S
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
OK
128 mm
B6S
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
OK
OK
210 mm
OUTLINE
Max. original
size
For inch
Max. original size
Mixed original size
11
8 1/2
11
11 x 17
8 /2 x 11
1
8 /2 x 14
1
8 /2 x 11S
1
5 1/2
5 /2 x 8 /2 5 /2 x 8 1/2S
1
11 x 17
OK
OK
8 1/2 x 11
OK
OK
8 1/2 x 14
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
8 1/ 2
8 1/2 x 11S
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
5 1/2 x 8 1/2
NG
NG
OK
OK
OK
5 1/ 2
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
OK
OK
NG
-
DF-618
F. Mixed original feed chart

For metric
Mixed original feed available (Tilted with in 1.5% or less)

No. mixed original feed
Can not set original
G. Machine specifications
DF-618
DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit)
OUTLINE
Power requirements
DC 5 V
Max. power
consumption
60 W or less
Dimensions
618 mm (W) x 575 mm (D) x 130 mm (H)

24.33 inch (W) x 22.64 inch (D) x 5.12 inch (H)
Weight
16.0 kg (35.27 lb)
H. Operating environment
Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.
NOTE
Paper feed section
Paper exit section
OUTLINE
Transport section
DF-618
2.
9J07T2C203c0
Turnover section
3.
Paper exit turnover section
PAPER PATH
Feed tray
Exit tray
A0HTT2C001DA
Document read position
4. CONFIGURATION
DF-618
4.
CONFIGURATION
[2]
[1]
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
[4]
[3]
[6]
[1]
Transportation cover
[5]
Original read section
[2]
Document feed tray
[6]
Magnet
[3]
Turnover cover
[4]
Document guide
Feed roller
Registration roller
Reading roller 1
A01HT2C002AA
Pick-up roller
Separation roller
Reading roller 2
Switch back registration roller
[5]
A0P0T5C052DA
Switch back roller
Exit roller
Exit switch back roller
A0HTT4C001DA
DRIVE
Take-up motor (M2)
DF-618
5.
5. DRIVE
Exit motor (M3)

Lift-up motor (M6)
Switch back roller
pressure/retraction
motor (M5)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Regist motor (M7)
Reading motor (M1)

Reading roller pressure/
A0HTT5C001DA
6. OPERATION
6.
DF-618
6.1
6.1.1
OPERATION
Paper feed section
Document feed tray ascent/descent mechanism
The document feed tray will move up to feed the original.

Ascent/descent of the document feed tray will be performed by the lift-up motor.
A. Document feed tray ascent
The document feed tray will stay in the stand-by position when in stand-by status.
Setting the original and pressing the start key will move the document feed tray up.
The lift-up motor will rotate the drive cam through the gear. The lift up lever will move
above the cam, and the document feed tray will move up.
The document feed tray will stop moving up when the lift up upper sensor is transmitted.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Descent position
Drive cam
Ascent position
Lift up lever
Lift up upper
sensor (PS16)
Lift-up motor (M6)
Lift up lower
sensor (PS15)
9J07T2C202c0
Empty sensor (PS14)
B. Document feed tray descent

When all the originals are fed and the empty sensor is interrupted, the lift-up motor will
reverse.
The lift-up motor will rotate the drive cam through the gear. The lift up lever will move
above the cam, and the document feed tray will move down.
The document feed tray will stop moving down when the lift up lower sensor is interrupted.

Feeding the original
The paper feed section consists of the pick-up roller, feed roller as well as the separation
roller, and is directly driven by the take-up motor.
Pressing the start key will transfer the original to the registration roller by the pick-up
roller and the feed roller.
DF-618
6.1.2
6. OPERATION
Pick-up roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Take-up motor (M2)
Feed roller
A07HT2C002DB
Separation roller
6.1.3
Document set detection
To prevent a document set mistake, the document set sensor detects a document loaded
in the document feed tray.
Document feed tray
Document set
sensor (PS20)
A0HTT6C001DA
6. OPERATION
DF-618
6.1.4
Length sensor 1
(PS10)
Length sensor 3
(PS12)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Length sensor 2
(PS11)
Before read
sensor (PS9)
Document width detection

variable resistor (VR1)
A0HTT6C002DA
Mixed sensor 1
(PS19)
Mixed sensor 2
(PS18)
Mixed sensor 3
(PS17)
A. Detecting the width of the original 1

The width of the original will be detected by the document width detection variable resistor under the document feed tray.
Reference for setting the original on the document feed tray is its center.
B. Detecting the width of the original 2
Three mixed sensors are mounted to where the paper passes immediately after it is fed.
It is for detecting the width of the original for mixed original/AMS.
C. Detecting the length of the original 1
The length of the original will be detected by the length sensor 1/2/3.
Length sensors 1 and 3 are mounted in this order with the length sensor 2 being closest
to the feed roller.
D. Detecting the length of the original 2
Length of the mixed original/AMS will be calculated by the time before read sensor is
interrupted.
10
6.2.1
Transport section
Transfer mechanism
The original transferred from the paper feed section will be transferred to the paper exit
section or turnover section by the registration roller, the reading roller 1 and 2, and the
switch back roller.
The registration roller and the switch back roller are driven by the regist motor.
Reading roller 1 and 2 are driven by the reading motor.
Regist motor (M7)
Registration roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Switch back roller
Reading motor (M1)

Reading roller 1
Registration
sensor (PS3)
Reading roller 2
6.2.2
DF-618
6.2
6. OPERATION
A07HT2C003DB
Reading roller pressure/retraction control
Document speed fluctuates as the trailing edge of the document moves past reading
roller 1. To inhibit these speed fluctuations, the reading roller pressure/retraction motor is
employed to retract reading roller 1.
Retract reading
roller 1
Reading roller pressure/
A0HTT6C003DA
Lever
11
6. OPERATION
DF-618
6.3
6.3.1
Turnover/paper exit section

Transferring the original
The original transferred from the transport section will switch back or exit by the exit
roller, the switch back roller, and the exit switch back roller.
The exit roller and the exit switch back roller are driven by the exit motor.
The switch back roller is driven by the regist motor.
Switch back roller
Exit motor (M3)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Exit roller
Regist motor (M7)
A0HTT6C004DA
6.3.2
Switching mechanism for turnover/paper exit
A. Turnover section
Pathway of the original will be switched and the original will turnover by the switch back
lever.
Switch back lever is switched by ON/OFF of the switch back solenoid.
When in 1-sided mode:
Switch back solenoid will be OFF
When in 2-sided/
mixed original/AMS (1-sided, 2-sided) mode:
Switch back solenoid will be ON
Switch back solenoid (SD1)
Exit roller
9J07T2C012DA
12
Switch back roller

9J07T2C013DA
Switch back lever
6. OPERATION
DF-618
B. Paper exit section

The exit lever will switch the pathway of the original to exit.
The exit lever will be switched by ON/OFF of the exit switch back solenoid.
When in 1-sided mode: Exit switch back solenoid will be OFF
When in 2-sided/mixed original/AMS (1-sided, 2-sided) mode: Exit switch back solenoid will be ON
Exit switch back solenoid (SD2)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Exit lever
9J07T2C014DA
13
6. OPERATION
DF-618
6.3.3
Switch back roller pressure/retraction control
To enhance productivity in document scanning, control is performed at the turnover section by narrowing the gap between two originals so that they pass each other properly at
the switch back roller. The switch back roller pressure/retraction motor provides the drive
for the pressure/retraction operations of the switch back roller.
This control is performed during the mixed original AMS mode only.
A0HTT6C005DA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Switch back
roller
Switch back
roller pressure/
retraction motor
(M5)
A0P0T5C114DA
14
Paper path
6.4.1
1-sided mode
DF-618
6.4
6. OPERATION
1. Pressing the start key will lift up the feed tray and press the reading roller 1.
2. After the feed tray is lifted up, the feed motor is started and the pick-up roller and
the feed roller will start rotating to start feeding the first sheet of paper.
3. When the paper reaches the registration roller, a loop is formed in the paper. Then,
the regist motor is started, so that the registration roller transfers the paper.
4. The take-up motor is deenergized when a predetermined period of time elapses
after the registration motor has been activated. The reading motor and the exit
motor will start running.
5. It starts reading from the front edge of the original when the before read sensor
turned ON and the specified period of time has passed.
6. Reading roller 1 will be retracted right before the back edge of the original passes
through the reading roller 1. The retracted reading roller 1 will be pressed again to
prepare for the next original.
7. The original will be exit by the reading roller 2 and the exit roller.
8. All motors will turn OFF after the back edge of the original turns OFF the exit sensor and the specified period of time is passed.
15
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A0HTT6C007DA
6. OPERATION
6.4.2
2-sided mode
DF-618
1. The first side of the original will be read.

2. The original will be transferred to the turnover section. (Switch back solenoid will be
ON)
3. In order to read the second side of the original which is transferred to the turnover
section, the switch back roller will reverse by the switch pack operation of the regist
motor, and transfer the original to the switch back registration roller.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A0HTT6C008DA
4. The switch back registration sensor will turn ON and the switch back registration
roller will rotate by the exit motor to transfer the original to the original read section.
5. It starts reading from the front edge of the original when the before read sensor
turned ON and the specified period of time has passed.
6. The original will be transferred to the paper exit turnover section after it is read.
(switch back solenoid will be ON)
Exit switch back roller will reverse by the exit motors reverse operation.
A0HTT6C009DA
7. In order to keep the proper order of the original, exit switch back roller will rotate forward by the exit motors forward operation. The original will be turned over and be
discharged.
A0HTT6C010DA
16

Mixed original/AMS mode (2-sided)
Paper path control will be the same as the 2-sided mode.

1. The original will be fed to detect the paper length. (It will not read the original)
The length of the original will be judged by the before read sensor ON time, and the
width of the original will be judged by the mixed sensor 1, 2, and 3.
DF-618
6.4.3
6. OPERATION
A0HTT6C011DA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
2. The original will be fed without the 2nd side being read.
A0HTT6C012DA
3. After reading the first side, the original will be transferred again to the switch back
part to read the second side.
A0HTT6C013DA
17
6. OPERATION
DF-618
4. The original will be transferred to the paper exit turnover section after second side
is read. (Switch back solenoid will be ON)
Exit switch back roller will reverse by the exit motors reverse operation.
A0HTT6C014DA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
5. In order to keep the proper order of the original, exit switch back roller will rotate forward by the exit motors forward operation. The original will be turned over and be
discharged.
A0HTT6C015DA
18
6.5.1
Open/close detecting section

DF 20 degree open/close detection
The lever actuator is provided to detect the original size when using the auto document
feeder as the original cover.
When lowering the auto document feeder to 20 degree angle or lower, the angle detection lever for the original cover on the copier will be pressed to turn ON the 20 degree
sensor.
6.5.2
DF-618
6.5
6. OPERATION
DF open/close detection
The magnet is installed to detect the open/close of the auto document feeder on the
copier side.
The original cover/DF open sensor on the copier will turn ON by the magnet when lowering DF.
Magnet
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Lever
Original cover/DF open sensor (RS201)
A0HTT2C501AA
19
6. OPERATION
DF-618
6.6
Cooling inside the unit
The air will be blown inside the unit by the cooling fan in order to avoid the temperature
increase of the driving motor and the board.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Cooling fan
motor (FM1)
A01HT2C004AA
20
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

LU-301
CONTENTS
LU-301
PRODUCT SPECIFICATION .................................................................................. 1
2.
3.
PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 2
4.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
5.
DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 4
6.
OPERATIONS ......................................................................................................... 5
6.1
Paper Feed and Transport Control ....................................................................... 5
6.2
Paper level detection ............................................................................................ 6
6.3
Paper empty detection.......................................................................................... 7
6.4
Paper level indicator ............................................................................................. 7
6.5
Tray lift-up control ................................................................................................. 8
6.5.1
Tray ascend/descend mechanism................................................................. 8
6.5.2
Paper size detection.................................................................................... 10
6.6
Dehumidification heater control .......................................................................... 10
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
1.
OUTLINE
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OUTLINE
LU-301
Blank Page
ii
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
OUTLINE
PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
LU-301
1.
A. Type
Name
3,000 sheets Large Capacity Unit
Type
External option attached to the right side of the main body
Document alignment
Center
Type
Size
Weight
Capacity
Plain paper
60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
16 lb to 24 lb
3,000 sheets
Thick paper 1
91 g/m to 120 g/m

24.25 lb to 32 lb
2,500 sheets *2
121 g/m2 to 157 g/m2

32.25 lb to 41.75 lb
1,750 sheets *2
Thick paper 2
158 g/m2 to 209 g/m2

42 lb to 55.5 lb
1,550 sheets *2
Thick paper 3
210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2

55.75 lb to 68 lb
1,300 sheets *1 *2
Thick paper 1+
A4, 8 1/2 x 11
OUTLINE
B. Paper type
*1: Images are out of guarantee.

C. Machine specifications
Power requirements
DC 24 V, DC 5 V, DC 3.3 V (supplied from the main body)
Max. power
consumption
23 W or less
Dimensions
367 mm (W) x 528 mm (D) x 405 mm (H)

14.5 inch (W) x 20.75 inch (D) x 16 inch (H)
Weight
18.0 kg (39.75 lb)
D. Operating environment
NOTE
LU-301
2.
Paper transport section
Paper feed section
Paper storage section
OUTLINE
A03NT1C002AA
3.
PAPER FEED PATH

Transportation to main body
Paper feed from the tray
A03NT1C001AA
Main body
LU-301
4. CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
LU-301
4.
A03NT2C204AA
Near empty sensor /1 (PS5)

LU door switch (MS1)
Upper limit sensor (PS2)
Tray LED (LED)
A03NT2C213AA
(DH)
Lift-up motor (M1)

Paper empty sensor (PS4)
Tray set sensor (PS1)
Paper feed sensor (PS3)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
LU drive board (LUDB)
5. DRIVE
LU-301
5.
DRIVE
Feed roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

Transport roller
A03NT2C214AA
6.1
OPERATIONS
Paper Feed and Transport Control
LU-301
6.
6. OPERATIONS
The feed roller rotates and feeds paper at a predetermined timing.

The transport rollers rotate and convey paper at a predetermined timing.
In consecutive print, when the interval between the preceding and following sheets is
below the specified value, the transport rollers temporarily stop to ensure a predetermined interval.
The paper transport speed is faster than the system speed.
System speed (mm/s)
Paper transport speed (mm/s)
310 to 240
420
264 to 216
350
155 to 108
216
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Start key ON

A03NT2C001AA

Transfer roller
Feed roller

(PS12)
roller
A03NT2C002AA
Main body
LU-301
6. OPERATIONS
6.2
Paper level detection
LU-301
The level of the paper still available for use is determined based on the outputs from near
empty sensor/1 and sensor/2.
A near empty condition is detected when the amount of paper is about 50 sheets.
Reference data:
plain paper
Paper level
Paper full
Paper near full
Paper available
3000 to 2000 sheets 2000 to 1000 sheets 1000 to 50 sheets
Near empty
50 to 1 sheets
Near empty sensor /1
blocking
blocking
unblocking
unblocking
unblocking
blocking
blocking
unblocking
Paper level detection plate
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Notch
Notch

A03NT2C203AA
6.3
6. OPERATIONS
Paper empty detection
LU-301
The paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition.
Paper still available
A03NT2C205AA
6.4
Paper empty condition
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A03NT2C205AA
Paper level indicator
The amount of paper still available for use, or the paper level, is indicated by the LED
provided on the right-hand side of the unit as viewed from the front.
Following describe different paper level conditions.
Paper condition
Empty
Near empty
Other than empty and near empty conditions,

during lift-up
LED display
ON
Blinking *1
OFF
LED
A03NT2C204AA
6. OPERATIONS
6.5
LU-301
6.5.1
Tray lift-up control

Tray ascend/descend mechanism
The tray is suspended by the wires at the front and rear.

Rotation of the lift-up motor winds the wires, which causes the tray to go up.
Opening the LU door disconnects the lift-up motor from the tray ascend/descend mechanism, causing the tray to lower by its own weight.
There is a drive assist spring used for bringing the tray to a stop at an appropriate height.
If the tray lowers when paper is loaded, the height of loaded paper is almost the same as
the height of the tray when the tray is empty.
LU door
Paper tray
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Coupling
Lift-up motor (M1)
A03NT2C215AA
Wire
Drive assist spring
Lift-up axis
6. OPERATIONS
A. Closing the LU door

The condition of the upper limit sensor signal is checked when the LU door is closed. If
the upper limit sensor is unblocked, the lift-up motor is energized so that lifting of the tray
is started.
When the upper limit sensor is blocked after the lifting of the tray has been started, the
lift-up motor is deenergized to complete the lifting of the tray.
LU-301
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper tray
A03NT2C216AA
LU door closed
Lifting completed

Lift-up motor (M1)
A03NT2C207AA
B. During a print cycle

As the paper is consumed for a number of print cycles carried out, the pickup roller gradually lowers and eventually unblocks the upper limit sensor. The lift-up motor is then
energized again and the lifting of the tray is started.
When the upper limit sensor is blocked, the lift-up motor is deenergized to complete the
lifting of the tray.
The sequence of these operations is repeated. This maintains the pressure (paper takeup pressure) between the pickup roller and the paper stack at a constant level regardless
of the level of the paper stack left.
Pick-up Roller
A03NT2C209AA
A03NT2C208AA
6. OPERATIONS
LU-301
6.5.2
Paper size detection
The LCT is not capable of detecting the paper size.

The paper size is set by Service Mode System 2 LCT Paper Size Setting.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A03NT2E500DA
6.6
The LCT is equipped with a dehumidification heater as standard.

The control of the dehumidification heater is operatively associated with turning on or off
of the dehumidifier heater of the machine.
Right side
surface
Dehumidification
heater (DH)
A03NT2C212AA
10
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

LU-204
CONTENTS
LU-204
2.
3.
PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 2
4.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
5.
DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 4
6.
OPERATIONS ......................................................................................................... 5
6.1
Paper feed and transport control .......................................................................... 5
6.2
Paper level detection ............................................................................................ 6
6.3
Paper empty detection.......................................................................................... 7
6.4
Paper level indicator ............................................................................................. 7
6.5
Tray lift-up control ................................................................................................. 8
6.5.1
Tray ascend/descend mechanism................................................................. 8
6.5.2
Paper size detection.................................................................................... 10
6.6
Dehumidification heater control .......................................................................... 11
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
1.
OUTLINE
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OUTLINE
LU-204
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
LU-204
1.
A. Type
Name
2,500 sheets Large Capacity Unit
Type
External option attached to the right side of the main body
Document alignment
Center
Type
Size
Weight
Plain paper
A3, B4, A4, A4S,
Thick paper 1
A3 Wide *3
11 x 17
Thick paper 1+
*4
8 1/2 x 14 *4
8 1/2 x 11S
Thick paper 2
*4
8 1/2 x 11 *4
12 x 18
*4
Thick paper 3
OUTLINE
B. Paper type
Capacity
60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
16 lb to 24 lb
2,500 sheets
91 g/m2 to 120 g/m2

24.25 lb to 32 lb
2,000 sheets *2
121 g/m2 to 157 g/m2

32.25 lb to 41.75 lb
1,450 sheets *2
158 g/m2 to 209 g/m2

42 lb to 55.5 lb
1,250 sheets *2
210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2

55.75 lb to 68 lb
1,000 sheets *1 *2
*1: Images are out of guarantee.

*3: Fixed size for European market
*4: Fixed size for North American market
Power requirements
DC 24 V, DC 5 V, DC 3.3 V (supplied from the main body)
Max. power
consumption
23 W or less
Dimensions
629 mm (W) x 556 mm (D) x 405 mm (H)

Weight
25.0 kg (55.12 lb)
NOTE
LU-204
2.
Paper transport section
Paper feed section
Paper storage section
OUTLINE
A0TJT1C001DA
3.
PAPER FEED PATH

Transportation to main body
Paper feed from the tray
Main body
LU-204
A0TJT1C002DA
4. CONFIGURATION
LU-204
CONFIGURATION
A0TJT2C001DA
LU drive board (LUDB)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
4.

Tray LED (LED)
Paper feed
sensor (PS3)

Lift-up motor (M1)

Tray set sensor/2 (PS7)
Tray set sensor (PS1)
Dehumidification heater (DH)
A0TJT2C002DA
5. DRIVE
LU-204
5.
DRIVE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Feed roller

Transport roller
A0TJT2C003DA
6.1
OPERATIONS
Paper feed and transport control
LU-204
6.
6. OPERATIONS
The feed roller rotates and feeds paper at a predetermined timing.

The transport rollers rotate and convey paper at a predetermined timing.
In consecutive print, when the interval between the preceding and following sheets is
below the specified value, the transport rollers temporarily stop to ensure a predetermined interval.
The paper transport speed is faster than the system speed.
System speed (mm/s)
Paper transport speed (mm/s)
310 to 240
420
264 to 216
350
155 to 108
216
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Start key ON

A03NT2C001AA

(PS12)
Transport roller
Feed roller
roller
Main body
LU-204
A0TJT2C004DA
6. OPERATIONS
6.2
Paper level detection
LU-204
The level of the paper still available for use is determined based on the outputs from near
empty sensor/1 and sensor/2.
A near empty condition is detected when the amount of paper is about 50 sheets.
Reference data:
plain paper
Paper level
Paper full
Paper near full
Paper available
2500 to 2000 sheets 2000 to 1000 sheets 1000 to 50 sheets
Near empty
50 to 1 sheets
blocking
blocking
unblocking
unblocking
unblocking
blocking
blocking
unblocking
Paper level detection plate
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Notch
Notch
A0TJT2C005DA
6.3
6. OPERATIONS
Paper empty detection
LU-204
The paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition.

CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper still available
Paper empty condition

A0TJT2C006DA
6.4
Paper level indicator
The level of the paper still available for use is indicated by the LED provided on the righthand side of the unit as viewed from the front, and displayed on the control panel.
Following describe different paper level conditions.
Paper condition
Empty
Near empty
Other than empty and near empty conditions,

during lift-up
LED display
ON
Blinking *1
OFF
LED
Displayed on the Control panel
A0TJT2E017DA
6. OPERATIONS
6.5
LU-204
6.5.1
Tray lift-up control

Tray ascend/descend mechanism
The tray is suspended by the wires at the front and rear.

Rotation of the lift-up motor winds the wires, which causes the tray to go up.
Opening the LU door disconnects the lift-up motor from the tray ascend/descend mechanism, causing the tray to lower by its own weight.
There is a drive assist spring used for bringing the tray to a stop at an appropriate height.
If the tray lowers when paper is loaded, the height of loaded paper is almost the same as
the height of the tray when the tray is empty.
LU door
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Coupling
Paper tray
Wire
Lift-up motor (M1)
Drive assist spring

Lift-up axis
A0TJT2C008DA
6. OPERATIONS
A. Closing the LU door

The condition of the upper limit sensor signal is checked when the LU door is closed. If
the upper limit sensor is unblocked, the lift-up motor is energized so that lifting of the tray
is started.
When the upper limit sensor is blocked after the lifting of the tray has been started, the
lift-up motor is deenergized to complete the lifting of the tray.
LU-204
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper tray
A0TJT2C013DA
LU door closed
Lifting completed

Lift-up motor (M1)
A03NT2C207AA
LU-204
6. OPERATIONS
B. During a print cycle

As the paper is consumed for a number of print cycles carried out, the pickup roller gradually lowers and eventually unblocks the upper limit sensor. The lift-up motor is then
energized again and the lifting of the tray is started.
When the upper limit sensor is blocked, the lift-up motor is deenergized to complete the
lifting of the tray.
The sequence of these operations is repeated. This maintains the pressure (paper takeup pressure) between the pickup roller and the paper stack at a constant level regardless
of the level of the paper stack left.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Pick-up Roller
A0TJT2C010DA
6.5.2
Paper size detection
The LCT is not capable of detecting the paper size.

The paper size is set by Service Mode System 2 LCT Paper Size Setting.
A0TJT2E015DA
10
The LCT is equipped with a dehumidification heater as standard.

The control of the dehumidification heater is operatively associated with turning on or off
of the dehumidifier heater of the machine.
LU-204
Dehumidification
heater (DH)
A0TJT2C012DA
11
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
6.6
6. OPERATIONS
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
LU-204
6. OPERATIONS
Blank Page
12
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

ZU-606
CONTENTS
ZU-606
1.
2.
3.
PAPER PATH........................................................................................................... 7
CONVEYANCE SECTION ...................................................................................... 9
4.1
Configuration ........................................................................................................ 9
4.2
Drive ................................................................................................................... 10
4.3
Operation ............................................................................................................ 12
4.3.1
Conveyance path switching......................................................................... 12
4.3.2
Conveyance line speed switching ............................................................... 14
4.3.3
Registration control ..................................................................................... 17
5.
PUNCH SECTION ................................................................................................ 18
5.1
Configuration ...................................................................................................... 18
5.2
Drive ................................................................................................................... 18
5.3
Operation ............................................................................................................ 19
5.3.1
Punch control .............................................................................................. 19
5.3.2
Punch position movement control ............................................................... 21
5.3.3
Punch hole switching control....................................................................... 24
6.
PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION ....................................................... 25
6.1
Configuration ...................................................................................................... 25
6.2
Drive ................................................................................................................... 26
6.3
Operation ............................................................................................................ 27
6.3.1
Punch scraps conveyance control............................................................... 27
6.3.2
Punch scraps control .................................................................................. 28
7.
Z-FOLDING SECTION .......................................................................................... 29
7.1
Configuration ...................................................................................................... 29
7.2
Drive ................................................................................................................... 30
7.3
Operation ............................................................................................................ 31
7.3.1
1st folding control ........................................................................................ 31
7.3.2
2nd folding control....................................................................................... 33
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
4.
OUTLINE
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OUTLINE
ZU-606
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
ZU-606
1.
A. Type
Type
Z-folding multi punching device
B. Functions
Punching method Reciprocal punching method (punching each paper)
No. of holes
Metric area : 2 holes/4 holes (switched automatically)

Inch area : 2 holes/3 holes (switched automatically)
Hole diameter
Metric area : 6.5 0.5 mm

Inch area : 8.0 0.5 mm
Hole position
OUTLINE
Punch
Metric area : 11.0 5 mm

Inch area : 9.5 5 mm
Hole pitch
Metric area : 80 0.5 mm
Inch area : 70 0.5 mm
Inch area
Center of the
paper
: 9.5 5 mm
Hole pitch 108 0.5 mm

Center of the
paper

Center of the
paper

Center of the
paper

A109T1C001DA
Folding method
Buckle folding method with the roller pair
Z-folding
Folding length
ZU-606
OUTLINE
A07TT1C010AA
Paper size
L (mm)
A3
209 or less
B4
181 or less
11 x 17
215 or less
8K *1
194 or less
a (mm)
42
Folding precision
2 mm or less
2 mm or less
1st folding
2nd folding
A07TT1C011AA
Folding
Folding length
L
A07TT1C003AA
Paper size
L (mm)
8-1/2 x 14
263 or less
Folding precision
2 mm or less
A07TT1C004AA
No. of sheets per staple

No. of fold sheets
No. of unfold
sheets
No. of set on
the main tray
1 to 40 sheets
20 set
41 to 90 sheets
10 set
2 sheets
1 to 80 sheets
10 set
3 sheets
1 to 70 sheets
4 set
4 sheets
1 to 60 sheets
3 set
5 sheets
1 to 50 sheets
2 set
1 sheet
6 sheets or greater
ZU-606
The maximum number of sheets for the FS main tray at

the Z-folding operation
Z-folding continuous: Max. 30 sheets
Z-folding/stapling: See the table below
OUTLINE
Maximum tray capacity (80 g/m2)
Not guaranteed
*1: Only for the Taiwan market
ZU-606
C. Type of paper
No punch mode
Same as the main body.
Punch mode
Paper size
Combination with the folding/saddle stitching mode is not available.
OUTLINE
Metric area 2holes:

A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S,
8K *1, 16K *1, 16KS *1,
8 x 13, 8-1/2 x 13, 8-1/4 x 13, 8-1/8 x 13-1/4
4holes:
A3, B4, A4, 8K *1, 16K *1
Inch area 2holes:
11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x 11, 8-1/2 x 11S,
5-1/2 x 8-1/2, 5-1/2 x 8-1/2S, 7-1/4 x 10-1/2, 7-1/4 x 10-1/2S
3holes:
11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 11
Z-folding mode
Folding mode
Type of paper
60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) of the high-quality paper and the

plain paper
Special paper is not guaranteed. The punching of label
paper, tab paper, OHP paper, blueprint master and binding-holed paper are not allowed.
Paper size
A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8K

For B4 paper (including the mix of the paper), the combination with the stapling mode is not available.
Type of paper
60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) of the high-quality paper and the

plain paper
Special paper is not supported. Label paper, tab paper,
transparency film, paper, holed paper, and low stiffness
paper are not supported in Z-folding mode.
Paper size
8-1/2 x 14
Type of paper
60 to 90 g/m2 of the high-quality paper and the plain paper

Special paper is not supported. Label paper, tab paper,
transparency film, paper, holed paper, and low stiffness
paper are not supported in folding mode.
Paper curling
a
5 sheets of paper immediately after the printing
A07TT1C006AA
a : Excluding the OHP paper : Amount of curl: 15 mm or less

OHP paper
: Amount of curl: 10 mm or less
*1: Only for the Taiwan market
Maintenance
Machine service life
ZU-606
D. Maintenance
E. Machine specifications
Power requirements
100 to 240 VAC (automatic switching)
Max. power
consumption
120 W or less
Dimensions
169 mm (W) x 660 mm (D) x 1027.5 mm (H)

Weight
45 kg (99.21 lb)
OUTLINE
DC5 V (supplied from the main body)
F. Operating environment
Temperature
10 to 30 C
Humidity
15 to 85 % RH (with no condensation)
NOTE
ZU-606
2.
Conveyance section
Z-folding section
OUTLINE
Punch section
Punch scraps conveyance section
Finisher
ZU-606
Main body
A07TT1C009AA
3.
3. PAPER PATH
PAPER PATH
OUTLINE
ZU-606
A. Straight mode/punch mode (for the small size paper : A5, 5-1/2 x 8-1/2)
A07TT1C005AA
B. Punch mode (excluding the small size paper)
A07TT1C007AA
3. PAPER PATH
ZU-606
C. Z-folding mode/punch + Z-folding mode
OUTLINE
From the main body to the 1st folding
A07TT1C013AA
From the 1st folding to the 2nd folding

From the 2nd folding to the paper exit
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION
ZU-606
4.1
CONVEYANCE SECTION
Configuration
Conveyance sensor (PS601)

Gate solenoid/Up (SD602)
Conveyance encoder sensor (PS610)

Gate solenoid/Lw (SD601)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
4.
A07TT2C001AA
Exit sensor (PS609)
ZU-606
4.2
Drive
A. Conveyance drive
Main motor (M606)

2nd folding roller
Gate/Up
1st folding roller

Gate/Lw
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Conveyance roller
Exit roller
A07TT2C002AA
10
Registration roller
ZU-606
B. Gate drive
Gate/Up
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A07TT2C003AA
Gate/Lw
11
ZU-606
4.3
4.3.1
Operation
Conveyance path switching
The gates/Lw and /Up switch the conveyance path.

The gate solenoid/Lw and the gate solenoid/Up drive the gate/Lw and the gate/Up
respectively.
A. Gate/Lw
The gate/Lw switches the paper path between the straight conveyance path and the
upper conveyance path.
The gate/Lw is set to the straight conveyance path when the gate solenoid/Lw turns OFF.
The gate/Lw is set to the upper conveyance path when gate solenoid/Lw turns ON.
<Gate solenoid/Lw : OFF>
<Gate solenoid/Lw : ON>
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A07TT2C004AA
Gate/Lw
Straight conveyance path
12
Upper conveyance path
B. Gate/Up
The gate/Up switches the paper path of the paper that was conveyed to the upper conveyance path by the gate/Lw.
The gate/Up is set to the paper path to the exit side when the gate solenoid/Up turns
OFF.
The gate/Up is set to the paper path to the 1st folding stopper when gate solenoid/Up
turns ON.
<Gate solenoid/Up : OFF>
ZU-606
<Gate solenoid/Up : ON>
1st folding stopper
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Gate/Up
A07TT2C006AA
Conveyance path to the exit side
Conveyance path to the 1st folding stopper
C. Operation timing
(1) Z-folding mode
1. In the Z-folding mode for the all paper size, the gate solenoid/Lw and the gate solenoid/Up turn ON when the paper size detect board detects the leading edge of the
paper.
2. The gate/Lw is set to the upper conveyance path and the gate/Up is set to the conveyance path to the 1st folding stopper.
3. The gate solenoid/Lw and the gate solenoid/Up turn OFF a specified period of time
after the last paper turns OFF the exit sensor.
Leading edge of the paper detected
by the paper size detect board
Gate solenoid/Lw and gate

solenoid/Up turned OFF
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)

Exit sensor (PS609)
A07TT2E035AA
13
ZU-606
(2) Punch mode for the small size paper (A5, 5-1/2 x 8-1/2)
Gate solenoids/Lw and gate solenoids/Up always remain OFF, and never turn ON.
The gate/Lw remains being set to the straight conveyance path.
(3) Punch mode for the large size paper (other than the small size paper)
The gate solenoid/Lw turns ON when the paper size detect board detects the leading
edge of the paper, and then the gate/Lw is set to the upper conveyance path. The gate
solenoid/Up remains OFF and the gate/Up remains being set to the paper path to the exit
side.
The gate solenoid/Lw turns OFF a specified period of time after the last paper turns OFF
the exit sensor.
(4) Straight exit mode
Gate solenoid/Lw and gate solenoid/Up always remain OFF, and never turn ON.
The gate/Lw remains being set to the straight conveyance path.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
4.3.2
Conveyance line speed switching
The main motor drives the conveyance drive roller, the 1st folding roller, and the 2nd folding roller, which perform the folding operation, as well as the conveyance roller and the
exit roller.
The paper size detect board, the conveyance sensor, and the exit sensor detect the
paper.
Conveyance drive roller
1st folding roller
2nd folding roller

Conveyance roller
Paper size detect board

(PSDTB)
Exit roller
Exit sensor (PS609)
A07TT2C007AA
Registration roller
14
A. Operation timing
(1) Z-folding
1. Transmitting the paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer, the main motor
turns ON and rotates in high speed.
2. The main motor rotates in low speed and perform the 1st and 2nd folding operations a specified period of time after the paper size detect board detects the leading
edge of the paper.
3. The main motor rotates in high speed to perform the paper exit operation of the 1st
paper and to convey the 2nd paper in sync with the paper exit speed of the main
body when the conveyance sensor detects the leading edge of the paper and turns
ON after the 2nd folding operation.
4. The main motor turns OFF when the exit sensor detects the trailing edge of the last
paper.
Paper pass signal from
the horizontal transfer 1st paper
2nd paper
ZU-606
3rd (last) paper
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

Exit sensor (PS609)
High speed
Main motor (M606)
Low speed
Main motor driven in low speed
1st and 2nd folding operations
Paper exit operation

Main motor driven in high speed
Main motor turned OFF when the trailing
edge of the last paper is detected
A109T2C001DA
15
(2) Punch + Z-folding

1. Transmitting the paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer, the main motor
turns ON and rotates in high speed.
2. The main motor rotates in low speed and perform the 1st folding operation a specified period of time after the paper size detect board detects the leading edge of the
paper.
3. The main motor turns OFF for the punching operation a specified period of time
after paper size detect board detects the trailing edge of the paper.
4. After the punching operation, the main motor turns ON and perform the 2nd folding
operation.
5. The main motor rotates in high speed to perform the paper exit operation of the 1st
paper and to convey the 2nd paper in sync with the paper exit speed of the main
body when the conveyance sensor detects the leading edge of the paper and turns
ON after the 2nd folding operation.
6. The main motor turns OFF when the exit sensor detects the trailing edge of the last
paper.
Paper pass signal from
the horizontal transfer 1st paper
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
ZU-606
2nd paper
3rd (last) paper

Exit sensor (PS609)
High speed
Main motor (M606)
Low speed
Main motor driven in low speed
Paper exit operation
Main motor stopped for the punching operation Main motor driven in high speed
2nd folding operation
Main motor turned OFF when the trailing

edge of the last paper is detected
A109T2C002DA
16

The registration control corrects paper skew in the Z-folding mode and the punch mode.
The paper exited from the main body is pressed against the stopped registration roller
and forms a loop to correct skew of the paper, and then the paper is conveyed with its
leading edge nipped.
The registration motor drives the registration roller.
ZU-606
4.3.3
Leading edge of the paper
Loop

A07TT2C009AA
A. Operation timing
(1) Punch + Z-folding
1. Transmitting the paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer, the registration
motor turns ON.
2. The registration motor stops a specified period of time after the paper size detect
board detects the leading edge of the paper conveyed from the main body.
3. The paper is pressed against the registration roller and forms a loop to correct
paper skew.
4. The registration motor turns ON and the conveyance is restarted a specified period
of time after the paper contacts with the registration roller.
5. The registration motor turns OFF a specified period of time after the paper is
exited.
No registration control is conducted in the straight mode.
Paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer
Registration motor
(M601)
High speed
Low speed
Registration motor stopped
Conveyance restarted
A loop formed
A109T2C003DA
17
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Registration roller
5. PUNCH SECTION
ZU-606
5.
PUNCH SECTION
5.1
Configuration
Punch home sensor (PS606)
A07TT2C014AA
Punch switchover switch (MS601)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
5.2
Drive
<Top side view>
<Rear side view>
Cam holder
Eccentric cam
Punch motor (M604)
Cam cover
Punch switchover motor (M608)

Punch clutch (CL601)
Punch switchover cam
Cam cover
Eccentric cam (Metric type: 4 piece)

(Inch type : 5 piece)
Punch edges
Rack
Front direction
Belt
<Right side view>
18
Punch motor (M604)
Punch shift motor (M605)

A07TT2C013AA
5.3
5. PUNCH SECTION
Operation
5.3.1
ZU-606
The punch operation is conducted for every paper.

The controls related to the punch operation is the punch control, the punch position
movement control, and the punch hole switching control.
Punch control
The punch operation is conducted by transmitting the rotation of the punch motor to the
eccentric cam by the punch clutch and reciprocating the punch edges connected to the
cam holder once.
The punch motor drives the eccentric cam and performs the punch operation when
punch clutch turns ON.
The punch motor rotates clockwise from the view of the rear.
The punch motor keeps rotating during the punch operation.
The punch home sensor detects the home position of the punch edges.
Eccentric cam
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch motor (M604)
Cam holder
Front direction
Punch home sensor (PS606)
Upper position
Cam holder
Lower position
Eccentric cam
Punch edges
Paper
<Home position>
<Punching position>
A07TT2C015AA
19
ZU-606
5. PUNCH SECTION
A. Operation timing
The registration motor and the main motor turn OFF to stop the conveyance during the
punch operation.
1. The punch motor turns ON when the paper size detect board detects the leading
edge of the paper.
2. The punch clutch turns ON and performs the punch operation a specified period of
time after the paper size detect board detects the trailing edge of the paper.
3. The punch clutch turns OFF after a specified period of time.
4. The punch motor turns OFF a specified period of time after the punch clutch turns
OFF.
5. After the punch operation, the registration motor and the main motor turn ON to exit
the paper.
Punch motor (M604)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

Leading edge of the paper detected
Punch clutch turned ON Punch clutch turned OFF

A109T2C004DA
20

Punch position movement control
The punch shift motor moves the punch unit to move the punch hole position in the main
scan direction.
The registration motor controls the punch position in the sub scan direction by its stop
position.
5 sensors of the paper size detect board detects the punch hole position.
The front side sensor among 5 sensors detects the leading/trailing/side edge of the
paper and the other 4 sensors detect the side edge of the paper. The different sensor is
used depending on the paper size.
The punch shift home sensor detects the home position.
ZU-606
5.3.2
5. PUNCH SECTION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Side edge sensors
Belt
Leading/trailing/side edge sensor
Punch unit
Front direction
Punch shift home sensor (PS605)

A07TT2C017AA
21
ZU-606
5. PUNCH SECTION
A. Standby position movement of the punch unit

In the punch mode, the punch unit is set to the standby position in accordance with the
paper size before the paper is conveyed.
The punch shift motor moves the punch unit so that the sensor corresponding to the
paper size among 5 sensors of the paper size detect board (in case of A4 paper, the sensor is used) is positioned 5 mm inward from the side edge of the paper.
This operation is not conducted in the no punch mode.
Ex. : The sensor used at A4 paper
Standby position
Side edge of the paper

5 mm
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch blade
Paper conveyance direction

Punch unit
Paper
A07TT2C018AA
22
5. PUNCH SECTION
B. Punch position correction

The punch unit positioned 5 mm inward from the side edge of the paper conducts the
punch position correction operation by moving the punch unit back and forth while conveying the paper to correct the misalignment between the conveyed paper and the punch
position.
ZU-606
1. Move the punch unit backward until the certain side edge sensor (in case of A4
paper) detects the side edge of the paper.
2. Then, move the punch unit forward until the side edge sensor detects the side edge
of the paper (the side edge reference position detection).
3. Move the punch unit forward further so that the center of the punch edges is positioned to the center of the paper.
Standby position
Side edge of the paper
Punch unit
Center of the punch
Ex. : The sensor used at A4 paper
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch edges
Moves backward
Moves forward
Paper
Paper conveyance direction
Center of the paper
A07TT2C019AA
23
5. PUNCH SECTION
5.3.3
Punch hole switching control
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
ZU-606
1. Transmitting the paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer, the punch switchover motor switches the number of holes in the punch mode.
2. The punch switchover motor rotates the punch switchover cam clockwise and
moves the eccentric cams and back and forth via the cam cover.
3. When switching between the 2 holes punching and the 4 holes punching in Metric
Type, 2 eccentric cams in the middle remain being held in the cam holders because
they are shared in both cases.
4. When the cam cover moves forward, the eccentric cams at the outside for the 4
holes punching are held in the cam holder so that the total of 4 eccentric cams are
driven.
5. When the cam cover move backward, 2 outside eccentric cams are disengaged.
6. For the switchover between the 2 holes punching and the 3 holes punching in Inch
Type, the 2 holes eccentric cams and the 3 holes eccentric cams work exclusively.
7. When the cam cover moves forward, the 3 holes eccentric cams are held in the
cam holder and the 2 holes eccentric cams are disengaged.
8. This operation is not conducted if the number of holes is same with the previous
printing.
<Upper side view>
Eccentric cam (4 holes)
Cam cover
Eccentric cam (2 holes/4 holes)
Cam holder
Moves backward
Moves forward

Front side direction
<Right side view>
Eccentric cam (4 holes)

Eccentric cam (2 holes/4 holes)

24
A07TT2E034AA
6.1
PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION

Configuration
ZU-606
6.
6. PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch scraps conveyance motor (M607)
Punch scraps full sensor

(PS608)
Punch scraps box set sensor (PS607)

A07TT2C001DA
25
ZU-606
6.2
Drive
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch scraps conveyance screw gear
A07TT2C021AA
26
6.3.1
Operation
Punch scraps conveyance control
The punch scraps are conveyed by the punch scraps conveyance screw driven by the
punch scraps conveyance motor.
They are conveyed to the punch scraps box via the punch scraps collective duct.
The punch scraps conveyance motor turns ON to rotate the punch scraps conveyance
screw a specified period of time after the paper edge sensor detects the trailing edge of
the paper in the punch mode.
The punch scraps are sent to the forward by the rotation of the screw and collected in the
punch scraps box via the punch scraps collective duct.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch scraps conveyance screw
ZU-606
6.3
Punch scraps collective duct
Punch scraps box

A07TT2C022AA
27
ZU-606
6.3.2
Punch scraps control
The punch scraps box set sensor and the punch scraps full sensor monitor the punch
scraps box.
Punch scraps full sensor (PS608)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch scraps box
A07TT2C023AA
Punch scraps box set sensor (PS607)
A. Punch scraps full detection

The punch scraps full sensor detects whether the punch scraps box is full or not.
The punch scraps full sensor turns ON and transmits the punch scraps full signal to the
main body when the punch scraps box becomes full of punch scraps, and then the main
body displays the message on its operation panel.
B. Punch scraps box detection
The punch scraps box set sensor detects whether the punch scraps box is housed or
not.
The punch scraps box set sensor turns ON and transmits the no punch scraps box signal to the main body when the punch scraps box is not set, and then the main body displays the message on its operation panel.
28
7.1
Z-FOLDING SECTION
Configuration
ZU-606
7.
7. Z-FOLDING SECTION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
1st folding stopper home sensor (PS603)
Exit sensor (PS609)

A07TT2C024AA
2nd folding stopper home sensor (PS604)
29
ZU-606
7.2
Drive
<1st folding stopper drive>
1st folding stopper
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
1st folding stopper motor (M602)

A07TT2C025AA
<2nd folding stopper drive>

2nd folding stopper motor (M603)
A07TT2C026AA
2nd folding stopper
30
Operation
7.3.1
1st folding control
1st folding stopper
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
1. The registration roller, the conveyance roller, and the 1st folding roller convey the
paper to the 1st folding stopper section via the gate/Up.
2. A loop is formed between the 1st folding roller and the conveyance drive roller
when the leading edge of the paper is pressed against the 1st folding stopper.
3. The loop grows, and then it is caught by these rollers and the 1st folding is conducted.
4. The paper is then conveyed to the 2nd folding stopper section.
5. The position of the 1st folding depends on the position of the 1st folding stopper.
6. The 1st folding stopper motor sets the position in accordance with the number of
steps from the 1st folding stopper home sensor.
7. In the Z-folding mode with the punch mode, the registration motor and the main
motor stops to conduct the punch operation after the 1st folding operation, and then
the registration motor and the main motor turns ON to conduct the 2nd folding
operation.
Gate/Up

1st folding
Loop
ZU-606
7.3
2nd folding
direction
Front side
1st folding roller

Conveyance roller
Registration roller
A07TT2C027AA
31
ZU-606
A. Operation timing
1. The 1st folding stopper motor turns ON to drive the 1st folding stopper to the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size a specified period of time after
transmitting the paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer.
2. Transmitting the termination signal from the main body, the 1st folding stopper
motor replaces the 1st folding stopper to the home position.
Termination signal
1st folding stopper home sensor
(PS603)
1st folding stopper motor (M602)
Exit sensor (PS609)
1st folding stopper returning to the home position
1st folding stopper moving to the paper size
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A109T2C005DA
32

2nd folding control
1. The paper conveyed from the 1st folding section to the 2nd folding section is
stopped by the 2nd folding stopper and forms a loop between conveyance drive
roller and the 2nd folding roller.
2. The loop grows, and then it is caught by these rollers and the 2nd folding is conducted.
3. The 2nd folding stopper motor turns ON to move the 2nd folding stopper to the
evacuation position for the paper conveyance when the leading edge of the paper
(2nd folding) conveyed to the paper exit direction passes the conveyance sensor.
4. The 2nd folding is not conducted for 8.5 x 14 paper.
ZU-606
7.3.2

Paper exit direction
Paper exit direction
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Loop
2nd folding roller

Front side
2nd folding
2nd folding stopper home sensor

(PS604)
1st folding roller
2nd folding stopper

*Folding position
A07TT2C029AA
Exit sensor (PS609)
2nd folding stopper

*Home position
33
ZU-606
A. Operation timing
1. The 2nd folding stopper motor turns ON to drive the 2nd folding stopper to the
appropriate position in accordance with the paper size when the paper size detect
board detects the leading edge of the paper.
2. The 2nd folding stopper motor rotates in the reverse direction to move the 2nd folding stopper to the home position when the conveyance sensor detects the leading
edge of the paper after the 2nd folding. It opens the paper exit path.
3. The 2nd folding stopper motor turns ON to replace the stopper to the original position for the subsequent Z-folding when the exit sensor detects the trailing edge of
the paper.

2nd folding stopper motor (M603)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Exit sensor (PS609)

Moving to the home position

Moving to the 2nd folding position Moving to the 2nd folding position
for the subsequent paper
A109T2C006DA
34
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

FS-526
CONTENTS
FS-526
1.
2.
PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 4
2.1
Main tray ............................................................................................................... 4
2.2
Sub tray ................................................................................................................ 5
2.3
Stapling................................................................................................................. 6
OUTLINE
OUTLINE
3.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 7
4.
HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT SECTION ................................................................. 8
4.1
Configuration ........................................................................................................ 8
4.2
Horizontal transport mechanism........................................................................... 9
4.2.1
Paper transport ............................................................................................. 9
4.2.2
Fan motor.................................................................................................... 10
5.
TRANSPORT SECTION ....................................................................................... 11
5.1
Drive ................................................................................................................... 11
5.2
Operation ............................................................................................................ 12
5.2.1
Route change gate...................................................................................... 12
5.2.2
Bypass gate ................................................................................................ 13
6.
EXIT TRAY SECTION ........................................................................................... 15
6.1
Drive ................................................................................................................... 15
6.2
Operation ............................................................................................................ 16
6.2.1
Tray lift......................................................................................................... 16
6.2.2
Exit roller motor ........................................................................................... 17
6.2.3
Main tray transport ...................................................................................... 18
6.2.4
Sub tray exit ................................................................................................ 19
7.
ALIGNMENT SECTION ........................................................................................ 20
7.1
Drive ................................................................................................................... 20
7.2
Operation ............................................................................................................ 21
7.2.1
Alignment plate ........................................................................................... 21
7.2.2
Shift control ................................................................................................. 22
7.2.3
Alignment section transport mechanism ..................................................... 24
8.
8.1
STAPLER .............................................................................................................. 25
Drive ................................................................................................................... 25
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OUTLINE
FS-526
8.2
ii
Operation............................................................................................................ 26
8.2.1
Stapler movement....................................................................................... 26
8.2.2
Stapler control............................................................................................. 27
OUTLINE
FS-526
1.
A. Type
Flat-stapling finisher: 100 sheets staple
Type
Staple finisher attached to the side of the main body
Installation
Including horizontal transport unit (Built-in finisher that is mounted from the left of
the main body)
Document
alignment
Center
Consumables
Staples
OUTLINE
Name
B. Functions
Modes
Non-sort, sort, offset, group offset, sort staple
C. Stapling
60 to 80 g/m2: 100 sheets or 94 sheets + 2 sheets (209 g/m2) *2
Max. flat-stapling
capacity
81 to 90 g/m2: 30 sheets or 28 sheets + 2 sheets (209 g/m2) *1

91 g/m2 or more: 2 sheets of thick paper or more not guaranteed
100 sheets
Max. stapling
capacity for different paper sizes
B5 to A4S, 8 1/2 x 11S (Paper length: 150 to 300 mm)
70 sheets
B5 recycled paper 1-sided mode
65 sheets
B4S/8 1/2 x 14S (Paper length: 389 mm or less)
50 sheets
Paper sizes other than the above (Paper length: 150 mm or less,
390 mm or more) *1, *2
Stapling position
Back of the corner (0 to 45 degrees)

Front of the corner (0 to 45 degrees)
Center staple two points (Staple interval is fixed to 145 mm.)
Stapling method
Bypass flat clinch
*1: The stapling capacity for colored paper and enamel paper is 35 sheets (recommended
paper).
*2: And the stapling thickness is 10 mm or less and the stack thickness including curl is 25
mm or less.
FS-526
D. Max. paper capacity
OUTLINE
Main tray
(80 g/m2)
Non-sort, sort, offset,

group offset,
3,000 sheets :A4/A4S, B5/B5S, 8 1/2 x 11/

8 1/2 x 11S, 16K/16KS,
7 1/4 x 10 1/2 /7 1/4 x 10 1/2 S
1,500 sheets :A3, B4, 8 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13,
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/2 x 13 1/4,
8 1/2 x 13 1/2, 12 x 8, 11 x 17,
8 1/2 x 14, 8K
Wide size paper (Max. : 320 mm X 450 mm)
500 sheets :A5/A5S, B6S, A6S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 /
5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
No. of sheets in
offset mode
1 sheet
Set of 2 to 9
sheets
Set of 10 sheets
No. of sheets
per stapling
Main tray
sort staple
Size in the sub The others

scan direction is
150 to 417 mm
or longer
Equivalent to the above capacity
300 copies
150 copies
150 copies
150 copies
Size in the sub The others

scan direction is
150 to 417 mm
or longer
2 to 9
100 copies
50 copies
10 to 20
50 copies
50 copies
21 to 30
30 copies
30 copies
31 to 40
25 copies
25 copies
41 to 50
20 copies
20 copies
51 to 60
15 copies
61 to 100
10 copies
Sub tray (80 g/m2) 100 sheets
E. Type of paper
Size
A3, B4, A4/A4S, B5/B5S, A5/A5S, B6S, A6S, postcardS, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S,
8 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, /8 1/2 x 11S,
7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 S, 8K, 16K/16KS
Custom size paper, wide size paper, standard size index paper (Upon paper exit,
only the leading edge side but not the trailing edge side is guaranteed.)
Min. : 100 mm x 139 mm (4 inch x 5.5 inch)
Max. : 311 mm x 488 mm (12.2 inch x 19.2 inch)
Type
Plain paper, bond paper, colored paper, coated paper, speciality paper defined in
the main body specifications, and recommended paper are guaranteed.
Weight
60 to 300 g/m2
F. Machine specifications
FS-526
DC 24 V (supplied from the main body)

Max. power
consumption
85 W or less
Dimensions
723.8 (W) x 709.5 (D) x 1025 (H) mm

28.45 (W) x 27.88 (D) x 40.28 (H) inch
848.8 (W) x 709.5 (D) x 1025 (H) mm *
33.35 (W) x 27.88 (D) x 40.28 (H) inch *
Weight
60 kg (132.24 lb)
OUTLINE
Power
requirements
*: Size when the paper output tray is pulled out

G. Operating environment
2. PAPER FEED PATH
2.
FS-526
2.1
PAPER FEED PATH

Main tray
Alignment plate
Bypass gate
OUTLINE
Paper output roller
Main tray
Paper path from the horizontal
transport unit
A11PT1C001DA
Sub tray
Sub tray change gate
FS-526
Sub tray
Bypass gate
OUTLINE
2.2
2. PAPER FEED PATH

transport unit
A11PT1C002DA
2. PAPER FEED PATH
FS-526
2.3
Stapling
Bypass gate
OUTLINE
Paper output roller
Main tray
Stapler

transport unit
Alignment
section
A11PT1C003DA
3. CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
FS-526
3.
The following sections are combined in a single unit: the horizontal transport section,
transport section, alignment section, exit tray section (main tray), and stapler section.
Transport section
Horizontal transport section
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Alignment section
Exit tray section

(Main tray)
Stapler section
A11PT2C001DA
4. HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT SECTION
4.
FS-526
4.1
HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT SECTION

Configuration
The horizontal transport section is composed of the transport control board, transport
motor, fan motor, door open/close sensor, and paper pass sensor.
Door open/close sensor (PS201)
Transport control board (TRCB)
Fan motor/2 (FM2)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Fan motor/1 (FM1)
Paper pass sensor (PS202)

A11PT2C002DA
4.2.1
Horizontal transport mechanism

Paper transport
FS-526
4.2
The horizontal transport section transfers paper fed out from the main body to the finisher.
The transport motor provides drive for the transport rollers.
On the finisher side, drive from the transport motor transfers the paper into the finisher.
Horizontal transport section

Main body side
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Finisher side
Transport roller
Transport roller
A11PT2C003DA

4.2.2
Fan motor
FS-526
The fan motor cools the paper fed out from the main body.
Fan motor/2 (FM2)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Fan motor/1 (FM1)
A11PT2C002DA
(1) Function
Motor name
Fan motor/1 (FM1)
Fan motor/2 (FM2)
Function
In order to avoid toner attachment while the finisher is used, outside air is
applied to the paper to cool it.
(2) Fan control

Motor name
Fan motor/1 (FM1)
Fan motor/2 (FM2)
10
Control
Full speed
The interior temperature of the main body is 18 C or more during paper exit.
Continues rotating for a 30-sec. period following the stop of a
print cycle.
5.1
TRANSPORT SECTION
Drive
FS-526
5.
5. TRANSPORT SECTION
Sub tray exit roller/2
Bypass roller
Bypass gate
Transport motor/2 (M2)

Stacker entrance
motor (M10)
Sub tray gate

solenoid (SD3)
PF transport
roller
Bypass transport motor (M3)
Bypass gate solenoid (SD2)

Saddle gate
Entrance roller
Switch back solenoid (SD4)
Route change gate solenoid (SD1)
Transport roller/1
A11PT2C005DA
11
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Z-fold punch
regist sensor
(PS2)
FS-526
5.2
5.2.1
Operation
Route change gate
The route change gate switches paper to different routes that go to individual trays and
SD-508.
The FS control board controls the route change gate solenoid.
The FS operation signal from the main body makes the route change gate move up or
down.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A. Route change gate operation

The route change gate solenoid drives the route change gate.
Route change gate
Route change gate solenoid (SD1)

A11PT2C006DA
12

Bypass gate
The bypass route is provided to eliminate loss of time spent for the subsequent paper
and to increase productivity during stapling.
The bypass gate is provided at the place where the regular route and the bypass route
join.
FS-526
5.2.2
Regular route
Bypass gate
Bypass gate
Bypass route

A11PT2C007DA
13
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A. Bypass gate operation

The bypass gate solenoid drives the bypass gate.
Paper sizes subject to this operation are 8 1/2 x 11, A4, 16K, Executive, and ISO-B5.
The bypass gate operates only for the 1st page of the 2nd and following copies to transfer paper to the bypass route.
The 2nd page of the 2nd and following copies is transferred to the regular route and then
the transferred to the alignment section.
FS-526
B. Bypass gate control

The bypass gate only operates for the paper (8 1/2 x 11, A4, 16K, Executive, B5, and ISOB5).
The FS control board controls the bypass gate solenoid.
When stapling two sheets of paper for three copies, the bypass gate solenoid operates
as follows.
(1) For the 1st copy
When the paper for the 1st copy is transferred, the bypass gate solenoid does not operate.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
(2) For the 2nd copy

At the moment when the z-fold punch regist sensor detects the leading edge of the 1st
paper of the 2nd copy, the bypass gate solenoid is turned ON to transfer the 1st paper of
the 2nd copy to the bypass route.
The bypass gate solenoid turns OFF after a specified period of time since the z-fold
punch regist sensor detects the trailing edge of the 1st paper of the 2nd copy.
(3) For the 3rd and following copies
The same operation as the one for the 2nd copy is repeated.
The 1st copy
The 2nd copy
The 3rd copy

Z-fold punch regist sensor (PS2)
Leading edge of
the 1st paper of
the 2nd copy
Transferring 1st paper of
the 2nd copy to the bypass
14
Trailing edge of
the 1st paper of
the 2nd copy
Trailing edge of
the 1st paper of
the 3rd copy
Leading edge of the 1st paper

of the 3rd copy
A11PT2E004DA
Drive
FS-526
6.1
EXIT TRAY SECTION
Main tray
Lift pulley /Up
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
6.
6. EXIT TRAY SECTION
Lift wire
Lift pulley /Lw
Main tray lift motor (M5)
A11PT2C009DA
15
FS-526
6.2
Operation
6.2.1
Tray lift
A. Tray lift operation

The worm gear installed in the shaft of the main tray lift motor winds up the lift wire.
It lifts up or down the main tray depending on the winding direction.
Rotating the lift pulley /Lw clockwise and counterclockwise in view of front, the main tray
is lifted up and down respectively.
Main tray top surface sensor (PS4)
Main tray
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Main tray empty

sensor (PS6)
Lift pulley /Up

Main tray lower limit
sensor (PS5)
Staple paper exit top surface

sensor (PS7)
Main tray lift motor (M5)

Lift pulley /Lw
A11PT2C010DA
B. Paper detection
The main tray top surface sensor and the staple paper exit top surface sensor keep the
specified distance between the upper surface of the paper exited to the main tray and the
paper exit opening to eliminate the misalignment of the exited paper.
During the consecutive printing operation, FS counts the number of exited paper and
stops the printing when it reaches the maximum capacity.
If the exited paper is ejected during the printing operation, the tray moves up and the
main tray empty sensor turns ON and resets the counter. It makes possible to exit paper
with no limitation.
The main tray lower limit sensor detects the lower limit of the tray.
During the intermittent printing operation, the main tray lower limit sensor controls the
capacity of the paper exit because the counter does not integrate the total number of
exited paper.
16

6.2.2
Exit roller motor

FS-526
The exit roller motor is driven by the signal from the FS control board.
The main tray exit roller is driven by the exit roller motor.
<Store paper into alignment section>
Exit roller motor (M4)
Paper
2 staples stacker
sensor (PS3)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Main tray exit roller
<Exit paper into main tray>

A11PT2C011DA
A. Exit roller motor operation

When the 2 staples stacker sensor detects the leading edge of paper, the exit roller
motor rotates.
After a specified period of time since the 2 staples stacker sensor detected the trailing
edge of paper, the exit roller motor rotates in the reverse direction.
At the moment when the paper output roller motor is turned OFF, i.e. it finishes moving
down, the exit roller motor starts rotating at high speed. After a specified period of time,
the exit roller motor switches to low speed. After a specified period of time, the exit roller
motor stops.
17
FS-526
6.2.3
Main tray transport
After the process in the alignment section, the exit roller motor and paper output roller
motor are driven to transfer paper to the main tray.
A. Transport operation
When the paper output roller motor is driven, the paper output roller assy moves down to
be pressed against the main tray exit roller and the paper output roller rotates.
After paper is transferred to the main tray, the paper output roller assy moves up.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper output roller motor (M6)
Exit roller motor (M4)
Paper output roller

A11PT2C022DA
18

6.2.4
Sub tray exit
Sub tray
FS-526
The sub tray change gate is provided to transfer paper conveyed from the horizontal
transport section to the sub tray.
The sub tray change gate transfers the paper to the sub tray by moving up and down.
The sub tray gate solenoid drives the sub tray change gate.
Bypass transport
motor (M3)
Sub tray exit
roller/1
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Transport motor/2
(M2)
Sub tray full

sensor (PS9)
Sub tray exit sensor
(PS8)
Sub tray gate solenoid (SD3)

A11PT2C026DA
A. Sub tray exit roller/1 drive

The sub tray exit roller/1 is driven by the bypass transport motor.
B. Sub tray exit roller/2 drive
The sub tray exit roller/2 is driven by the transport motor/2.
The transport motor/2 rotates in high speed when the sub tray exit sensor detects the
leading edge of the paper.
The sub tray exit roller/2 rotates in low speed after a specified period of time since the
FNS pass sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper.
The transport motor/2 stops after a specified period of time since the sub tray exit sensor
detects the trailing edge of the paper.
C. Sub tray full detection
When the exited paper on the sub tray reached to a specified thickness, the sub tray full
sensor turns ON and the sub tray full information is sent to the main body. Then, the main
body displays the message on its display panel.
19
7. ALIGNMENT SECTION
FS-526
7.
7.1
ALIGNMENT SECTION
Drive
Alignment plate/F
Trail edge stopper
Alignment plate belt/F
Alignment plate/R
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Alignment plate motor/F (M11)

Alignment plate motor/R (M12)
Alignment plate belt/R
2 staples trail edge stopper motor (M19)

A11PT2C015DA
20
7.2.1
Operation
Alignment plate
After sheets of paper are aligned and stapled inside the finisher, they are transferred to
the main tray. With the exit roller separated, each copy set is stored in the alignment section at a time.
The alignment plate motor/F and /R rotate in the forward/reverse direction to open/close
the alignment plate/F and /R to perform the alignment of the paper transferred to the
alignment section.
FS-526
7.2
Alignment plate/F
2 staples alignment motor

home sensor/F (PS17)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Alignment plate/R

2 staples alignment motor home sensor/R (PS18)
A11PT2C016DA
A. Alignment plate operation

The alignment plate motor/F rotates to open/close the alignment plate/F via the alignment plate belt/F.
The 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/F detects the home position of the alignment plate/F.
The alignment plate motor/R rotates to open/close the alignment plate/R via the alignment plate belt/R.
The 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/R detects the home position of the alignment plate/R.
21
FS-526
7.2.2
Shift control
In normal print and staple mode, the paper is fed into the tray at its center position. If no
stapling is involved in the sort or group copy mode, the alignment plate shifts 15 mm to
the front or rear from the center. This stacks copy sets/stacks in a saw tooth manner,
each being offset by about 30 mm with respect to the others.
Alignment
plate/R
<Normal/Staple>
<Shift operation>
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
30 mm
Alignment
plate/F
A11PT2C027DA
22
A. Shift operation
Under sort/group copy mode, after a specified period of time the 2 staples stacker sensor
detected the trailing edge of paper, the alignment plate motor/R and /F are turned ON to
shift the alignment plate/R and /F.
At the moment when the paper output roller motor is turned OFF, i.e. it finishes moving
down, the alignment motor/F is turned ON. After a specified period of time, the alignment
motor/R is turned ON to open the alignment plate/F and alignment plate/R.
These operations are repeated for every paper to shift it.
FS-526
To the main tray
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Alignment plate/R
Alignment plate/F
Alignment plate/F
To the main tray

Alignment plate/R

A11PT2C018DA
23
FS-526
7.2.3
Alignment section transport mechanism
When the paddle motor is driven, it makes the rewind paddle and paddle 1/2 rotate to
transfer paper conveyed from the main body to the alignment section.
The paper conveyed from the main body drops under its own weight and the paper is
transferred to the alignment section. However, as the paper conveyance performance is
incomplete, the rewind paddle motor is driven to push the rewind paddle downward and
transfer the paper to the alignment section.
Rewind paddle
Paddle motor (M16)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paddle 2
Rewind paddle motor

(M18)
Paddle 2
Paddle 1
A11PT2C021DA
24
Drive
Stapler position sensor/3 (PS52)

2 staples stapler movement motor (M13)
FS-526
8.1
STAPLER

Stapler drive rack
A11PT2C023DA
25
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
8.
8. STAPLER
8. STAPLER
FS-526
8.2
8.2.1
Operation
Stapler movement
A. Stapler movement operation

The 2 staples stapler movement motor moves the stapler.
The rotation of the 2 staples stapler movement motor makes the belt rotate the gear,
causing the stapler drive rack to operate with the stapler.
The stapler position sensor/4 becomes the staplers home position. In 2 staples mode,
the stapler stops at the stapler position sensor/3 and stapler position sensor/2 to staple
sheets. In the one-corner stapling mode, the stapler stops at the stapler position sensor/
1 to staple sheets.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

2 staples stapler movement motor (M13)

Stapler drive rack
A11PT2C024DA
B. Stapler movement control

With the FS start signal from the main body, the 2 staples stapler movement motor is
turned ON and the stapler moves to the standby position and stops.
26

8.2.2
8. STAPLER
Stapler control
A. Stapling operation
In the stapling operation, the 2 staples stapler motor drives the clincher side to press the
paper. Then, the staple is pushed out from the stapler side and bent at the clincher side.
FS-526
The stapling operation is performed by the 2 staples stapler motor.
Stapler (clincher side)
Paper
Stapler (stapler side)

A11PT2C025DA
27
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
2 staples stapler
motor (M14)
FS-526
8. STAPLER
B. Staple control
(1) Stapling
After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the 2 staples stapler
motor performs the stapling operation.
The stapling operation is completed when the stapler position sensor/4 in the stapler
detects the home position and turn ON.
(2) Clogged staple detection
During the stapling operation, it is determined that the staple has been clogged and the 2
staples stapler motor turns OFF if the stapler position sensor/4 does not turn ON after a
specified period of time since they turn OFF.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
(3) Cartridge detection

The cartridge set switch detects the presence of a cartridge or the incorrect setting of a
cartridge.
When no cartridge is set or it is set incorrectly, the main body displays the error message
on its display panel.
(4) Staple detection control
When the staples run out, the staple empty switch turns ON and the main body displays
the error message on its display panel.
28
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

SD-508
CONTENTS
SD-508
1.
2.
PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 3
2.1
Folding/saddle stitching ........................................................................................ 3
2.2
Tri-folding .............................................................................................................. 4
OUTLINE
OUTLINE
3.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 5
4.
ALIGNMENT SECTION .......................................................................................... 6
4.1
Drive ..................................................................................................................... 6
4.2
Operation .............................................................................................................. 7
4.2.1
Alignment ...................................................................................................... 7
4.2.2
Stopper ......................................................................................................... 9
5.
STAPLER .............................................................................................................. 13
5.1
Drive ................................................................................................................... 13
5.2
Operation ............................................................................................................ 14
5.2.1
Stapler movement ....................................................................................... 14
5.2.2
Stapling ....................................................................................................... 16
6.
FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING .................................................. 18
6.1
Drive ................................................................................................................... 18
6.2
Operation ............................................................................................................ 19
6.2.1
Folding knife ................................................................................................ 19
6.2.2
Folding transfer ........................................................................................... 20
6.2.3
Tri-folding gate............................................................................................. 21
7.
EXIT SECTION ..................................................................................................... 22
7.1
Drive ................................................................................................................... 22
7.2
Operation ............................................................................................................ 23
7.2.1
Exit .............................................................................................................. 23
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OUTLINE
SD-508
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
SD-508
1.
Name
Saddle sticher SD-508
Type
Built into the finisher
Installation
Screwed to the finisher
Document alignment
Center
Stapling function
Center parallel two points
OUTLINE
A. Type
B. Paper
(1) Saddle stitching
Type
Plain paper, Thick paper 1, Thick paper 2
Size
A3, B4, A4S, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x 11S, 8KS
Min: 210 mm x 279 mm , 8-1/4 x 11
Max: 314 mm x 458 mm, 12-1/4 x 18
20 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 ,16 to 21.25 lb)
Max. saddle stitching capacity
16 sheets (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ,21.5 to 24 lb)

19 sheets 80 g/m2 ,21.25 lb) + 1 sheet (209 g/m2 , 55.5 lb)
(2) Folding
Type
Plain paper
Size
A3, B4, A4S, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x 11S, 8KS
Min: 210 mm x 279 mm , 8-1/4 x 11
Max: 314 mm x 458 mm, 12-1/4 x 18
Max. number of sheets folded together 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ,16 to 24 lb)
(3) Tri-folding
Type
Plain paper
Size
A4S, 8-1/2 x 11S, 16KS
Max. number of sheets folded together 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ,16 to 24 lb) *
*: It is not guaranteed when folding together more than 2 sheets.

Power requirements
DC 24 V (supplied from the finisher)

DC 5 V
Max. power consumption
40 W or less
Dimensions
281.3 mm (W) x 596.4 mm (D) x 529.8 mm (H)

Weight
Approx. 22.6 kg + 3.8 kg (Exit tray)

Approx. 49.75 lb + 8.5 lb (Exit tray)
SD-508
E. Consumables
Staples 5000 (MS-5C)
OUTLINE
NOTE
Folding/saddle stitching
SD-508
2.1
PAPER FEED PATH
OUTLINE
2.
2. PAPER FEED PATH
A11RT1C001DA
2. PAPER FEED PATH
Tri-folding
OUTLINE
SD-508
2.2
A11RT1C002DA
3. CONFIGURATION
SD-508
CONFIGURATION
Alignment section
Stapler
Exit section
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
3.
A11RT2C001DA
4.
SD-508
4.1
ALIGNMENT SECTION
Drive
Leading edge
stopper
Alignment plate/R
Alignment plate/F
Center staple alignment

motor/R (M21)

motor/F (M20)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Leading edge stopper motor (M22)

Leading edge stopper
A11RT2C002DA
4.2.1
Operation
Alignment
In the folding/saddle stitching/tri-folding mode, the center staple alignment motor/F and
/R aligns paper.
The center staple alignment motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to move the
alignment plates and align paper.
The leading edge stopper motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to make the
leading edge stopper oscillate and align paper in the sub scanning direction.
SD-508
4.2
Alignment plate/F
Alignment plate/R

motor home sensor/R
(PS31)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

motor home sensor/F
(PS30)
Center staple alignment motor/F (M20)
Center staple alignment motor/R (M21)

A11RT2C003DA
A. Alignment operation
The center staple alignment motor/F and /R rotate to open/close the alignment plates via
the alignment belts.
The center staple alignment motor home sensor/F and /R detect the home position of the
alignment plates.
The leading edge stopper motor rotates to make the leading edge stopper oscillate via
the belt.
SD-508
B. Alignment control
Transmitting the FNS signal from the main body, the center staple alignment motor/F and
/R rotate to close the alignment plates, and then they stop the alignment plates at the
standby position that is a little wider than the paper width.
The center staple alignment motor/F and /R perform the alignment operation by rotating
in the forward and reverse direction to move the alignment plate back and forth after a
specified period of time since the center staple pass sensor detects the trailing edge of
the paper.
The leading edge stopper motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to make the
leading edge stopper oscillate and align paper in the sub scanning direction. (This is
made from the 11th sheet of paper.)
The alignment operation is performed for every paper.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Center staple pass sensor

(PS12)
motor/R (M21)
Center staple alignment motor
home sensor/R (PS31)
motor/F (M20)
Center staple alignment motor
Leading edge stopper motor
(M22)
Closing the alignment
plate (FNS signal)
Standby position of
the alignment plate
Alignment operation for

every paper
A11RT2E019DB

Stopper
At the leading edge stopper, papers in sub scanning direction are aligned, and papers
conveyed to the aligning section are conveyed to the specified position.
The exit grip holds the paper when shifting it to the specified position and when stapling
papers.
The stopping position in vertical direction of paper conveyed to the alignment section is
different among the folding mode, the saddle stitching mode, and the tri-folding mode.
SD-508
4.2.2
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A. Stopper operation
The leading edge stopper motor moves the leading edge stopper up and down in accordance with the paper size. The leading edge stopper home sensor detects the home
position.

Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS32)
Exit grip
Exit grip
Exit grip solenoid (SD6)

A11RT2C005DA
SD-508
B. Stopper control
(1) Folding mode
After a specified period of time since the last sheet of paper was aligned, the exit grip
solenoid is turned ON and the sheets of paper are held in place.
After the sheets are held in place, the leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the
leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the folding position.
After a specified period of time since the center fold knife home sensor was turned ON,
the transport motor is turned ON and it starts rotating at low speed. At the moment when
the transport motor is accelerated to high speed, the leading edge stopper motor starts
rotating to move the leading edge stopper up to the alignment position in accordance
with the paper size and stand by for the paper of the subsequent copy.

motor/R (M21)
motor/F (M20)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

(M22)
Center fold knife motor (M32)
Center fold knife home sensor
(PS34)
Transport motor
(M33)
High speed
Low speed
Last paper of the copy aligned
Moving to the folding

position for the paper
size
Moving to stand by for the

paper of the subsequent copy
A11RT2E020DA
10
(2) Saddle stitching mode

leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the saddle stitching position.
After a specified period of time since stapling operation was completed, the center staple
alignment motor/F and /R opens the alignment plates and the leading edge stopper
motor starts rotating to move the leading edge stopper further down and lower the paper
to the folding position.
After a specified period of time since the center fold knife home sensor was turned ON,
the transport motor is turned ON and it starts rotating at low speed. At the moment when
the transport motor is accelerated to high speed, the leading edge stopper motor starts
rotating to move the leading edge stopper up to the alignment position in accordance
with the paper size and stand by for the paper of the subsequent copy.
Moving to stand by for the

paper of the subsequent copy
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Center staple alignment motor/R

(M21)
Center staple alignment motor/F
(M20)
(M22)
Center staple motor (M23)
Staple motor (M24)
(PS34)
Transport motor
(M33)
High speed
Low speed
Moving to the saddle stitching
position for the paper size
SD-508
Stapling operation
Moving to the folding

A11RT2E021DA
11
SD-508
(3) Tri-folding mode

leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the 1st folding position in the tri-folding.
At the moment when the center fold knife home sensor is turned ON, the transport motor
is turned ON to start rotating at low speed. At the moment when the transport motor is
accelerated to middle speed, the leading edge stopper motor starts rotating to move the
leading edge stopper up to the alignment position in accordance with the paper size and
stand by for the paper of the subsequent copy.

(M21)
(M20)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

(M22)
Tri-folding change solenoid
(SD5)
(PS34)
High speed
Transport motor
(M33)
Middle speed
Low speed
Moving to the 1st folding
Moving to the alignment position

for the subsequent copy
A11RT2E022DA
12
Drive
SD-508
5.1
STAPLER
Stapler
Clincher
Timing belt
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
5.
5. STAPLER
Stapler home sensor (PS33)

A11RT2C009DA
13
5. STAPLER
SD-508
5.2
5.2.1
Operation
Stapler movement

The center staple motor moves the stapler.
The stapler and the clincher are mounted at the timing belt.
The stapler home sensor detects the distance between the stapler and the clincher.
Staple motor (M24)
Stapler
Clincher
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Timing belt
Stapler home sensor (PS33)

A11RT2C009DA
14
5. STAPLER
B. Stapler movement control

At the moment when the center staple alignment motor /F is turned OFF, the center staple motor starts rotating to move the stapler to the front side.
After a specified period of time since the staple motor was turned OFF, the center staple
motor starts rotating and moves the stapler to the rear side.
After a specified period of time since the center fold knife motor was turned OFF, the center staple motor starts rotating to move the stapler to the paper passage center position.
SD-508

(M21)
(M20)
Staple motor (M24)
Moving to the stapling position

(front size) for the paper size
Moving to the paper passage

center position for the paper size
Moving to the stapling position (rear size) for the paper size
A11RT2E023DA
15
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
5. STAPLER
5.2.2

Stapling
SD-508
The stapling operation is performed by the stapler motor and the clincher motor.
In the stapling operation, the stapler motor in the stapler pushes out the paper press section to the clincher by the cam mechanism to hold the paper and punch out the staple.
Then, the clincher motor in the stapler bends the staple.
Paper
Stapler
Cam
mechanism
Clincher
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper press
section
Staple
Staple
A11RT2C012DA
16
5. STAPLER
SD-508
B. Staple control
(1) Stapling
After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the staple motor performs the stapling operation.
After a specified period of time, the clincher motor bends the staple.
The stapling operation is completed when the stapler home sensor detects the home
position and turn ON.
(3) Cartridge detection

The cartridge set switch detects the presence of a cartridge or the incorrect setting of a
cartridge.
When no cartridge is set or it is set incorrectly, the main body displays the error message
on its display panel.
(4) Staple detection control
When the staples run out, the staple empty switch turns ON and the main body displays
the error message on its display panel.
17
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

During the stapling operation, it is determined that the staple has been clogged and the
center staple motor rotates in the reverse direction to replace the stapler to the home
position if the stapler home sensor does not turn ON after a specified period of time
since it turn OFF.
6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING
SD-508
6.
6.1
FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING
Drive
Tri-folding change solenoid (SD5)
Tri-folding gate
Folding roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Folding knife
Tri-folding roller

A11RT2C013DA
18
6.2.1
Operation
Folding knife
SD-508
6.2
The center fold knife motor drives the folding knife.

The folding knife is used in the folding/saddle stitching/tri-folding mode.
In the tri-folding mode, it is used at the 1st folding.
A. Folding knife operation
The center fold knife motor rotates the crank shaft a half turn via the gear and pushes the
paper to the nip section with the folding knife.
The folding rollers draw and fold the paper.
The position of the leading edge stopper controls the folding position.
Fold knife
Paper
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Folding roller
Center fold knife

home sensor (PS34)
A11RT2C014DA
B. Folding knife control

The center fold knife motor turns ON and sticks out the folding knife to the paper after a
specified period of time since the leading edge stopper stops at the folding position.
The center fold knife motor stops when the folding knife reciprocates and the center fold
knife home sensor turns OFF.
19
SD-508
6.2.2
Folding transfer
The transport motor drives the folding roller.

Then, the folding roller drives the tri-folding roller.
A. Folding transfer control
The center fold knife motor turns ON after a specified period of time since the leading
edge stopper stops at the folding position.
When the center fold knife motor turns ON the center fold knife home sensor, the transport motor turns ON and drives the folding roller to perform the 1st folding and the tri-folding roller to perform the 2nd folding at the tri-folding operation, and then it exits the paper
to the exit tray.
The transport motor stops after a specified period of time since the fold sensor detects
the trailing edge of the paper bundle.
Paper pressed to the folding roller by the folding knife

(M22)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

(PS34)
Transport motor
(M33)
High speed
Low speed
Fold sensor (PS27)

Leading edge stopper moved
Paper fold
A11RT2E024DA
20

Tri-folding gate
The tri-folding gate switches between the folding/saddle stitching path and the tri-folding
path.
The tri-folding change solenoid drives the tri-folding gate.
SD-508
6.2.3
A. Tri-folding 2nd folding operation

The tri-folding change solenoid drives the tri-folding gate to switch the paper path to the
tri-folding path for leading the paper exited from the folding roller to the tri-folding stopper.
To perform the 2nd folding, the loop formed when the paper contacts with the tri-folding
stopper are drawn between the folding roller and the tri-folding roller. Then the paper is
exited to the exit tray.
The position of the tri-folding stopper determines the folding position in the 2nd folding.
Tri-folding stopper
Tri-folding change solenoid (SD5)

Fold sensor (PS27)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Folding roller
Tri-folding
roller
Loop
Tri-folding roller
Exit tray
A11RT2C016DA
B. Tri-folding gate control

After the leading edge stopper stops at the tri-folding position, the tri-folding change solenoid turns ON and drives the tri-folding gate to switch the paper path to the tri-folding
stopper.
The tri-folding change solenoid turns OFF after a specified period of time since the fold
sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper bundle.
21
7. EXIT SECTION
SD-508
7.
7.1
EXIT SECTION
Drive
Lift up switch (SW3)
Belt
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
SD exit sensor/PR (PS29)
SD exit full sensor

(PS35)
SD exit upper limit sensor (PS41)
Exit motor (M34)

SD exit sensor/LED (PS28)
A11RT2C017DA
22
7.2.1
Operation
Exit
Turn ON the exit motor to drive the belt and convey papers by each copy set.
Press the lift up switch of ahead of the exit tray to covey papers to ahead of the exit tray
randomly.
SD-508
7.2
7. EXIT SECTION
A. Exit drive
The exit motor rotates the belt and conveys exited papers.
C. Exit tray full detection

The SD exit upper limit sensor and the SD exit full sensor detect the exit tray paper full.
It determines the exit tray is full if the exited paper shields the SD exit upper limit sensor
and the SD exit full sensor for the specified period of time.
Paper
Belt
SD exit upper limit sensor (PS41)

SD exit full sensor (PS35)
A11RT2C018DA
23
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
B. Exit control
After a specified period of time since the SD exit sensor/LED and /PR was turned ON,
the exit motor starts rotating to turn the belt.
After a specified period of time since the SD exit full sensor was turned OFF, the exit
motor stops.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
SD-508
7. EXIT SECTION
Blank Page
24
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

PK-516
CONTENTS
PK-516
1.
2.
UNIT CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................... 2
3.
PAPER PATH........................................................................................................... 3
PUNCH SECTION .................................................................................................. 5
4.1
Configuration ........................................................................................................ 5
4.2
Drive ..................................................................................................................... 6
4.2.1
Punch shift drive ........................................................................................... 6
4.2.2
Punch drive ................................................................................................... 7
4.3
Operation .............................................................................................................. 9
4.3.1
Punch standby position movement control ................................................... 9
4.3.2
Punch position correction control ................................................................ 10
4.3.3
Punch control .............................................................................................. 11
5.
PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION ........................................................................ 15
5.1
Configuration ...................................................................................................... 15
5.2
Drive ................................................................................................................... 15
5.3
Operation ............................................................................................................ 15
5.3.1
Punch scraps box control............................................................................ 15
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
4.
OUTLINE
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OUTLINE
PK-516
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
PK-516
1.
A. Type
Name
Punch unit
Type
FS-integrated type punching operation device
Punching method
Stops and punches every paper
No. of holes
2-3 holes / 2-4 holes / 4 holes
Hole diameter/pitch
2 holes / 8.0 mm / 70 mm pitch - 3 holes / 6.5 mm / 108 mm pitch

4 holes / 6.5 mm / 70 mm, 21 mm pitch
Supported mode
Punch mode, through mode
Applicable post processing

mode
Sort, group, staple
OUTLINE
B. Functions
C. Paper type
2 hole/Sweden 4 hole punch setting:
A3, B4, A4/A4S, B5/B5S, A5/A5S,
8 x 13, 8 x 13S, 8-1/4 x 13, 8-1/2 x 13, 8-1/8 x 13-1/4, 11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14,
8-1/2 x 11/8-1/2 x 11S, 5-1/2 x 8-1/2, 5-1/2 x 8-1/2S, 8K, 16K/16KS
Size
7-1/4 x 10-1/2, 7-1/4 x 10-1/2S, 8-2/3 x 13S, 8-1/2 x 13S, 8-1/4 x 13S,
8-1/8 x 13-1/4S, 8-1/2 x 13-1/2S
3 hole/4 hole punch setting:
A3, B4, A4, B5
11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8K, 16K
Supported paper
Plain paper, bond paper, colored paper, coated paper

(Main unit specifications prioritized)
Weight
60 to 300 g/m2 (16 to 80 lb)
Punch prohibited paper
Label paper, tab paper, transparency film, 2nd base paper, holed paper,
and the other paper that may interfere with the operation of the punch unit
or the punch blade
D. Machine specifications
Power requirements

Max. power consumption
30 W or less
Dimensions
146.2 mm (W) x 639.2 mm (D) x 233.8 mm (H)

Weight
4.5 kg (9.92 lb)
E. Operating environment
NOTE
2. UNIT CONFIGURATION
UNIT CONFIGURATION
PK-516
2.
OUTLINE
Punch section
Punch scraps box section
A11TT2C001DA
PK-516
PAPER PATH
Punch unit
OUTLINE
3.
3. PAPER PATH
Paper path from

the main body
Punch scraps box
A11TT2C002DA
OUTLINE
PK-516
3. PAPER PATH
Blank Page
4. PUNCH SECTION
4.1
PUNCH SECTION
PK-516
4.
Configuration
Punch unit
Punch blade
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Entrance roller
Punch blade
Punch unit
Front
A11TT2E011DA
NOTE
North America, Europe and Sweden are same configuration except for a number of
blades.
4. PUNCH SECTION
4.2
PK-516
4.2.1
Drive
Punch shift drive
Punch oscillating motor (M302)

Guide shaft
Punch blade
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch unit
Belt
Rack
Front
A11TT2E012DA

4.2.2
4. PUNCH SECTION
Punch drive
PK-516
A. North America (2 to 3 holes)
Punch drive motor (M301)
Punch blades for

the 3-hole punch
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch blades for

the 2-hole punch
Slot
Punch drive plate
Front
A11TT2E013DA
B. Europe (2 to 4 holes)
Punch blades for

the 4-hole punch
Punch blades for the

2 and 4-hole punch
Slot
Punch drive plate
Front
A11TT2E014DA
4. PUNCH SECTION
PK-516
C. PK-516 for Sweden (4 holes)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch blades for the 4-hole punch
Slot
Punch drive plate
Front
A11TT2E015DA
4.3.1
Operation
Punch standby position movement control
Turning ON the device, the punch oscillating motor rotates to move the punch unit to the
home position until the PK punch oscillating home sensor turns ON.
After selecting a punch mode, one of five sensors corresponded to each paper size detects
a paper and the punch unit is shifted.
The punch unit returns to the home position at the end of the job.
PK-516
4.3
4. PUNCH SECTION
<Example: A4 size>
Punch blade
Side edge reference position
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch unit
Paper transfer direction
Paper
A11TT2E016DA
NOTE
The paper size detect board is positioned on the front side and its operation is
contrary to that in the above illustration on the right and left sides.
4. PUNCH SECTION
PK-516
4.3.2
Punch position correction control
For the punch unit positioned from the side edge of the paper to the inside, the punch position is adjusted in the following procedure so that punching is made to the center of paper
at all times. The punch position correction is operated by moving the punch unit back and
forth while conveying the paper.
When the FNS pass sensor detects the leading edge of the paper, the punch unit is
moved to the front side until the paper size detect board detects the side edge of the
paper.
Then, the punch unit is moved to the rear side until the paper size detect board detects
the side edge of the paper (the side edge reference position detection).
Once it detects the side edge reference position, the punch unit is moved further so that
the center of the punch blade is positioned to the center of the paper. The moving distance and its direction are depending on the paper size.
Center of the punch blade
<Example: A4 size>
Punch blades
Side edge reference position
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch unit
Front side
Rear side
Punch unit moving direction
Paper
transfer
direction
Center of the paper
Paper
A11TT2E017DA
NOTE
The paper size detect board is positioned on the front side and its operation is
contrary to that in the above illustration on the right and left sides.
10

Punch control
A. Registration loop control

The transport motor/1 turns OFF temporarily to stop conveyance of paper when the specified time has passed since paper exit sensor detected the leading edge of the paper. Thus
the paper is pressed against the entrance roller forming a loop to correct the bend. When
the specified time has passed, the transport motor/1 turns ON to restart conveying the
paper.
The above operation is not performed when conveying a large paper and in the non-punching mode.
Entrance roller
PK-516
4.3.3
4. PUNCH SECTION
Entrance roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Loop
PK
A11TT2C008DA
11
PK-516
4. PUNCH SECTION
B. Punch control
Transmitting the start signal from the main body, the transport motor/1 rotates.
In the punch mode, the transport motor/1 stops temporarily a specified period of time after
the FNS pass sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper.
At the same time, the punch drive motor is driven to move the punch drive plate horizontally. The punch drive plate has slots to shift punch blades up and down. Punch blades
moving downward conduct the punch operation. The punch drive motor stops and the
punch operation is completed when the PK punch home sensor turns ON.
The transport motor/1 rotates again to convey the paper a specified period of time after it
stops temporarily.
North America (2 to 3 holes)
Punch driver motor (M301)
Punch blade
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch unit
PK punch home
sensor (PS301)
Slot
Punch drive plate
Front
A11TT2E018DA
12
4. PUNCH SECTION
PK-516
Europe (2 to 4 holes)

Punch blade
Punch unit
Slot
Punch drive plate
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
PK punch home
sensor (PS301)
Front
A11TT2E019DA
13
4. PUNCH SECTION
PK-516
Sweden (4 holes)

Punch blades
Punch unit
Slot
Punch drive plate
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
PK punch home
sensor (PS301)
Front
A11TT2E020DA
14
5.1
PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION

Configuration
PK-516
5.
5. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
PK punch scraps box

full sensor (PS302)
Punch scraps box

PK punch scraps box
set sensor (PS304)
Front
A11TT2E021DA
5.2
Drive
The punch scraps box section comprises no moving parts.
5.3
5.3.1
Operation
Punch scraps box control
A. Punch scraps box full detection

The punch scraps generated by the punch operation falls in the punch scraps box. The PK
punch scraps box full sensor turns ON and transmits the no punch scraps box information
to the main body when the punch scraps box becomes full of punch scraps.
B. Punch scraps box detection
The PK punch scraps box set sensor detects whether the punch scraps box is set or not.
The PK punch scraps box set sensor turns OFF and transmits the no punch scraps box
information to the main body if the punch scraps box is not set.
15
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
PK-516
5. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION
Blank Page
16
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

JS-602
CONTENTS
JS-602
OUTLINE
2.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
3.
CENTER CROSS SECTION................................................................................... 4
4.
MECHANICAL OPERATION ................................................................................... 5

Job tray paper transport mechanism .................................................................... 5
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
4.1
OUTLINE
1.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OUTLINE
JS-602
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
JS-602
1.
A. Type
Job separator
Type
Add-on finishing device externally mounted on top of finisher
Installation
Fixed to finisher
Document alignment
Center
OUTLINE
Name
B. Functions
Modes
Group, Sort (during copy, print, or fax mode)
C. Paper type
Type
Size
Weight
Tray capacity
100 sheets:
Plain paper
A5S to A3
5-1/2 8-1/2S to
11 17
60 to 90 g/m2
16 to 24 lb
A4, 8-1/2 11 (80 g/m2, 21.25 lb)

50 sheets:
except A4, 8-1/2 11 (80 g/m2, 21.25 lb)
(Height: up to 28 mm, 1.1 inch)
Power requirements
DC 5 V, DC 24 V (supplied from finisher)
Dimensions
341 mm (W) 537 mm (D) 149 mm (H)

13.43 inch (W) 21.14 inch (D) 5.87 inch (H)
Weight
1.75 kg (3.86 lb)
NOTE
OUTLINE
JS-602
Blank Page
2. CONFIGURATION
Job tray
JS-602
CONFIGURATION
Job separator cover
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
2.
A01CT2C001DA
3. CENTER CROSS SECTION
JS-602
3.
CENTER CROSS SECTION

Job separator exit roll
Job separator exit roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Job separator transport roller

Job separator transport roll
A01CT2C002DA
4.1
MECHANICAL OPERATION
Job tray paper transport mechanism
The job separator transport roller and job separator exit roller turn to transport the paper
into the job tray as the motor is energized.
The 3rd entrance switching solenoid is energized to select the paper path into the job
tray.
JS-602
4.
4. MECHANICAL OPERATION
Job separator exit roller

Job separator transport roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper
Bypass transport motor

(M3-FN)
SD404
3rd entrance switching solenoid

(SD404)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
JS-602
4. MECHANICAL OPERATION
Blank Page
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

PI-505
CONTENTS
PI-505
1.
2.
PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 2
2.1
Auto sheet feeding (online operation) ................................................................... 2
2.2
Manual sheet feeding (offline operation) .............................................................. 2
OUTLINE
OUTLINE
3.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
4.
PAPER FEED SECTION ......................................................................................... 4
4.1
Drive ..................................................................................................................... 4
4.1.1
Paper feed drive ............................................................................................ 4
4.1.2
Tray lift drive .................................................................................................. 5
4.2
Operation .............................................................................................................. 6
4.2.1
Tray lift mechanism ....................................................................................... 6
4.2.2
Pick-up mechanism....................................................................................... 7
4.2.3
Separation mechanism ................................................................................. 8
4.2.4
Registration control ....................................................................................... 9
4.2.5
Paper size detection control........................................................................ 10
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OUTLINE
PI-505
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
PI-505
1.
A. Type
Name
Post inserter
Type
Torque limiter separation type seat feeding device
Auto sheet feeding

(online operation)
Feeds the sheet to finisher automatically under the instruction from the main
body.
Manual sheet feeding

(offline operation)
Feeds the sheet to finisher under the instruction from the operation panel of PI.
You can select the following 5 post processing modes:
1 staple/back mode
2 staples (flat-stapling) mode
Punch mode (when PK-516 is installed on finisher)
Saddle stitching mode (when SD-508 is installed on finisher)
Tri-folding mode (when SD-508 is installed on finisher)
C. Paper type
Size
Tray /Up
A4/A4S, B5/B5S, A5
8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2S, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 311.1 x 297 mm, Min. 182 x 139 mm)
Tray /Lw
A3, B4, A4/A4S, B5/B5S, A5

8 x 13S, 8 1/4 x 13S, 8 1/2 x 13S, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4S, SRA4S, 12 x 18,
11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 8K, 16K,
16KS, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2S
Custom paper (Max. 311.1 x 457.2 mm, Min. 182 x 139 mm)
Type
Plain paper, recycle paper, color paper, special paper, coated paper,
high-quality paper
Weight
60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 (16 to 55.5 lb)
Capacity
Tray /Up
200 sheets (80 g/m2) and 30 mm or less in height
Tray /Lw
200 sheets (80 g/m2) and 30 mm or less in height
Power requirements
DC 24 V, DC 5 V (supplied from the main body)
Max. power
consumption
30 W or less
Dimensions
511 mm (W) x 635 mm (D) x 220 mm (H)

20.12 inch (W) x 25 inch (D) x 8.66 inch (H)
Weight
10.5 kg (23.15 lb)
NOTE
OUTLINE
B. Functions
2. PAPER FEED PATH
2.
PI-505
2.1
PAPER FEED PATH

Auto sheet feeding (online operation)
OUTLINE
Paper path from the tray /Up
Paper path from the tray /Lw

A10AT1C001DA
2.2
Manual sheet feeding (offline operation)

Paper path from the tray /Lw
A10AT1C002DA
3. CONFIGURATION
Tray /Up section
PI-505
CONFIGURATION
Pick-up /Up section
Separation /Up
section
Transfer
section
Tray /Lw section
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
3.
Pick-up /Lw section

Separation /Lw section
A10AT2C001DA
4. PAPER FEED SECTION
4.
PI-505
4.1
4.1.1
PAPER FEED SECTION

Drive
Paper feed drive
Pick-up solenoid /Up (SD201)
Pick-up roller /Up
Paper feed roller /Up
Pick-up roller /Lw
Transfer clutch /Up (CL201)
Separation roller /Up

Transfer clutch
/Lw (CL202)
Transfer roller
/Up
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Registration
clutch (CL203)
Transfer motor (M203)
Paper feed roller

/Lw
Transfer roller /Lw
Separation roller /Lw
Paper feed roller /Up and /Lw
Pick-up solenoid /Lw (SD202)
Pick-up solenoid /Up, /Lw

(SD201, SD202)
Pick-up roller /Up and /Lw
Front
A10AT2C002DA
PI-505
Tray lift drive
Tray lift motor /Up (M201)
Front
Tray lift motor /Lw (M202)

A10AT2C003DA
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
4.1.2
4.2
PI-505
4.2.1
Operation
Tray lift mechanism
The tray lift motors /Up and /Lw move up and down the trays /Up and /Lw by rotating in
the forward and reverse direction to drive the lift arms /Up and /Lw and move up and
down the lift plates /Up and /Lw, respectively.
At the upper limit positions, the tray upper limit sensors /Up and /Lw detect the actuators
lifted up by the lift plates.
At the lower position of the tray, the tray lower limit sensors /Up and /Lw detect the actuators coupled with the lift arms /Up and /Lw.
Tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS205)
Tray lift plate /Up
Lift arm /Up

Tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS204)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray lift motor

/Up (M201)
Tray upper
limit sensor
/Lw (PS209)
Tray lift plate /Lw
Tray lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210)
Lift arm /Lw

A10AT2C004DA

Pick-up mechanism
The pick-up solenoids /Up and /Lw turn ON to pick up the paper.
The release arm held upward by the spring lifts up the pick-up roller mounting plate to
release the pick-up roller.
When the pick-up solenoids /Up and /Lw turn ON, the release arm moves backward, and
then the pick-up roller mounting plate and the pick-up roller fall down by their own weight.
The pick-up roller driven by the transfer motor presses the paper and picks it up to transfer it to the separation section.
Pick-up roller mounting plate
PI-505
4.2.2
Release arm
Pick-up roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Spring
Pick-up solenoid /Up (SD201)

A10AT2C005DA

4.2.3
Separation mechanism
PI-505
The separation roller is driven to rotate in the opposite direction from the paper transfer
direction. When transferring no or 1 sheet of paper, the separation roller rotates in the
paper transfer direction to transfer the paper to the paper transfer section because the
frictional force between the paper feed roller or the paper and the separation roller is
stronger than the frictional force of the torque limiter.
When transferring 2 or more sheets of paper, the separation roller rotates in the reverse
direction to prevent the bottom sheet from being transferred because the frictional force
between the sheets is stronger than the frictional force of the torque limiter.
Pick-up roller
Paper feed roller
1st sheet
Paper transfer
direction
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
2nd sheet
Torque limiter
Separation roller
A10AT2C006DA

Transmitting the FS start signal, the transfer motor rotates in low speed and the pick-up
solenoids /UP and /Lw turn ON. At the time, the tray lift motors /Up and /Lw rotate in the
forward direction to lift up the trays /Up and /Lw.
The tray lift motors /Up and /Lw stop when the tray upper limit sensors /Up and /Lw turn
ON, and after a specified period of time, the transfer clutches /Up and /Lw turn ON and
the paper is picked up from the tray. Only 1 sheet of paper is transferred by the transfer
roller because of the separation roller.
The transfer motor rotates in high speed when the paper reaches the paper entrance
sensors /Up and /Lw. At the time, the paper is pressed against the transfer roller and
forms a loop because the registration clutch is OFF. After a specified period of time, the
registration clutch turns ON and the transfer motor drives the paper to FS.
The transfer motor switches to rotate in low speed to feed the subsequent paper since
the paper passed the paper entrance sensors /Up and /Lw, and then the registration
clutch turns OFF after a specified period of time.
PI-505
4.2.4
Transfer motor
(M203)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper reached the paper entrance sensors /Up and /Lw

253 mm/s
670 mm/s
Transfer clutch /Lw (CL202)

Tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209)
Pick-up solenoid /Lw (SD202)
Paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206)
Registration clutch (CL203)
FS start signal turned ON
Tray reached at the upper limit

Registration clutch turned ON
Trailing edge of the paper passed the paper entrance sensors /Up and /Lw
A10AT2C007DA
PI-505
4.2.5
The paper size VRs /Up and /Lw coupled with the side guide detects the paper size in
the main scan direction.
The paper set sensors /Up and /Lw and the L size sensor /Lw detects the paper size in
the sub scan direction.
Paper size VR /Up (VR201)
L size sensor /Lw (PS212)
Paper set sensor /Up (PS203)
Side guide plate
Paper size VR /Lw (VR202)
Paper set sensor /Lw (PS208)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A10AT2C008DA
10
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

FS-527
CONTENTS
FS-527
1.
2.
PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 4
2.1
Tray1 ..................................................................................................................... 4
2.2
Tray2 ..................................................................................................................... 5
2.3
Stapling................................................................................................................. 6
OUTLINE
OUTLINE
3.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 7
4.
HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION............................................................... 8
4.1
Configuration ........................................................................................................ 8
4.2
Horizontal conveyance mechanism ...................................................................... 9
4.2.1
Paper conveyance......................................................................................... 9
4.2.2
Conveyance path switching motor mechanism ........................................... 10
5.
CONVEYANCE SECTION .................................................................................... 11
5.1
Configuration ...................................................................................................... 11
5.2
Drive ................................................................................................................... 12
5.3
Operation ............................................................................................................ 13
5.3.1
Upper lower path switching gate ................................................................. 13
5.3.2
Tray1 path switching gate............................................................................ 14
5.3.3
Conveyance operation ................................................................................ 15
6.
EXIT TRAY SECTION ........................................................................................... 18
6.1
Drive ................................................................................................................... 18
6.2
Operation ............................................................................................................ 19
6.2.1
Tray lift......................................................................................................... 19
6.2.2
Exit to tray1 ................................................................................................. 20
6.2.3
Exit to tray2 ................................................................................................. 21
6.2.4
Tray2 shift control ........................................................................................ 23
7.
ALIGNMENT SECTION ........................................................................................ 25
7.1
Drive ................................................................................................................... 25
7.2
Operation ............................................................................................................ 26
8.
7.2.1
Alignment plate ........................................................................................... 26
7.2.2
Alignment section conveyance mechanism ................................................ 27
STAPLER .............................................................................................................. 28
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OUTLINE
FS-527
ii
8.1
Drive ................................................................................................................... 28
8.2
Operation............................................................................................................ 29
8.2.1
Stapler movement....................................................................................... 29
8.2.2
Stapler control............................................................................................. 30
OUTLINE
FS-527
1.
Name
Multi staple finisher
Type
Freestanding
Document
alignment
Center
Consumables
Staples
OUTLINE
A. Type
B. Functions
Modes
Sort, group, offset, group offset, sort staple
C. Paper type
(1) Non sort/sort/group
Type
Size
Weight
Max. capacity
Exit
tray1
Plain paper
Recycled
paper
A6S, A5S/A5, B5S/B5,

B6S, A4S/A4, B4, A3,
A3Wide
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S/5 1/2 x 8 1/2,
8 1/2 x 11S/8 1/2 x 11,
8 1/2 x 14, 11 x 17,
12 1/4 x 18
Envelope
Tray1 (Sub tray)
OHP
Max.
transparencies
311.15 mm x 1200 mm
Label
12.25 x 47.24 inch
Min.
Letterhead
90 mm x 139.7 mm
Thick paper 1 3.54 x 5.5 inch
Tray2 (Main tray)
Thick paper 1+ Max.
311.15 mm x 457.2 mm
Thick paper 2 12.25 x 18 inch
Min.
100 mm x 139.7 mm
Thick paper 3
3.94 x 5.5 inch
60 to 90 g/m2
16 to 24 lb
A4S, 8 /2 x 11S
or less
3,000
Exit
tray2
B4, 8 1/2 x 14
or greater
1,500
sheets
A5S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S

or less
500
sheets
sheets
91 to 120 g/m2
24.25 to 32 lb
121 to 157 g/m2
32.25 to 41.75 lb
20 sheets
158 to 209 g/m2

42 to 55.5 lb
210 to 256 g/m2
55.75 to 68 lb
257 to 300 g/m2
68.25 to 80 lb
Thick paper 4
Long size
paper *
200 sheets
1
210 mm to 297 mm x
457.2 mm to 1200 mm
127 to 160 g/m2

33.75 to 42.5 lb
*: Long size paper is available only for non-sort mode.
(2) Sort offset/group offset

FS-527
Type
Size
Weight
OUTLINE
A5, B5S/B5, A4S/A4, B4,

A3, A3Wide
Plain paper 8 1/2 x 11S/8 1/2 x 11,
Recycled
8 1/2 x 14, 11 x 17, 12 1/4 x 18
paper
Max.
311.15 mm x 457.2 mm
12.25 x 18 inch
Min.
Thick paper 182 mm x 148.5 mm
7.17 x 5.85 inch
60 to 90 g/m2
16 to 24 lb
Max. capacity
Exit
tray2
3,000
A4S, 8 1/2 x 11S

or less
sheets *
B4, 8 1/2 x 14
or greater
1,500
sheets
A5
500
sheets
91 to 300 g/m2
24.25 to 80 lb
*: 2,000 sheets when SD-509 is mounted

(3) Sort staple
Max. capacity
Type
Size
No. of sheets
A4S,
to be stapled 8-1/2 X 11S
or less
Weight
2 to 9
sheets
A5, B5S/B5, A4S/A4,
Plain paper B4, A3
8 1/2 x 11S/8 1/2 x 11,
Recycled
8 1/2 x 14, 11 x 17
paper
Max.
297 mm x 431.8 mm
11.75 x 17 inch
Min.
182 mm x 148.5 mm
7.25 x 5.75 inch
Thick
paper
60 to 90 g/m
16 to 24 lb
91 to 209 g/m2
24.25 to 55.5 lb
Max.
No. of
B4,
sheets
8-1/2 X 14
to be
or greater stapled
100 copies 50 copies
10 to 20
50 copies
sheets
50 copies
Exit 21 to 30
30 copies
tray2 sheets
30 copies
31 to 40
25 copies
sheets
25 copies
41 to 50
20 copies
sheets
20 copies
50
sheets
30
sheets
15
sheets
D. Stapling
Stapling position
Manual staple
A4, A3
8 1/2 x 11, 11 x 17
Back/Front of the corner

(35 degree)
B5, B4

(Parallel)
A4S, B5S, A5
8 1/2 x 11S, 8 1/2 x 14
Side: Parallel 2 point
A4S/A4, A3, B5S/B5, B4, A5

8 1/2 x 11S/8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 11 x 17
FS-527
Dedicated staple cartridge (5000 staples)

(45 degree)
OUTLINE
Staple filling mode
None
E. Machine specifications
Power
requirements
DC 24 V 10 % (supplied from the main body)
Max. power
consumption
56 W or less
Dimensions
528 (W) x 641 (D) x 1,025 (H) mm

20.79 (W) x 25.24 (D) x 40.35 (H) inch
658 (W) x 641 (D) x 1,087 (H) mm *
25.91 (W) x 25.24 (D) x 42.8 (H) inch *
Weight
42 kg (92.59 lb)
*: Size when the paper output tray is pulled out

F. Operating environment
2. PAPER FEED PATH
2.
FS-527
2.1
PAPER FEED PATH

Tray1
Tray1
Tray1 exit roller
OUTLINE
Tray1 path switching gate

conveyance unit
A0HRT1C001DB
Bypass route
FS-527
Tray2
Upper lower path switching gate
OUTLINE
2.2
2. PAPER FEED PATH
Tray2
conveyance unit
A0HRT1C002DB
2. PAPER FEED PATH
Stapling
FS-527
2.3
OUTLINE
Bypass route
Tray2
conveyance unit
Tray2 exit roller
Alignment section
Stapler
A0HRT1C003DB
3. CONFIGURATION
3.
CONFIGURATION
The following sections are combined in a single unit: the horizontal conveyance section,
conveyance section, alignment section, tray1, tray2, and stapler section.
Alignment section
Conveyance section
Horizontal conveyance
section
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray1
FS-527
Tray2
Stapler section
A0HRT2C002DB
4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION
4.
HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION
4.1
FS-527
Configuration
The horizontal conveyance section is composed of the duplex path switching sensor,
paper passage sensor/1, horizontal conveyance cover sensor, paper passage sensor/2,
paper passage motor/1, and duplex path switching motor.
Duplex path switching motor (M2)
Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper passage
motor/1 (M1)
Duplex path switching sensor (PS3)
Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2)

Horizontal conveyance cover
sensor (PS5)
A0HRT2C001DA
4.2.1
Horizontal conveyance mechanism

Paper conveyance
In the horizontal conveyance section, the paper passage motor/1 drives the conveyance
rollers to convey paper fed out from the fusing section of the main body to the finisher.
FS-527
4.2
Horizontal conveyance section
Main body side
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Finisher side
Paper passage motor/1 (M1)
Conveyance roller
A0HRT2C003DA
FS-527
4.2.2
Conveyance path switching motor mechanism
The horizontal conveyance section is provided with a path switching mechanism for conveying paper fed from the fusing section onto the duplex section or tray3 (when another
option of JS-603 is mounted).
The paper path is changed by the duplex path switching motor and the path switching
guide.
Duplex path switching

sensor (PS3)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Path switching guide
Duplex path switching

motor (M2)
A0HRT2C024DA
A. Operation
The path switching guide swings up or down when the duplex path switching motor is
energized.
The duplex path switching sensor detects the position of the path switching guide.
Path switching guide position
Swung-up position (paper to finisher)
Swung-down position (paper to duplex section)
10
Duplex path switching sensor

Unblocking
Blocking
Configuration
FS-527
5.1
CONVEYANCE SECTION
Tray1 exit roller

Registration
roller
Tray2 exit roller
Switchback roller
Conveyance motor (M4)

Exit motor (M5)
A0HRT2C025DB
11
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
5.
Drive
FS-527
5.2
Tray1 exit roller
Exit motor (M5)

Conveyance motor (M4)
Tray2 exit roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Conveyance
roller 2
Paper passage roller

Exit driven roller
Conveyance roller 1
A0HRT2C004DC
12
5.3.1
Operation
The upper lower path switching gate switches the paper conveyance path that go to individual trays and SD-509.
The paper exit command from the main body moves the upper lower path switching gate
up or down as necessary.
FS-527
5.3
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A. Upper lower path switching gate operation

The upper lower path switching motor drives the upper lower path switching gate.
Upper lower path

switching gate
Upper lower path switching motor (M6)

A0HRT2C005DB
13
FS-527
5.3.2
The tray1 path switching gate changes the path between one toward the tray1 and one
toward the bypass.
A. Tray1 path switching gate operation
The tray1 path switching gate is operated by the tray1 path switching motor.
When the tray1 path switching motor is energized, the tray1 path switching gate swings
up or down.
The tray1 path switching home sensor detects the position of the tray1 path switching
gate, either the swung-up or swung-down position.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray1 path switching

motor (M8)
A0HRT2C006DB
Tray1 path switching home sensor (PS7)
14

Conveyance operation
A. Tray1 conveyance
The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is conveyed via the registration roller, upper lower path switching gate, and tray1 path switching gate. It is then fed
out into the tray1 by the tray1 exit roller.
FS-527
5.3.3

Tray1
Tray1 exit roller
A0HRT2C008DB
B. Tray2 conveyance
The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is conveyed onto the alignment section by way of the registration roller, paper passage roller, switchback roller, and
lower path roller.
Paper passage roller
Tray2
Registration roller
Lower path roller

Switchback roller
A0HRT2C007DB
15
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Registration roller
FS-527
C. Bypass route
The bypass route is provided to eliminate any time loss during stapling operation relative
to the subsequent sheet of paper and to achieve high productivity.
The following describe how two copy sets/stacks are produced as an output, each consisting of two sheets of paper stapled together.
(1) For the 1st copy
The bypass route is not used for the paper path for the first copy set/stack.
(2) For the 2nd copy
The first sheet of paper of the second copy set/stack passes through the path to tray2,
but is fed and temporarily brought into a standby state on the conveyance path to the SD509 by the switchback roller.
The second sheet of paper of the second copy set/stack is then conveyed and fed into
the bypass route.
At the same time that the first copy set/stack is fed out, the first and second sheets of the
second copy set/stack are conveyed onto the alignment section.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Bypass route
Conveyance path to the SD-509

Tray2
Switchback roller
SD-509
A0HRT2C009DB
16
D. Conveyance to SD-509
The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is further conveyed onto the
path toward tray2 and, when the trailing edge of the paper moves past the lower path
sensor, the switchback roller is brought to a temporary stop.
The switchback roller is thereafter turned backward, so that the paper is conveyed into
the SD-509.
FS-527
Lower path sensor (PS9)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Switchback roller
SD-509
A0HRT2C010DB
17
FS-527
6.
6.1
EXIT TRAY SECTION

Drive
Tray2
Elevate motor (M15)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Lift belt
A0HRT2C011DB
18
6.2
Operation
6.2.1
Tray lift
A. Tray lift operation

The driving force of the worm gear mounted on the shaft of the elevate motor drives the
lift belt.
The tray2 moves up or down depending on the direction in which the lift belt is driven.
FS-527
Tray2
Tray2 upper position

switch (SW2)
Lift belt
Tray2 lower position
switch (SW3)
Tray2 upper position sensor (PS24)
Tray2 lower position sensor (PS21)
A0HRT2C012DB
B. Paper detection
The tray2 upper position sensor keeps the specified distance between the upper surface
of the paper exited to the tray2 and the paper exit opening to eliminate the misalignment
of the exited paper.
The tray2 upper position sensor and tray2 lower position sensor detect a full-of-paper
condition of the tray2.
When both of these sensors are activated, a corresponding message appears on the
control panel.
The tray2 lower position switch detects the lower limit of the tray.
19
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Elevate motor (M15)
FS-527
6.2.2
Exit to tray1
The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is fed out into the tray1 by
the tray1 exit roller by way of the registration roller and paper passage roller.
The upper lower path switching gate and tray1 path switching gate are also operated to
convey the paper into the tray1.
The paper passage motor/2 provides drive for the tray1 exit roller.
Tray1
Tray1 exit roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray1 path
switching gate
Upper lower path

switching gate
A0HRT2C015DB
20

Exit to tray2
The exit motor is energized to convey paper onto tray2.

To collect sheets of paper in the alignment section during stapling, the exit roll is temporarily retracted.
When the stapling operation is completed, the exit roll is pressed, so that the paper is fed
out into tray2.
The exit roller retraction motor provides drive for retraction of the exit roll.
FS-527
6.2.3
A. Normal paper exit operation

When the leading edge of the paper reaches a point a given distance before the tray2
exit roller, the exit motor is energized and the paper is conveyed onto tray2.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Exit motor (M5)
Tray2 exit roller

A0HRT2C013DB
21
FS-527
B. Paper exit operation during stapling

When the leading edge of the paper reaches the paper exit sensor of the main body, the
exit roller retraction motor is energized to retract the exit roll.
After the paper is processed, the exit roller retraction motor is energized to press the exit
roll and the paper is fed out by drive from the exit motor.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Exit roller retraction motor (M9)
Exit roll
Tray2 exit roller
Exit motor (M5)

A0HRT2C014DB
Before pressure
After pressure
A0HRT2C026DA
22

Tray2 shift control
The tray2 is moved to the front or rear in order to offset one copy set/stack with respect to
another in the sort or group mode.
The tray2 shift motor provides drive for the front-to-rear shift motion of the tray2.
Tray2 shift motor (M16)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray2
FS-527
6.2.4
A0HRT2C016DB
23
FS-527
A. Tray1 shift operation

When the leading edge of the paper reaches a point a given distance before the tray2
exit roller in the sort/group mode, the tray2 shift motor is energized to perform the shift
operation.
When the tray2 shift motor is energized, the shift frame is moved to the right or left via a
gear train, which results in tray2 operatively connected to the shift frame being moved to
the right or left.
If a command for the next paper is received, the tray2 shift motor is energized again to
perform the shift operation.
The shift position of the tray2 is controlled by the tray2 shift home sensor. The sensor is
activated when the tray2 is at its home position (ordinary position).
The amount of shift operation of the tray2 is 30 mm.
30 mm
Tray2 shift home sensor (PS25)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray2 shift motor (M16)
Tray2
Shift frame
A0HRT2C019DB
24
Drive
FS-527
7.1
ALIGNMENT SECTION
Alignment plate
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
7.
Alignment plate home sensor (PS17)

Alignment plate motor (M13)
A0HRT2C017DB
25
FS-527
7.2
7.2.1
Operation
Alignment plate
The alignment plates align sheets of paper in the crosswise direction inside the finisher.
The alignment plate motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to open/close the
alignment plates to perform the alignment of the paper.
The alignment plate motor rotates to open/close the alignment plates via the alignment
plate belts.
The alignment plate home sensor detects the home position of the alignment plates.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Alignment plate
Alignment plate motor

(M13)
Alignment plate home sensor (PS17)

A0HRT2C018DB
26

Alignment section conveyance mechanism
The paper fed out from the main body goes in the alignment section by its own weight.
The accommodation paddle motor operates the accommodation paddle and rewind paddles to convey paper reliably onto the alignment section.
FS-527
7.2.2
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Accommodation
paddle
Accommodation paddle
motor (M12)
Rewind paddle
A0HRT2C020DB
27
8. STAPLER
8.1
STAPLER
Drive
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
FS-527
8.
A0HRT2C027DA
Stapler unit
Stapler home sensor/1 (PS18)
Stapler movement motor (M11)
Belt
A0HRT2C021DB
28
8.2.1
Operation
Stapler movement

The stapler movement motor moves the stapler.
Rotation of the stapler movement motor drives the belt through the pulley, which moves
the stapler mounted on the belt.
The stapler stop position varies depending on the staple position and paper size.
In the two-point stapling mode, the stapler is stopped at a position a given distance relative to the stapler home sensor/2 to staple sheets.
In the one-corner stapling mode using A4 or A3 paper, the stapler stops at the stapler
home sensor/1 to staple sheets. For any other paper size, the stapler stops a position a
predetermined distance away relative to the stapler home sensor/1 to staple sheets.
FS-527
8.2
8. STAPLER
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Belt
Stapler
A0HRT2C028DA
29
8. STAPLER
8.2.2

Stapler control
FS-527
The stapling operation is performed by the stapler motor.

In the stapling operation, the stapler motor drives the clincher side to press the paper.
Then, the staple is pushed out from the stapler side and bent at the clincher side.
Stapler (clincher side)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper
Stapler (stapler side)
Stapler motor (M18)

A0HRT2C023DB
B. Staple control
(1) Stapling
After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the stapler motor performs the stapling operation.
The stapling operation is completed when the stapler home sensor in the stapler detects
the home position and turn ON.
The main body determines that staples have been jammed, if the stapler home sensor is
not activated within a predetermined period of time after it has been deactivated during a
stapling operation. The stapler motor is then rotated backward to bring the stapler back
to its home position.
(3) Staple detection and cartridge detection
When the staples run out, or if there is no cartridge loaded in position, the staple empty
switch turns ON and the main body displays a corresponding staple empty message on
the control panel.
30
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

PK-517
CONTENTS
PK-517
2.
UNIT CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................... 2
3.
PAPER PATH........................................................................................................... 3
4.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 5
5.
OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 5
5.1
Skew correction mechanism ................................................................................. 5
5.2
Punch mechanism ................................................................................................ 6
5.3
Punch status detection ......................................................................................... 7
5.4
Punch trash box full detection mechanism ........................................................... 8
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
1.
OUTLINE
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OUTLINE
PK-517
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
PK-517
1.
A. Type
Name
Punch kit
Type
FS-integrated type punching operation device
Punching method
Stops and punches every paper
No. of holes
2-3 holes / 4 holes / Sweden 4 holes
Hole diameter/pitch

4 holes / 6.5 mm / 80 mm pitch
Sweden 4 holes / 6.5 mm / 70 mm, 21 mm pitch
Supported mode
Punch mode
Applicable post processing

mode
Sort, group, staple
OUTLINE
B. Functions
C. Paper type
2 hole punch setting:
11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 14, 8-1/2 x 11/8-1/2 x 11S
Size

11 x 17, 8-1/2 x 11
A3, B4, A4, B5
Sweden 4 hole punch setting:
A3, B4, A4/A4S, B5
Supported paper
Plain paper, bond paper, thick paper 1/1+/2/3

(Main unit specifications prioritized)
Weight
60 to 256 g/m2
16 to 68 lb
Punch prohibited paper
Label paper, tab paper, transparency film, 2nd base paper, holed paper,
and the other paper that may interfere with the operation of the punch kit
or the punch blade
Dimensions
58 mm (W) x 470 mm (D) x 135 mm (H)

Weight
1.8 kg (3.97 lb)
NOTE
2. UNIT CONFIGURATION
UNIT CONFIGURATION
PK-517
2.
OUTLINE
Punch section
Punch scraps box section
A10ET1C001DB
PK-517
PAPER PATH
Punch kit
OUTLINE
3.
3. PAPER PATH
Paper path from

the main body
Punch scraps box
A10ET1C002DB
OUTLINE
PK-517
3. PAPER PATH
Blank Page
4. CONFIGURATION
PK-517
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
4.
A10ET2C001DA
5.
5.1
OPERATION
Skew correction mechanism
For punch operation, a loop is formed in the paper at the conveyance roller to correct
skew.
The paper passage sensor/1 detects the leading edge of the paper and the conveyance
roller forms a loop in the paper.
The paper passage motor/1 is then energized after a given period of time after the paper
passage sensor/1 is activated by the leading edge of the paper, this causes the conveyance roller to start turning.
Conveyance roller
Paper passage sensor/1
(PS1)
4512T2C002DA
5. OPERATION
5.2
Punch mechanism
PK-517
The paper passage sensor/1 will detect the trailing edge of the paper and stop feeding
the paper after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.
The drive cam will be rotated by the punch motor/1(2) to move the slide cam back and
forth. The slide cam will move the puncher down to make the punch hole at the back
edge of the paper. (The punch hole will be made sheet by sheet.)
Slide cam
Puncher
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch motor/1 (M100)

Paper passage
sensor/1 (PS1)
Paper feed direction
A10ET2C002DA
Puncher
Slide cam

A10ET2C004DA
5.3
5. OPERATION
Punch status detection

PK-517
The punch status is detected by the punch cam position sensor, punch home sensor/1,
and the punch pulse sensor/1.
Punch cam position sensor (PS200)
Punch pulse sensor/1 (PS300)

Punch pulse sensor/2 (PS301)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch home sensor/1 (PS100)

Punch home sensor/2 (PS101)
A10ET2C003DA
5. OPERATION
5.4
Punch trash box full detection mechanism
PK-517
The punch trash box is provided with the punch hole full sensor. When a punch waste is
detected, the corresponding message is displayed on the control panel.
The punch hole full sensor is a reflector type sensor that detects height of the punch
trash.
Punch hole full sensor also detects whether or not the punch trash box is mounted.
Punch dust full message will be displayed on the control panel when the punch trash
box is not mounted.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Punch hole full sensor (PS30)
A10ET2C005DA
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

SD-509
CONTENTS
SD-509
2.
PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 2
3.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
4.
ALIGNMENT SECTION .......................................................................................... 4
4.1
Drive ..................................................................................................................... 4
4.2
Operation .............................................................................................................. 5
4.2.1
Alignment ...................................................................................................... 5
4.2.2
Stopper ......................................................................................................... 7
5.
STAPLER ................................................................................................................ 9
5.1
Drive ..................................................................................................................... 9
5.2
Operation ............................................................................................................ 10
5.2.1
6.
Stapling ....................................................................................................... 10
FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING .......................................................................... 11
6.1
Drive ................................................................................................................... 11
6.2
Operation ............................................................................................................ 12
6.2.1
Folding plate................................................................................................ 12
6.2.2
Folding conveyance .................................................................................... 13
7.
EXIT SECTION ..................................................................................................... 15
7.1
Configuration ...................................................................................................... 15
7.2
Operation ............................................................................................................ 16
7.2.1
Exit .............................................................................................................. 16
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
1.
OUTLINE
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OUTLINE
SD-509
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
SD-509
1.
Name
Saddle sticher
Type
Built into the finisher
Installation
Screwed to the finisher
Document alignment
Center
Stapling function
Center parallel two points
OUTLINE
A. Type
B. Paper
(1) Saddle stitching
Type
Plain paper, Thick paper 1, Thick paper 2
Size
A3, B4, A4S, A3 Wide

Min: 210 mm x 279.4 mm, 8.27 inch X 11 inch
Max: 311.15 mm x 457.2 mm, 12.25 inch X 18 inch
15 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)
Max. saddle stitching capacity
14 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)

+ 1 sheet (60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 , 16 to 55.5 lb)
(2) Folding
Type
Plain paper
Size
A3, B4, A4S, A3 Wide

Min: 210 mm x 279.4 mm, 8.27 inch X 11 inch
Max: 311.15 mm x 457.2 mm, 12.25 inch X 18 inch
Max. number of sheets folded together 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)
Dimensions
239 mm (W) x 579 mm (D) x 534 mm (H)

Weight
24 kg (52.91 lb)
E. Consumables
Staples 5000 (SK-602: Staple kit)
NOTE
2. PAPER FEED PATH
PAPER FEED PATH
OUTLINE
SD-509
2.
A10DT1C001DB
3. CONFIGURATION
SD-509
CONFIGURATION
Alignment section
Stapler
Exit section
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
3.
A10DT2C001DA
4.
SD-509
4.1
ALIGNMENT SECTION
Drive
Alignment plate/R

motor/R (M23)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Alignment plate/F

motor/F (M24)
Leading edge
stopper
A10DT2C002DB
4.2.1
Operation
Alignment
In the folding/saddle stitching mode, the center staple alignment motor/F and /R aligns
paper.
The center staple alignment motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to move the
alignment plates, thereby aligning paper in the main scanning direction.
The leading edge stopper motor is rotated to raise the leading edge stopper up to a position of the paper to be stored, thereby aligning paper in the sub-scanning direction.
SD-509
4.2
Paddle
Upper paddle motor (M21)
Alignment plate/F
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

Alignment plate/R
home sensor/R (PS41)
Center staple alignment motor/R (M23)

motor/F (M24)
A10DT2C003DB
A. Alignment operation
The center staple alignment motor/F and /R rotate to open/close the alignment plates via
the alignment belts.
The center staple alignment home sensor/F and /R detect the home position of the alignment plates.
The leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the leading edge stopper in the vertical
direction via the belt.
SD-509
B. Alignment control
When the first sheet of paper undergoes a switchback operation, the center staple alignment motor/F and /R start rotating to bring the alignment plates closer to each other and
then bring them to a stop at the standby positions at which they are apart from each at a
distance slightly wider than the paper width.
The center staple alignment motor/F and /R perform the alignment operation by rotating
in the forward and reverse direction to move the alignment plate back and forth after a
specified period of time since the saddle path sensor detects the trailing edge of the
paper.
The paper alignment operation in the main scanning direction is performed each time a
sheet of paper is fed in.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
C. Paddle control
After the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the saddle path sensor has
detected the leading edge of the paper, the upper paddle motor is rotated to align the
paper in the sub-scanning direction.
The paddles are rotated each time a sheet of paper is fed in.

4.2.2
Stopper
SD-509
At the leading edge stopper, papers in sub scanning direction are aligned, and papers
conveyed to the aligning section are conveyed to the specified position.
The leading edge grip holds the paper when moving it to a specified position, or when
stapling or folding it.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A. Stopper operation
The leading edge stopper motor moves the leading edge stopper up and down in accordance with the paper size. The leading edge stopper home sensor detects the home
position.
Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS45)

Leading edge grip
Leading edge grip
Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3)

A10DT2C004DA
SD-509
B. Stopper control
(1) Folding mode
After the last sheet of paper was aligned, the leading edge grip solenoid is turned ON
and the sheets of paper are held in place.
leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the folding position.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
(2) Saddle stitching mode

After the last sheet of paper was aligned, the leading edge grip solenoid is turned ON
and the sheets of paper are held in place.
leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the saddle stitching position.
After stapling operation was completed, the center staple alignment motor/F and /R
opens the alignment plates and the leading edge stopper motor starts rotating to move
the leading edge stopper further down and lower the paper to the folding position.
Drive
SD-509
5.1
STAPLER
Staple motor
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
5.
5. STAPLER
Drive gear
A10DT2C005DA
SD-509
5. STAPLER
5.2
Operation
5.2.1
Stapling
The stapling operation is performed by the staple motor.

In the stapling operation, the staple motor in the stapler pushes out the paper press section to the clincher by the drive gear to hold the paper and punch out the staple. Then,
the staple is bent in the clincher.
Drive gear
Staple motor
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Clincher
Stapler
Staple
A10DT2C006DA
B. Staple control
(1) Stapling
After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the staple motor performs the stapling operation.
The stapling operation is completed when the sensor in the stapler detects the home
position and turn ON.
During the stapling operation, it is determined that the staple has been clogged and the
staple motor rotates in the reverse direction to replace the stapler to the home position if
the sensor in the stapler does not turn ON after a specified period of time since it turn
OFF.
10
Drive
SD-509
6.1
FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING
Folding plate
Folding roller
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
6.
6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING
Center fold roller

motor (M25)
Center fold plate

motor (M26)
A10DT2C007DB
11
SD-509
6.2
6.2.1
Operation
Folding plate
The center fold plate motor drives the folding plate.

A. Folding plate operation
The center fold plate motor rotates the crank shaft a half turn via the gear and pushes the
paper to the nip section with the folding plate.
The folding rollers draw and fold the paper.
The position of the leading edge stopper controls the folding position.
Fold plate
Crank shaft
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Folding roller
Paper
Center fold plate

home sensor (PS47)
A11RT2C014DA
B. Folding plate control

The center fold plate motor turns ON and sticks out the folding plate to the paper after a
specified period of time since the leading edge stopper stops at the folding position.
The center fold plate motor stops when the folding plate reciprocates and the center fold
plate home sensor turns ON.
12

6.2.2
Folding conveyance
SD-509
The center fold roller motor drives the folding roller.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Folding roller
Center fold roller

motor (M25)
A10DT2C009DA
13
SD-509
A. Folding conveyance control

The center fold plate motor turns ON after the leading edge stopper stops at the folding
position.
When the center fold plate motor turns ON the center fold plate home sensor, the center
fold roller motor turns ON and folds the paper.
The center fold roller motor stops after a specified period of time since the paper sensor/
2 detects the trailing edge of the paper bundle.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Paper sensor/2 (PS44)
A10DT2C010DA
B. Folding roller control

Different folding roller controls are performed depending on the number of sheets of
paper and the size of the paper.
(1) The paper width is 215.9 mm or more and the number of sheets of paper is less
than six
When the center fold plate home sensor is deactivated after the center fold plate motor
has been energized, the center fold roller motor is energized to start rotating at low
speed.
The folding roller is made to start rotating at high speed after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after it has started rotating.
When the paper sensor/2 detects the trailing edge of the paper stack, the leading edge
stopper motor is energized to raise the leading edge stopper to the alignment position
defined according to the paper size.
(2) Other than above
The center fold roller motor is energized to start rotating at low speed a predetermined
period of time before the paper stack reaches the center fold position.
The center fold plate motor is energized and, after the lapse of a predetermined period of
time after the center fold plate home sensor has been deactivated, the folding roller is
made to start rotating at high speed.
When the paper sensor/2 detects the trailing edge of the paper stack, the leading edge
stopper motor is energized to raise the leading edge stopper to the alignment position
defined according to the paper size.
14
Configuration
Booklet tray near full

sensor (PS48)
SD-509
7.1
EXIT SECTION
Booklet tray full

sensor (PS50)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
7.
7. EXIT SECTION
A10DT2C008DA
15
7. EXIT SECTION
SD-509
7.2
7.2.1
Operation
Exit
The paper fed out by the center fold roller motor is stacked in the tray by its own weight.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
A. Full-of-paper detection
The capacity of the tray varies depending on the number of sheets of paper in the paper
sets/stacks fed into the tray and detection of a full-of-paper condition cannot be made
based on the number of sheets of paper stacked in the tray.
The main body therefore counts the number of sheets of paper stacked and detects a
full-of-paper condition when a predetermined number of sheets of paper is reached.
If the booklet tray full sensor remains activated for a predetermined period of time, the
main body determines that paper can no longer be fed into the tray and that there is a
full-of-paper condition in the tray.
B. Full-of-paper detection conditions
The booklet tray full sensor is activated.
The booklet tray near full sensor is activated when the power switch is turned ON.
The number of sets/stacks stacked in the tray reaches a predetermined value during
copying.
A set/stack having a paper length different from that fed out earlier is fed out.
The main body does not determine that there is a full-of-paper condition in the tray under
any condition other than above.
16
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

JS-603
CONTENTS
JS-603
1.
2.
PAPER PATH........................................................................................................... 2
3.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
4.
DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 4
5.
OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 5
Conveyance/exit section ....................................................................................... 5
5.1.1
Paper conveyance......................................................................................... 5
5.1.2
Conveyance path switching........................................................................... 5
5.1.3
Full-of-paper detecting mechanism............................................................... 6
5.1.4
Exit roller pressure/retraction ........................................................................ 7
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
5.1
OUTLINE
OUTLINE
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OUTLINE
JS-603
Blank Page
ii
OUTLINE
JS-603
1.
Name
Job separator
Type
Fixed to the finisher
Document alignment
Center
OUTLINE
A. Type
B. Functions
Modes
Sort, group
C. Paper
Size
Type
Capacity
Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2)

(16 to 24 lb)
100 sheets
Thick paper 1 (91 to 120 g/m2)

(24.25 to 32 lb)
A5S, B5S/B5, A4S/A4, B4, A3, A3 Wide
5-1/2 X 8-1/2S, 8-1/2 X 11S/8-1/2 X 11, 8-1/2 X
14, 11 X 17, 12-1/4 X 18
Max.: 311.15 mm X 457.2 mm
12.25 inch X 18 inch
Min.: 139.7 mm X 182 mm
5.5 inch X 7.17 inch
Thick paper 1+ (121 to 157 g/m2)

(32.25 to 41.75 lb)
(42 to 55.5 lb)
Special
paper

(55.75 to 68 lb)
10 sheets

(68.25 to 80 lb)
OHP film
Label
Envelope
Power requirements
DC 24 V 10 % (supplied from the main body)

DC5 V 5 %
Dimensions
165 mm (W) X 389 mm (D) X 63 mm (H)

6.5 inch (W) X 15.31 inch (D) X 2.48 inch (H)
Weight
1.0 kg (2.2 lb)
NOTE
2. PAPER PATH
PAPER PATH
OUTLINE
JS-603
2.
A10FT1C001DA
3. CONFIGURATION
JS-603
CONFIGURATION
Conveyance/exit section
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
3.
A10FT2C002DB
4. DRIVE
DRIVE
JS-603
4.
Tray3 full sensor (PS36)
Tray3 exit roller retraction

motor (M17)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35)

A10FT2C003DA
OPERATION
5.1
5.1.1
Conveyance/exit section
JS-603
5.
5. OPERATION
Paper conveyance
The paper passage motor/1 is energized a predetermined period of time after the paper
has activated the paper passage sensor/1.
Drive of the paper passage motor/1 rotates the exit roller, so that paper is conveyed into
the tray.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Exit roller
A10FT2C004DB
5.1.2
Conveyance path switching
The horizontal conveyance section of FS-527 is provided with a conveyance path switching mechanism for conveying paper onto JS-603. For details of the mechanism, see the
horizontal conveyance section of FS-527.
5. OPERATION
5.1.3
Full-of-paper detecting mechanism
JS-603
The tray3 full sensor is located at the exit of the tray, detecting a full-of-paper condition of
the tray.
The actuator is operated each time paper is fed into the tray. When the level of paper fed
into the tray reaches a predetermined value (capacity), the sensor is blocked and the
main body determines that the tray is full of paper.
The number of sheets of paper that is detected as a full-of-paper condition is 100 sheets
in terms of plain paper.
The number of sheets of paper detected as a full-of-paper condition, however, varies
depending on the environmental conditions and the amount of curl in paper.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Tray3 full sensor (PS36)
Actuator
A10FT2C005DA

Exit roller pressure/retraction
The tray is provided with an exit roller pressure/retraction mechanism that allows paper
to be temporarily fed into the tray when a 2-sided print cycle is commanded.
When a pressure/retraction command is received, the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is
energized. Then, the lifting cam is rotated a half turn, which causes the lifting lever to
swing up and down, so that the exit roller is pressed and retracted.
JS-603
5.1.4
5. OPERATION
Lifting cam
Lifting lever
Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION

sensor (PS35)
Exit roller
A10FT2C006DA
Pressure
Retraction
Lifting cam
Lifting lever
Exit roller
A10FT2C007DB
5. OPERATION
JS-603
A. Exit roller pressure/retraction overview

The exit roller is in its retracted condition during a normal print cycle. It is pressed when
paper exit into tray3 during a 2-sided print cycle.
When the main body is turned or retracted from the sleep mode, or the front door open/
close, the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is energized to bring the exit roller into its
retracted condition, which is done to determine the condition of the exit roller.
Roller pressure/retraction condition
Normal printing
Retracted
2-sided printing (except for small size paper)

The main body is turned ON or retracted from the sleep mode,
or the front door is opened/closed
Retracted pressed retracted
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
B. Exit roller pressure/retraction operation

When the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is energized, the lifting cam is rotated a half
turn. The lifting lever is then raised and lowered to complete a pressure/retraction operation.
Whether the tray3 exit roller retraction sensor is blocked or unblocked determines the
condition of the exit roller, either pressed or retracted.
When the tray3 exit roller retraction sensor is blocked and unblocked, the tray3 exit roller
retraction motor is deenergized to stop the operation.
Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor
Pressed
Blocked
Retracted
Unblocked
Exit roller
Lifting cam
Lifting lever

motor (M17)
Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35)

A10FT2C008DA
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

AU-101/AU-102/AU-201/OT-503
AU-101/AU-102
1.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 1
2.
OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 1
AU-201
1.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 2
2.
OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 2
OUTLINE
AU-101/102/201
OT-503
CONTENTS
1.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
2.
OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 3
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OT-503
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
OUTLINE
AU-101/102/201
OT-503
Blank Page
ii
1. CONFIGURATION
1.
AU-101/102/201
OT-503
AU-101/AU-102
CONFIGURATION
Ultra-red LED
Finger
Vein image
Camera
A00JT2C256AA
Vein
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Authentication unit (AU-101)
Finger
2.
A0P0T2C581AA
OPERATION
A finger vein pattern is used for personal identification.

Vein patterns are inside the body and cannot be visually recognized. This makes vein
patterns extremely difficult to forge or falsify. The vein pattern authentication system can
provide high security.
With ultra-red LED radiation, a finger vein pattern is captured by camera and its image is
created. The vein pattern image is registered and a person can be identified if the persons vein pattern matches the registered one at the time of user authentication.
1. CONFIGURATION
AU-101/102/201
OT-503
AU-201
1.
CONFIGURATION
Abcde Fgdhi
ABCDE_Co.
Non-contact IC card
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
2.
A00HT2C302AA
OPERATION
A non-contact IC card, such as an employee ID card, is used for personal identification.

The system supports the communications protocol in compliance with Type A, Type B,
and Felica (Type C) of ISO14443.
It can be used that the card corresponded to Felica, TypeA, SSFC (Shared Security Formats Cooperation), FCF (Felica common-use format), or FCF campus.
Simply placing the IC card on the authentication unit will let the unit read the data from
the card.
1. CONFIGURATION
1.
AU-101/102/201
OT-503
OT-503
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
Fan unit
Paper exit tray

A092T2C501AA
2.
OPERATION
Output Tray OT-503 is comprised a fan unit and a paper exit tray.
In order to avoid toner adhesion to other things, three tucking fan motors installed in the
fan unit send outside air to an ejected paper for cool it down.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
AU-101/102/201
OT-503
2. OPERATION
Blank Page
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

EK-604/605/SC-507
EK-604
1.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 1
2.
OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 1
EK-605
1.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 2
2.
OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 3
SC-507
1.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 4
2.
OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 4
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
EK-604/605/SC-507
CONTENTS
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
EK-604/605/SC-507
Blank Page
ii
1. CONFIGURATION
1.
EK-604/605/SC-507
EK-604
CONFIGURATION
USB terminal (standard)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
USB terminal (extension)
Local Interface Kit EK-604

A0YCT2C502AA
2.
OPERATION
The document can be printed directly from, or saved in, the USB memory.
Connecting the USB keyboard (dealer option: overseas market only) will permit keyboard
input.
1. CONFIGURATION
EK-604/605/SC-507
EK-605
1.
CONFIGURATION
USB terminal (standard)
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
USB terminal (extension)

A0YCT2C504AA
OPERATION
The document can be printed directly from, or saved in, the USB memory.
Connecting the USB keyboard (dealer option: overseas market only) will permit keyboard
input.
The local interface kit is mounted when the voice guidance function and functions interacting with the portable phone or PDA (portable data terminal) compatible with Bluetooth
are to be used. It has a built-in speaker and Bluetooth communication receiver.
Using Bluetooth, the user can print files directly from the portable phone, download and
print PDF or other files from the portable phone, or save them in a box.
If an XHTML file is downloaded from the portable phone, an image file can be downloaded from the URL described in XHTML and printed as an image onto a location specified in the XHTML document.
Portable phone, PDA
A0YCT2C503AA
EK-604/605/SC-507
2.
2. OPERATION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
1. CONFIGURATION
EK-604/605/SC-507
SC-507
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
1.
Security Kit SC-507
A0Y9T2C501AA
2.
OPERATION
The security kit offers the copy guard (copy prohibited) and password copy functions in
addition to the conventional copy protect function. The copy guard security pattern or
password copy security pattern printed on the original is detected to thereby prevent
unauthorized copies from being produced.
* The copy guard security pattern and password copy security pattern can be detected
only by the Konica Minolta machine mounted with the copy guard and password copy
functions.
Copy
Print
Detecting the copy
guard security pattern to discard the
job.
Making a copy from an

output produced by adding the copy guard security pattern or password
copy security pattern.
Copying enabled through
password input.
A0Y9T2C504AA
SERVICE MANUAL
THEORY OF OPERATION
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
Revision mark:
corresponding page.
NOTE
2010/12
1.0
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark

SA-502
CONTENTS
SA-502
1.
CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 1
2.
OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 1
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
SA-502
Blank Page
ii
1. CONFIGURATION
SA-502
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
1.
Scan accelerator kit SA-502

A0P0T2C622AA
2.
OPERATION
By mounting the scan accelerator kit, the image can be processed at high speed during
scan transmission, thus improving performance in scan functions.
The scan accelerator kit is mounted at the FAX line 2, which disables addition of the FAX
line 2.
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION
SA-502
2. OPERATION
Blank Page
2010 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.

Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Printed in Japan
DDA2WU-M-TE1

652 Service

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

652 Service

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

SERVICE MANUAL

THEORY OF OPERATION TOTAL CONTENTS

bizhub 652/552/602/502 Main body

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER,

CAUTION is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited

:Precaution when servicing the

Electric hazard High temperature

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT.

Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.).

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[2] POWER PLUG SELECTION

Power Cord Set or Power Plug

- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

Connection to Power Supply

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Power Plug and Cord

Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check

Check whether dust is collected around the power plug

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.

Prohibited Installation Places

When not Using the Product for a long time

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Inspection before Servicing

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Inspection before Servicing

Work Performed with the Product Powered On

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Handling of Service Materials

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[4] Used Batteries Precautions

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[5] Laser Safety

Internal Laser Radiation

Maximum average radiation power (*)

*at laser aperture of the Print Head Unit

Print Head Unit

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Laserdiodens hjeste styrke

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Laser Safety Label

* Only for the U.S.A.

Laser Caution Label

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN

MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

Composition of the service manual

Explanation of system configuration,

Explanation of configuration of each unit,